JP2020028540A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve an amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine may execute a first display performance, as one performance of plural display performances, and may execute a second display performance as one performance of the plural display performances. When the first display performance is executed, jackpot is established, and when a first condition is satisfied, a state is shifted to a first game state which is relatively advantageous to a player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot. When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, a state is shifted to a second game state which is relatively disadvantageous to a player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot. When the second display performance is executed, the jackpot is not established, however, in the jackpot, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, a state is shifted to the first game state, and in a ready-to-win performance in a prescribed game mode, any one of the first display performance and the second display performance is selected.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 140

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball is awarded to a starting port (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like can be performed.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-202930 JP-A-2006-198339 JP-A-2006-182376

  However, even with the above-described gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest in the gaming.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problem, and has as its object to improve the interest of a game.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section show a correspondence relationship with an embodiment described later in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application Example 1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
When the first display effect is performed, the jackpot is determined, and if the first condition is satisfied, the game proceeds to a first gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, If a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the game shifts to a second gaming state relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot,
If the second display effect is performed, the jackpot is not determined, but in the case of a jackpot, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the state shifts to the first game state,
When a reach effect is performed in a predetermined game mode, one of the first display effect and the second display effect is selected.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Application Example 2]
A gaming machine according to application example 1,
The first display effect is a battle-reach effect in which a first character and a second character battle.
The second display effect is a non-battle reach effect different from the battle reach,
When the first display effect is performed, a jackpot is determined, and if the first character wins, the game shifts to a first gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, and If the first character loses, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the game shifts to a second gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous for the player.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Application Example 3]
A gaming machine according to application example 2,
In the battle-reach effect, a meter is displayed, the meter value represented by the meter is reduced by the predetermined number of battles, and if the meter value decreases to a predetermined value, the first character wins and the first game state Migrate to,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Application Example 4]
A gaming machine according to application example 2 or application example 3,
In the non-battle reach effect, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined mission is successful is executed. If the predetermined mission is successful, a jackpot is determined, and after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the Shift to the first game state,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Application Example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 2 to 4,
In the battle-type reach effect, a display of participation of a predetermined character in the battle is performed, and the greater the number of battles, the higher the probability that the first character will win.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Application Example 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 2 to 5, wherein
The predetermined game mode is a mode indicating that the game state is a probable change state,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the interest of a game can be improved.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of indicators. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of a sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. It is a figure for explaining various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for explaining judgment tables T1-T4. It is explanatory drawing of the big hit type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation | variation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation | variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of a power chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is an explanatory view of a special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. 9 is a flowchart of a main timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 pre-determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 pre-determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol changing process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of a special electric auditors product process. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a V area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a reserved ball number process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of a sub timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for describing a configuration of a pre-determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation effect start process. It is an explanatory view of a key effect pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of a process during a fluctuation effect. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable part 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable part 15. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern fluctuation production A. It is a figure for explaining decorative design fluctuation production B. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern change production C. It is a figure for explaining decorative design fluctuation production D. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern target production A. It is a figure for explaining decorative design target production B. It is a figure for explaining decorative design target production C. It is a figure for explaining decorative design target production D. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern superimposition effect A at the time of a reach. It is a figure for explaining the decoration design superimposition effect B at the time of the reach. It is a figure for explaining decorative symbol superimposition effect C at the time of reach. It is a figure for explaining decorative design superimposition effect D at the time of reach. It is a figure for explaining character appearance production A. It is a figure for explaining character appearance production B. It is a figure for explaining character appearance production C. It is a figure for explaining character appearance production D. It is a figure for explaining big hit symbol arrangement display effect A. It is a figure for explaining big hit symbol arrangement display production B. It is a figure for explaining big hit symbol arrangement display production C. It is a figure for explaining big hit symbol arrangement display effect D. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern big hit suggestion effect A. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern big hit suggestion effect B. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern big hit suggestion effect C. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern big hit suggestion effect D. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern superimposition effect A. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern superimposition effect B. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern superimposition effect C. It is a figure for explaining decorative design superimposition effect D. It is a figure for explaining big hit background display production A. It is a figure for explaining big hit background display production B. It is a figure for explaining big hit background display production C. It is a figure for explaining big hit background display production D. It is a figure for explaining a multiple timer production A. It is a figure for explaining a multiple timer production B. It is a figure for explaining a multiple timer effect C. It is a figure for explaining a multiple timer effect D. It is a figure for explaining timer production A. It is a figure for explaining timer production B. It is a figure for explaining timer production C. It is a figure for explaining timer production D. It is a figure for explaining timer speed production A. It is a figure for explaining timer speed production B. It is a figure for explaining timer speed production C. It is a figure for explaining timer speed production D. It is a figure for explaining timer count effect A. It is a figure for explaining timer count effect B. It is a figure for explaining timer count effect C. It is a figure for explaining timer count effect D. It is a figure for explaining movable character timer effect A. It is a figure for explaining movable character timer effect B. It is a figure for explaining movable character timer effect C. It is a figure for explaining movable character timer effect D. It is a figure for explaining icon selection effect A. It is a figure for explaining icon selection effect A. It is a figure for explaining icon selection effect A. It is a figure for explaining icon selection effect A. It is a figure for explaining production A during change. It is a figure for explaining production B during a change. It is a figure for explaining production C during change. It is a figure for explaining production D during change. It is a figure for explaining character display effect A. It is a figure for explaining character display effect B. It is a figure for explaining character display effect C. It is a figure for explaining character display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending in-line continuation suggestion effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending in-serial Chang suggestion effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending in-line continuation suggestion effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending in-line continuation suggestion effect D. It is a figure for explaining error display production A. It is a figure for explaining error display production B. It is a figure for explaining error display production C. It is a figure for explaining error display production D. It is a figure for explaining predetermined information display effect A. It is a figure for explaining predetermined information display production B. It is a figure for explaining predetermined information display production C. It is a figure for explaining predetermined information display production D. It is a figure for explaining holding icon move production A. It is a figure for explaining holding icon move production B. It is a figure for explaining holding icon move production C. It is a figure for explaining holding icon move production D. It is a figure for explaining holding icon superimposition effect A. It is a figure for explaining hold icon superimposition effect B. It is a figure for explaining holding icon superimposition effect C. It is a figure for explaining hold icon superimposition effect D. It is a figure for explaining holding display pattern 1 and holding display pattern 2 among holding special display effects. It is a figure for explaining holding display pattern 3 and holding display pattern 4 among holding special display effects. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display pattern 5 and the hold display pattern 6 among hold special display effects. It is a figure for explaining hold display pattern 7 and hold display pattern 8 among hold special display effects. It is a figure for explaining operation means image display production A. It is a figure for explaining operation means image display production B. It is a figure for explaining operation means image display production C. It is a figure for explaining operation means image display production D. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect A during a probable change. It is a figure for explaining production B during probable change. It is a figure for explaining production C during a certainty change. It is a figure for explaining production D during a certainty change. It is a figure for explaining battle effect A. It is a figure for explaining battle effect B. It is a figure for explaining battle effect C. It is a figure for explaining battle production D.

<First embodiment>
1. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. Hereinafter, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described in accordance with the left-right direction viewed from a player facing the gaming machine 1. The front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player to the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires a game ball based on a shooting operation of a player and, when the game ball wins a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is mounted inside the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. Have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

  The handle 60 is disposed at a lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and fires a game ball with a firing strength corresponding to a rotation angle. The hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is disposed below the hit ball feeding tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball feeding tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by a player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit imitating a sword shape, and can be pushed downward by a player at the time of an effect performed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the handle of the sword. The sword button 65 is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect performed along with the progress of the game. You. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to execute two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform a sound effect during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided above the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state protruding above the front frame 53.

  The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decorative body 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and an ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , A gate (through chucker) 28, a first winning device (first attacker) 31, a second winning device (second attacker) 36, a general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), and a general winning An opening 29 (normal winning opening 29), an out opening 16, and an indicator 40 are provided.

  The game area 3 is an area where a game ball fired by operating the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are provided in a protruding manner. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball fired by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

  The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A has a display screen 7a. The second image display device 7B includes a display screen 7b. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device or another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screens 7a and 7b of the image display device 7 include a first effect symbol display area in which effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), an effect symbol (decorative symbols) 8L, A second effect symbol display area in which other decorative symbols different from 8C and 8R are variably displayed, a reserved image display area in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a reserved digest image display in which reserved digest images 9C are displayed. And an area. The suspension images 9A and 9B are images representing suspension and are also referred to as suspension icons 9A and 9B. The reservation digest image 9C is an image representing the reservation, and is also referred to as the reservation image 9C or the reservation icon 9C. The first holding icon and the second holding icon are collectively referred to simply as holding icons.

  The first effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed. A medium effect design (medium decoration design) 8C is displayed in the middle design display area. In the right symbol display area, a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. The fluctuation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the fluctuation display of a first special symbol and a second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, according to a combination of effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  For example, when a jackpot is won, the effect design is stopped and displayed with a slot number such as “777”. In the case of a loss, the effect design is stopped and displayed with a break such as "637". This makes it easy for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. In addition, the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed. In addition, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling up and down or another mode. What combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect that displays the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as a "effect effect of the effect symbol", a "effect effect of the decorative symbol", or simply as a "effect effect". Note that, in the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in a period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop thereof (also referred to as a special symbol change period) is counted as one variable effect (one cycle of change effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variable effect of the decorative symbol.

  Further, the second effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) not shown is displayed. In the middle symbol display area, a middle effect symbol (middle decoration symbol) not shown is displayed. In the right symbol display area, a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) not shown is displayed. The effect symbols displayed in the second effect symbol display area are the same as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first effect symbol display area, and are smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is displayed.

  The image display device 7 can display, on the display screens 7a and 7b, a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol change effect. . In the effect design fluctuation effect, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed in addition to the effect design. Further, the image display device 7 is capable of indicating that the special symbol is fluctuating or indicating the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (a fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

  The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved images 9A according to the number of stored first special figure reservations described later, and displays a reserved image 9B according to the stored number of the second special figure reservations described later. And a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure reservation displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a described later and the second special figure reservation displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digest image display area includes a reserved digest display area for displaying the reserved digest image 9C. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (directive symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b. (2) The fact that the special figure reservation is consumed (to be described later, “the special figure reservation is consumed”) can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  Below the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable role 14), which is a so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable role object 14 is configured such that a plate-shaped member can move up and down. Normally, the first movable role object 14 is stationary at the retreat position (FIG. 1) below the display device 7, and moves upward (moves) upward from the retreat position and stops at the advanced position (FIG. 16). be able to. The first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

  The center decoration 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A movable second panel movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15) is attached to the center decorative body 10. A stage 11 is formed below the center decorative body 10. The stage section 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage section 11 to a first starting port 20 described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 includes an entrance into which game balls flow, and an exit through which game balls flow.

  The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the game area 3 and has a first starting port (a first starting winning port, a first ball) where the ease of entering a game ball does not always change. Mouth, fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger of the lottery of the first special symbol (big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like and determining a jackpot.

  The normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is disposed below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball input port, variable starting port) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is a trigger of the lottery of the second special symbol (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tube solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). The game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. Note that the electric chew 22 only needs to be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter a ball.

  The gate (through chucker) 28 is disposed above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass therethrough. The passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger of the ordinary symbol lottery for determining whether to open the electric chew 22 or not. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 usually triggers acquisition of symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) and determination of hits.

  Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired random number is determined in advance. This is a process of determining whether or not a big hit has occurred by comparing with a value corresponding to the “big hit”. The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but a variation display of the special symbol is performed on a first special symbol display 41a or a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is displayed. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbols is performed, and the result of the jackpot lottery is more effectively notified to the player by the symbol matching game.

  In addition, “lottery of ordinary symbols” means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for ordinary symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined “hit”. Is a process of determining whether or not a hit has occurred. With respect to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, performs a variation display of the ordinary symbol, and performs a predetermined variation. When the time has elapsed, the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

  The first big prize device (first attacker, first special variable prize device) 31 is disposed at the upper right of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big prize port (the first special prize port) 30 is provided. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first special winning opening 30 is provided with an opening / closing member (first special winning opening / closing member) 32 that allows or impedes the reception of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first special winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). When the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the first large winning opening 30 allows game balls to enter.

  The first big winning device 31 includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , A first big winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening / closing member 71, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions in the first big winning device 31 through which game balls passing through the first big winning opening 30 can pass. . The first special winning opening sensor 30a is disposed upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects a winning of a game ball to the first special winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39, and detects the passage of a game ball to the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V region 70, and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball having passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. The first state (rotating state) of distributing to the V region 39 is obtained, and the second state (stop state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V region 70 at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing a game ball passing through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. You may comprise so that it may move to the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retreat state (first state) where game balls are distributed to the V region 39, and when the V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, an advance state where game balls are distributed to the non-V region 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball to the V region 39 is a trigger for shifting to a high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a positive change operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a positive change operation port. The first special winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first special winning device discharge sensor (not shown) for counting the number of game balls discharged from the first special winning device 31. The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

  The second big winning device (the second attacker, the second special variable winning device) 36 is disposed at the upper right of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (the second special winning opening) 35. It has. The second special winning opening 35 is provided with an opening / closing member (a second special winning opening opening / closing member, a movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows the reception of the game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second winning port solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). When the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter.

The general winning opening 27 is provided below the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided at a lower portion of the game area 3, and discharges a game ball that has not won any of the winning ports to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. The details of the indicators 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30.

  The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called “left hit”. On the other hand, a method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called “right hit”. In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting opening 20 by left-handing. On the other hand, it is configured so that the player can aim at passing through the gate 28 and winning at the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 by right-handing.

  FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , A general-purpose hold display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The ordinary symbol display 42 variably displays the ordinary symbols. The first special figure holding display 43a displays the number of operation holdings (first special figure holding) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special figure display 43b displays the number of stored operation hold (second special figure hold) of the second special symbol display 41b. The general symbol holding display 44 displays the number of operation symbols (normal symbol holding) stored in the normal symbol indicator 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when a game ball is awarded to the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as “special symbols”. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

  The special symbol display 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays the special symbol (stop) to thereby perform a lottery based on a winning in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (a lottery per special symbol). , Jackpot lottery). The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable symbol and the stopped symbol) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first large winning opening 30 is formed in an open pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed (winning jackpot type). Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) for opening the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later) is won, the left and right, such as "OOOOOOOO" (O: ON, OFF: OFF) , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit and the big hit symbol is displayed. In the case of a loss, a loss pattern in which only the rightmost LED is turned on, such as "●●●●●●● ○", is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off as the losing symbol may be adopted. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variable time. In the variation display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the mode of the variable display, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball is won (entered) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various random number values (numerical information) such as a jackpot random number acquired for the winning are obtained. Are temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first opening 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85 a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second starting opening 21. Are stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in the present embodiment is set for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is digested when a special symbol based on the special figure reservation can be variably displayed. The “extinguishment of special figure reservation” refers to determining a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation, and executing variable display of a special symbol for indicating the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if there is a prize during the middle game or during the execution of the special game, the right of the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of special figure reservations.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 displays the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 by variably displaying (variable display) the normal symbols and then displaying the stopped symbols. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol stopped symbol, the ordinary symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol of a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Is performed. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

  The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays an ordinary symbol corresponding to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a winning, a normal winning symbol in which both LEDs are turned on is displayed such as “○” (○: turned on, ●: turned off). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern in which only the right LED is lit, such as “● ○”, is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal losing symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is fluctuated for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variation display mode, for example, both LEDs may be alternately lit. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the mode of the variable display, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the ordinary symbol random number (per random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the general figure storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once stored. There is an upper limit to the number of general-purpose reservations that can be stored in the general-purpose reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The general figure hold stored in the general figure hold storage area 86 is exhausted when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the ordinary symbol hold refers to determining a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol hold and executing variable display of the ordinary symbol for indicating the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passing, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the execution of the auxiliary game, the prize is won. Even in the case where there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage up to the predetermined number. The number of general-purpose reservations is displayed on the general-purpose reservation display 44. The general-purpose reservation indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general-purpose reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of general-purpose reservations.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 on the main control board side. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 on the sub control board side. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls a game profit such as a jackpot lottery or a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that performs control relating to an effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, and forms a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

  The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of a storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from another board via an input / output circuit (I / O port) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives a signal output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first special winning opening sensor 30a, a second special winning opening sensor 35a, and a V region. The sensor 39a, the non-V region sensor 70a, and the normal winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chuck solenoid 24, the first winning port solenoid 33, the second winning port solenoid 38, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has won the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28, and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won the first special winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball passing through the non-V region 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed inside the normal winning opening 29. The electric tube solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric tube 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening and closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening and closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

  The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, an ordinary symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, a second special symbol reservation display 43b, and a general symbol reservation. The display of the display 44 is controlled.

  A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120, a ball lending device 130, and a card unit 135, and a firing device 112 is connected via a firing control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out a prize ball. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental device 130 pays out a ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball-lending motor 131 of the ball-lending-payout apparatus 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 and pays out a ball rental. The paid-out ball rental is detected by the ball-ball rental sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information relating to ball lending based on information on the inserted prepaid card or the like. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. The firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the rotation amount of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115 when the player operates the handle 60. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  The sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a non-illustrated unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction regulating unit is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

  The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls a game effect of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM that executes the program stored in the sub-ROM 93. And a CPU 92. Details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via the input / output circuit 95.

  The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls display of the image display device 7 (the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. The ROM 103 stores, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, and the like. ) And background image data. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

  A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 performs voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. And so on. Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may be mounted with a ROM, and may store sound data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  The lamp control board 107 is connected to the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role 14, and the second movable role 15, and controls these. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls lighting of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and determines the light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The first movable accessory 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided below the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15, and creates the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 14 according to the operation pattern data. 2 Control the operation of movable movable object 15. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute the lighting control of the lamp and the operation control of the movable objects 14 and 15 based on the command. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to a light emission pattern or an operation pattern.

  The effect button detection switch 63a and the frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch for detecting that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed down, a touch sensor provided on the front frame 53 and outputting a detection signal when a human body comes into contact. It may be connected.

3. Data Structure of Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

  The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A) stores a big hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a big hit type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a special winning opening opening pattern judgment table T8, and a V opening / closing member opening pattern judgment table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in a main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reserved storage area 85, and a general figure reserved storage. An area 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit to the sub control unit is set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes a pre-determination command, a pending ball count command, A change start command, a change stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V pass command, a customer waiting standby command, and the like are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the gaming state are set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, A V flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main processing (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability change counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set therein. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which a status in a special operation process described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth first special figure reservations, respectively. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b stores first random number groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth second special figure reservations, respectively. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general figure holding storage area 86 stores a random number group (holding information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth general figure holdings. Storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area. In the main RAM 84, in addition to the above-mentioned area, a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable characters 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 are set. A driving data buffer and the like are provided.

  The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in a sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which a command input from the main control unit is stored in the sub-control main processing (described later), and includes a pre-determination command, a pending ball count command, a change start command, and a change start command. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting standby command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set ( Output buffer), in which a variable effect start command, a command before change end, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The preliminary determination information storage area 94c stores preliminary determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main processing (described later) is set, and includes a random number counter, a first special figure holding effect counter, a second special figure holding effect counter, and a general figure holding effect counter. , A probability change effect counter, a time reduction effect counter, and the like are set.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows random numbers obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers obtained by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. I have. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a “big hit random number”, a “big hit random number”, a “reach random number”, a “variation pattern random number”, and a “normal symbol random number (per random number)” at a later-described timing. It is configured as follows. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery determination (big hit determination) as to whether or not a big hit occurs, and takes a value in a range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used in the lottery of the big hit type (big hit type determination) and takes a value in a range of 0 to 127. The “reach random number” is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect design fluctuation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is a loss, and a value in a range of 0 to 127 Take. The reach is a state in which one of the plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols) that are variably displayed is the remaining one, and depends on which of the variably displayed effect symbols is stopped and displayed. Means a state of a combination of effect symbols indicating a jackpot winning (for example, a state of “7 ↓ 7”). The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if swinging in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and takes a value in a range from 0 to 127. The “normal symbol random number (per random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. Normally, the design random number takes a value in a range from 0 to 255. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on a ball entering the starting port (the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21). The random number group acquired based on the ball entering the first opening 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group acquired based on the ball entering the second opening 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “ordinary symbol random number (per random number)” is acquired based on the passage through the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random number value is stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area 86.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire “prefetch effect random number” and “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The “prefetch effect random number” is a random number used for determining a prefetch effect at the time of a variable effect, and takes a value in a range of 0 to 127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used to determine a chance-up effect at the time of a variable effect, and takes a value in a range from 0 to 127. The “prefetch effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the preliminary determination command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The obtained random number group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance-up random number” is obtained based on the output of the change start command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. Is a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D is a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

  The jackpot determination table T1 indicates whether the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the acquired jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to a “big hit” or a “loss”. This is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, in the “normal probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”, it is determined to be “jackpot”, and the jackpot random number value is a value other than “0 to 164 (165 to 65535). In the case of ")", it is indicated that the determination is "losing". In addition, in the “high probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 649”, it is determined to be “jackpot”, and when the jackpot random number value is “a value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)”. Is determined to be "losing". The contents of the “normal probability state” and the “high probability state” will be described later.

  The reach determination table T2 indicates that the reach random number (any of 0 to 127) obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to “reach present” or “reach no”. This is a table that is referred to to determine whether or not the information is stored. In FIG. 8B, in the “non-time saving state”, when the reach random number is “0 to 13”, it is determined that “reach is present” and the reach random number is “a numerical value other than 0 to 13 (14 to 13). 127)), it is indicated that it is determined that there is no reach. Further, in the “time reduction state”, when the reach random number is “0 to 5”, it is determined that “reach is present”, and when the reach random number is “a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”, Indicates that “reach is not performed” is determined. The contents of the "time reduction state" and the "non-time reduction state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is more difficult to reach at the time of loss than in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. This is because the speed of digesting the suspension of the special figure is increased by selecting more losing without reach having a short fluctuation time in the time reduction state.

  The normal symbol hit determination table T3 indicates that the acquired normal symbol random number (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to “hit” or “loss” in the main control main process (described later) of the game control microcomputer 81. This is a table that is referred to to determine whether to perform. In FIG. 8C, in the “non-time saving state”, when the ordinary symbol random number is “0 to 2”, it is determined to be “hit”, and the ordinary symbol random number is set to a value other than “0 to 2 (3 ２５255) ”indicates that it is determined to be“ losing ”. In addition, in the “time saving state”, when the ordinary symbol random number is “0 to 254”, it is determined to be “hit”, and when the ordinary symbol random number is “a numerical value (255) other than 0 to 254”, , "Losing".

  In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the variation time of the ordinary symbol depends on the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is a table that is referred to. In FIG. 8 (D), when in the “non-time saving state”, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be “30 seconds”, and in the “time reduction state”, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be “1 second”. It has been shown.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 indicates that the jackpot type and the special symbol are determined by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in accordance with the jackpot type random number (any of 0 to 127) acquired. It is a table that is referred to to determine “type”. In FIG. 9, when the random number value of the jackpot type is “0 to 24” when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV passing planned jackpot”, and The stop symbol of No. 1 (the special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the random number value of the jackpot type is “25 to 49”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “big hit symbol 2”. When the jackpot type random number value is “50 to 55”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “big hit symbol 3”. If the random number value of the jackpot type is “56 to 67”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “big hit symbol 4”. When the jackpot type random number value is “68 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 5”. On the other hand, if the random number value of the jackpot type is “0 to 82” in the case of winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV passing scheduled jackpot”, and The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the random number value of the jackpot type is “83 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “big hit symbol 5”. By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, "opening (OP) command" of special game, "round designation command", "ending (ED)" Command "can also be specified. About the specific contents of "16RV passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" It will be described later.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine a variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random number (0 to 127). . In FIG. 10, for example, when the first starting port 20 is won in the non-time saving state, “losing” is determined in the jackpot determination table T 1, “reach is determined” in the reach determination table T 2, and the number of reserved balls is “1”. ２2 ”, and when the variation pattern random number is“ 0 to 60 ”, the variation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second starting port 21 is won in the time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines “big hit”, the jackpot type determination table T5 determines “16RV passing expected big hit”, and the variation pattern random number value. Indicates that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “P61”. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching, it is also determined whether the reach is a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). The super reach is a reach effect in which the fluctuation time after the reach is longer than the normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to SP3, the program is executed evolving through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-run.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric-chu opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 in the main control main process (described later) according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state). Table to be referenced. In FIG. 12A, when in the “non-time saving state”, the open pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be “open pattern 11”, and when in the “time reduction state”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 12”. It has been shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, the opening time being 2.0 seconds per time, and the interval (opening interval) being 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, up to 10), even if the opening time remains.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the main control main process (described later), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 30 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referred to to determine the 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is “opening pattern 21”. , And when the special figure stop symbol data is “14H”, “15H”, and “22H”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop symbol data is “13H”, the open pattern is opened. It is shown that the pattern is determined to be “open pattern 23”. FIG. 13B shows the contents of the open pattern 21, the open pattern 22, and the open pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th R and the opening time is 29.5 seconds, and once at the 14th and 16th R, The second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) for one opening number and the opening time of 29.5 seconds at the 1st to 13th Rths, and once at the 14th and 16th Rths, the opening number is set to one opening time. The second big winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 second, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) once at the 15th round and the opening time is 0.1 second at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 is opened (long open) for one opening number and the opening time of 29.5 seconds at the 1st to 13th and 15th Rths, and once at the 14th round, the opening number is set to one opening time. The second big winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 second, and the second winning opening 35 is opened (long opening) once at 16R and the opening time is 29.5 seconds at 16R. . However, the opening of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is performed when a predetermined number of game balls are won (specified winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains. Will be closed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member release pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). Table to be referenced. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the open pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “open pattern 31”, and the special figure stop symbol is used. When the data is “13H”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 32”, and when the special figure stop symbol data is “14H”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 33” and the special figure stop symbol data is determined. It is shown that when “15H” or “22H”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 34”. FIG. 14B shows the contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth R, when the first winning prize port 30 has a first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 for 0.1 second is short-opened. At the 10th and 12th R, when the first prize hole 30 has the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened for an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is opened. Long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 for a maximum of 31.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 32, at the second, fourth, sixth, and twelfth Rs, when the first winning prize port 30 has a first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened for an opening time of 0.1 second. At the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first winning prize port 30 has a first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened for an opening time of 0.1 second, and when there is a second prize, the opening time is open. Long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 for a maximum of 31.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th R, when the first winning prize port 30 receives the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 for an opening time of 0.1 second is short-opened to win the second prize. Then, the V opening / closing member 71 is long opened for an opening time of 31.5 seconds at the maximum. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first winning prize port 30 has a first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for 0.1 second with a short opening time. In the opening pattern 34, at the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds, when the first winning prize port 30 has the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened for an opening time of 0.1 second. .

4. Description of Jackpots and the like In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losing" as a result of a jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "losing", "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When the big hit is won, the big win prize mouth (the first big win prize mouth 30 and the second big win prize mouth 35) is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (the type of the big hit) stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is completed. I have. Each round game is started by the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and is ended by the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the special winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

  There are several types of jackpots. The jackpot types are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of the big hits are roughly classified into two types, a “scheduled V passing big hit” and a “scheduled non-V passing big hit”. The “scheduled V passage jackpot” activates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (scheduled V passing opening pattern) in which a game ball can pass to the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot. Here, the jackpot whose special figure stop symbol data is 11H to 14H and 21H corresponds to “scheduled V passage jackpot”. The combination of the opening patterns of the opening and closing members 32 and 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 are (open pattern 21: open pattern 31) and (open pattern 22: open pattern 33). ) Or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V region 39 during the big hit game. The “V non-passing scheduled jackpot” is an opening pattern (a scheduled V non-passing opening pattern) in which a game ball cannot pass to the V region 39 during the jackpot game (V non-passing scheduled open pattern). It is a jackpot to activate. Here, the big hits of the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the “V non-passing scheduled big hit”. When the combination of the opening patterns of the opening / closing members 32 and 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 22: open pattern 34), the V region is set during the big hit game. It is impossible to pass the game ball to 39. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 serves as both the V-passing scheduled opening pattern and the V-non-scheduled opening pattern.

  The “scheduled V-passing jackpot” includes “scheduled 16RV passing jackpot”, “16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot”, and “16R (substantially 15R) V-passed scheduled jackpot”. The “16RV passing planned jackpot” has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second special winning opening 35 for up to 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), so that the V opening / closing member 71 can easily pass to the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30.

  The “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” has a total round number of 16R, but a substantial total round number of 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for only 0.1 second per 1R. Even at 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in the “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot”, the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and a round in which a prize ball cannot be expected is formed. In other words, “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” is a substantial 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), so that the V opening / closing member 71 can easily pass to the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30.

  “16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot” has a total round number of 16R, but a substantial total round number of 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in the “16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot”, 14R is a round in which the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short and a prize ball cannot be expected. In other words, “16R (substantially 15R) V passage planned jackpot” is a substantial 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), so that the V opening / closing member 71 can easily pass to the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30.

  The “scheduled V non-passing jackpot” is the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-scheduled jackpot” of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for only 0.1 second per 1R. Even at 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and a round in which a prize ball cannot be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” is a substantial 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R, and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34). It is almost impossible for game balls to pass.

  As is clear from the above description, the “16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled non-passing jackpot” and the “16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot” include the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 ( The opening patterns of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) are the same (open pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (open pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). That is, in the case of “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot”, it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes the low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot” allows the game ball to easily pass to the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30 and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time-saving state (high-precision high base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” and “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the game state after the large hit is low. It is difficult to determine whether to enter the time saving state (low-accuracy high-base state) or the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high-base state). That is, the game state after the “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” is such that when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30, the high accuracy time reduction state (high accuracy high base state) ), The fact that the probability is high is a latent state (a latent probability change state).

  As shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for the planned V passing jackpot and 60/128 for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for the planned V passing jackpot, and 45/128 (approx. 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, a jackpot in which a game ball is won in the second starting port 21 is performed rather than a jackpot in which the gaming ball is won in the first starting port 20 (lottery of the first special symbol). The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of gaming state A gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute “probability variation control” and “variation time reduction control” for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol indicator 42, respectively. It is. Here, a state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs probability variation control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a “high probability state”, and a state in which the probability variation control is not performed is simply referred to as a “normal probability state ( Non-high-probability state, low-probability state). The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state, as probability variation control of a special symbol. A high probability state is realized by performing the jackpot determination. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher jackpot probability than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 performs the probability variation control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 uses the special symbol display as compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a big hit symbol increases.

  Further, a state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 to reduce the fluctuation time is referred to as a “time reduction state”, and a state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply referred to as a “non-time reduction state”. That. In the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time reduction state. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined such that the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is selected more in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. The used variation pattern is determined. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the fluctuation time reduction control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is more variable than when the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. A short fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation is increased, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reservation) at the starting port is likely to occur. Thereby, it is possible to aim for a jackpot under a smooth progress of the game. Note that the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time reduction control for the special symbol on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the normal symbol in the time reduction state, and does not execute the control in the non-time reduction state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the normal symbol hit determination table T3 () in which the number of normal symbol random numbers (hit random values) determined to be a hit is greater in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state as probability variation control of the normal symbol. Using FIG. 8 (C), a hit determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, the hit probability is higher in the time reduction state than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control on the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 uses the ordinary symbol display 42 as compared with the case where the probability variation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol will be a hit symbol increases. In the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the symbol is usually shorter than in the non-time reduction state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time reduction state, but is 1 second in the time reduction state (FIG. 8D). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time reduction state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time reduction state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22, As compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball wins the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of award balls to the number of launch balls, increases. Therefore, a state in which these controls are being executed is called a “high base state”, and a state in which these controls are not being executed is called a “low base state”. In the high base state, a big hit can be aimed at without greatly reducing the number of game balls on hand. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning in the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above-described controls. That is, the probability variation control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the variation time reduction control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22 Executing one or more controls only needs to make the electric tube 22 easier to open than when the control is not being executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state.

  In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the planned V passing jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the passage to the V region 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate high base state” or a “highly accurate time reduction state”. The high-accuracy-high-base state ends when a predetermined number of times (here, 160 times) of variable display of a special symbol is executed or a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. Further, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (there is almost no case). State, that is, a state with a low probability), a time saving state, and a high base state. This game state is particularly referred to as a “low-probability high-base state” and a “low-probability time-saving state”. The low-probability high base state ends when a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) of variable display of a special symbol is executed, or a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-saving time state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a “low-probability low-base state”. The low-probability low-base state may be referred to as a “normal gaming state” or a “low-probability non-reduction state (also simply referred to as a non-reduction state)”. Further, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed is referred to as “special game state (big hit game state)”. Further, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a “specific game state”.

  In the high base state such as the high certainty base state or the low certainty base state, it is possible to advance the game advantageously by making the game ball enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by right-handing. The electric support control makes it easier for the electric chew 22 to be opened than in the low base state, and makes it easier to win the second starting opening 21 than to win the first starting opening 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed right through the gate 28, which is a trigger of the normal symbol lottery, so that the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of start winnings (winning at the starting opening) than when the player hits left. Note that the gaming machine 1 performs a right-handed game even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can be advantageously advanced by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by left-handing. Since the power support control is not executed, the power chute 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to win the first opening 20 than to win the second opening 21. It is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, a left hit is performed so that the first starting port 20 receives a game ball. As a result, a larger number of start winnings can be obtained than when the player hits right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the hit / fail determination means (FIG. 23) and the hit / fail preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing a main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs an initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initialization is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

  After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs a normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (step S003). In the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the various random number counter values (the jackpot random number value, the jackpot type random number value, the reach random number value, the variation pattern random number value) shown in FIG. , An ordinary symbol random number value) by one and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. In addition, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While the interruption is permitted, the execution of the main timer interruption process (step S005) is enabled. The main-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 msec). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, at intervals of 4 msec). Then, from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the next start of the main-side timer interrupt processing, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. This random number updating process is the same as the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update process of the various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during the other period (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process). And both.

  After the random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the types of winning ports to the main RAM 84. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, a normal winning opening sensor 29a (FIG. 3).

  After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V region sensor detection process (step S106), a holding ball. The number processing (step S107) is sequentially executed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the processing of the number of retained balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an output process (step S108). In the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in the above-described processing to the sub-control board 90. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described below, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold display 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting port sensor detection processing (FIG. 16: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally reserved symbols is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol holding balls is the number of ordinary symbol holdings, and more specifically, is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of ordinary symbol holdings. If the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls is equal to or less than "3" (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls (step S203), and then an ordinary symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label -TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number value in the first to the first symbols in the ordinary figure holding storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. The fourth storage area is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol reserved balls.

  In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If a game ball has not been won in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball has won (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reserved balls is the number of second special figure reserved, and more specifically, is a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of second special figure reserved. If the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “4” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the special figure 2 reserved ball count is equal to or less than “3” (step S206: NO), after adding “1” to the special figure 2 reserved ball count (step S207), a special figure 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S207). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: label-TRND-AS value), the value of the reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label -TRND-RC) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label -TRND-T1). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number value group in a buffer (prior determination buffer) different from the second special figure holding storage area 85b for a special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. It is memorized (held). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

  In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has been won at the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), the present process is terminated. When a game ball has won the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S210). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 reserved balls is the number of first special figure reservations, and more specifically, is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of first special figure reservations. If the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is “4” (step S211: YES), this processing is ended. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is equal to or less than "3" (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), and then a special figure 1 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S212). S213). Here, similarly to the above-described special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (prior determination buffer) different from the first special figure holding storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. Is memorized (held). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination processing (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 preliminary judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), the present process is terminated. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the advance determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by a special figure 2 related random number obtaining process (FIG. 17: step S208). I do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a preliminary determination as to whether or not a big hit has occurred using the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the big hit random value. Here, since the game is in the high probability state (the probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. It is determined in advance whether or not it is a jackpot. In other words, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “649”, it is determined in advance as “big hit”, and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance as “losing”. In the present embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later. However, in another embodiment, the preliminary determination is different from the jackpot determination table T1. The preliminary determination may be performed by using the jackpot determination table.

  If the result of the jackpot pre-judgment is “losing” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-judgment is “big hit” (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type pre-judgment (step S305). In the jackpot type preliminary determination, first, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the random number value of the jackpot type is any of “0” to “127”, it is determined in advance as “16RV passage scheduled jackpot”. In the present embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later. The preliminary determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

  In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a fluctuation pattern advance determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly obtains a fluctuation pattern random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the advance judgment buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208). And, obtain a reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state is set (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), A fluctuation pattern is specified from a reach presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from the reach random number value and the fluctuation pattern random number value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may be different depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, based on the jackpot pre-judgment result and the reach pre-judgment pre-judgment result, the losing with reach is pre-judged, and when the variation pattern random number value is “60”, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the number of reserved balls to “1-2”. ”, The selected variation pattern“ P64 ”and the selected variation pattern“ P68 ”when the number of reserved balls is“ 3 to 4 ”are selected. In the present embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later. However, as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 is used. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for preliminary determination different from that described above.

  In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result, a jackpot type pre-judgment result in the case of a hit, and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this processing.

[Special figure 1 preliminary judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing, when the probable change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the advance determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot determination in advance with reference to the normal probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S401). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number obtaining process (FIG. 17: step S213). I do. Next, in this case, since the normal probability state (the probability change flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 determines the normal probability state table (the big hit determination value is “0” to “164”) in the big hit determination table T1. )) To determine in advance whether it is a jackpot. In other words, when the jackpot random number value is from “0” to “164”, it is determined in advance as “big hit”, and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance as “losing”. Note that the jackpot determination may use a jackpot determination table different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not operating (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the symbol is usually fluctuating (step S502). If the ordinary symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is “0” (step S503: YES), the present process is terminated. If the number of retained balls is one or more (step S503: NO), the number of normally retained symbols is decremented by one (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is “0”, the number of retained balls of the ordinary symbol once becomes “1” in step S203 of the start-up sensor detection processing (FIG. 17). , And the reservation is exhausted in the present step S504, and the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol immediately becomes "0". This is the same for the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start-up opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols temporarily becomes “1”, and thereafter, in steps S1404 and S1404 in a special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted, and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes “0”. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). More specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines a normal symbol random number value (as a determination value) stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first general-purpose drawing storage area) of the general-purpose drawing storage area 86. Per random number). Then, it is determined whether or not it is a hit using the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state) and the normal symbol hit determination table T3. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random number value is “0” to “2”, it is determined to be “hit”, and when the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is determined to be “losing”. (See FIG. 8C).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines a game state (whether or not it is a time-saving state), and uses the result of the game state determination and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to change the ordinary symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8D). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern to start the variation display of the ordinary symbol (step S507).

  In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol change time has elapsed and the game has ended. The variation time of the ordinary symbol is the variation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuating time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuating display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is "losing", (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the hit determination is "hit" (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines a game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew open pattern determination table T7 to determine an open pattern of the electric chew 22. Select Here, “open pattern 11” is selected in the non-time saving state, and “open pattern 12” is selected in the time saving state. After the selection of the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the operation of the electric tuner in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends the processing.

  In the above-mentioned step S501, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the winning number of the electric chew 22 has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, six) or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is to be closed. Either of the things that have come is fulfilled. The operation time of the electric chew 22 is an operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and executes this processing. Finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status", Called "2", "3", "4". When the “special operation status” is “1” (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a jackpot determination, a variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, a change stop command is output after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an output of an opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), a special electric accessory process is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is “0” (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting port 21 is stored. If there is no storage, the process moves to step S1407. When the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the change pattern selection processing, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b to the side where the storage location is read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If there is, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above-mentioned steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which the reservations are retained. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. The image is shifted to the reserved digestion image display area side and displayed as the reserved digestion image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are respectively located on the left side. Shift one (FIG. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 change start process (step S1406). In the special figure 2 change start process, the change start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the change display of the second special symbol is started, and the change time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined in accordance with the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection processing is set in the fluctuation time timer. Also, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “2”. Note that the change start command (special figure 2 change start command) set in the special figure 2 change start processing includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the big hit determination processing (step S1402) and the change pattern selection processing (step S1402). Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on the fluctuation time) is included.

  In step S1401, if the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “0” (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 1 reserved ball count is “0” (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number group acquired due to the winning at the first starting port 20 is stored. If there is no storage, the process moves to step S1413. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is “1” or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection processing, the special figure 1 reserved ball count is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side where they are read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special drawing reservation is digested in the order in which the reservations are retained. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It is shifted to the reserved digestion image display area side and displayed as the reserved digestion image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are respectively located on the right side. Shift one (FIG. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 change start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 change start process, a change start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the change display of the first special symbol is started, and a change time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined in accordance with the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection processing is set in the fluctuation time timer. Also, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “2” (step S1406). The change start command (special figure 1 change start command) set in the special figure 1 change start processing includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the big hit determination processing (step S1408) and the change pattern selection processing (step S1408). Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information on the fluctuation time) is included.

  When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “0” in step S1407 (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may make the determination based on, for example, ON / OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this processing ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer standby standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the special symbol change display based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is “0”. In other words, the second special figure reservation is consumed prior to the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation has a larger profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation (V passing planned big hit). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the big hit determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the big hit determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, the process flow is described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probable change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probable change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), a jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the big random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure holding first storage area) of the second special figure holding storage area 85b is read. In the special jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure holding first storage area) of the first special figure holding storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game is a big hit using the big hit determination table T1 to be referred to and the big random number value. Here, since the state is in the high-probability state (the probability change flag is ON), it is determined whether or not a big hit is determined based on the table for the high-probability state (big hit determination values “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. judge.

  If the probability change flag is OFF in step S1501 (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination with reference to the normal probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (FIG. 8). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, in this case, since the normal probability state is set (the probability change flag is OFF), the large jackpot determination table T1 is used to determine whether or not the large jackpot is determined based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”). Determine whether or not.

  When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag (step S1506) and determines the big hit type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the big hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the random number value of the jackpot type stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After the determination of the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination is “losing” in step S1503 or step S1505, the special figure stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). Then, the present process ends.

[Variation pattern selection processing]
FIGS. 24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection processing, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). The determination as to whether or not the employee is in the time reduction state is made based on whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If it is not the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1602). If the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the big hit flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit is the special map 2 (step S1603). If the big hit is the special map 2 (step S1603: YES), the process is skipped to step S1605 because the big hit type is always the planned V passing big hit. When the big hit is the special map 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit type is the planned V passing big hit (step S1604). This is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

  When the jackpot type is the planned V-passing jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes the fluctuation with reference to the non-time-saving state V-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a variation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection processing of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first storage area) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection processing of Toku-zu, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first toku-zu reservation of first Toku-zu) is stored in the first toku-zu pending storage area 85a. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number. Here, as the table for the non-time-saving state V passing scheduled jackpot, a portion corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot in the non-time saving state fluctuation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. To "P3", and the variation pattern in FIG. 2 is "P21" to "P23" (address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of “P1” to “P3” is selected as a variation pattern in Toku-zu, and any one of “P21” to “P23” in Toku-zu 2 is selected.

  When the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, a variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as the table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, a portion (“P4” to “P6”) corresponding to the V non-scheduling planned jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. Part) is referred to. One of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

  If the big hit flag is OFF in step S1602 (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach established random value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first storage area) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection processing of Toku-zu, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first toku-zu figure holding) of the first toku-zu reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is "0" to "13"). Determine the presence or absence.

  If the reach random number is a reach-achieved random number (step S1607: YES), that is, if there is a reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach loss table (step S1608). Here, as the table for the loss with the non-time saving state reach, the portion corresponding to the loss with the reach in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time reduction state shown in FIG. The part “P14”, and in FIG. 2, the variation patterns “P24” to “P31” are referred to. In Toku-zu 1, any one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current Toku-zu 1 retention ball count (1 to 4). In Toku-zu 2, any one of "P24" to "P31" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of balls in Toku-zu 2 (1 to 4). Since the variation pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls changes, a function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both of the special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short variation patterns are more often selected. Thus, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

  When the reach random number is not a reach random number (step S1607: NO), that is, when there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for losing without reach (step S1609). Here, as the table for the non-time saving state without loss, the portion corresponding to the no-reach loss in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (in FIG. The part “P16”, and in FIG. 2, the variation patterns “P32” to “P33” are referred to. In Tokuzu 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of balls in special figure 1 (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, either “P32” or “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read random number value of the fluctuation pattern and the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (1 to 4). Also in this case, since the variation pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls changes, a function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works.

  If it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the big hit flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and a description thereof will not be repeated. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in step S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. And different. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the non-time-saving state variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time reduction state determination table T6 is used. Of the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11). For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the planned V-passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the scheduled V-passing jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. Are referred to as "P41" to "P43", and in FIG. 2, the variation patterns are referred to as "P61" to "P63". From the read variation pattern random numbers, one of “P41” to “P43” is selected as the variation pattern in Toku-zu, and one of “P61” to “P63” in Toku-zu 2 is selected. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the planned non-passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the scheduled non-passing V jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. To P46). One of “P44” to “P46” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

  After the selection of the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends the processing. The information of the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). Thereby, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Special symbol change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game has ended after the special symbol change time has elapsed (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-described fluctuation pattern selection processing (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to “3” (step S1703). Also, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 ends the process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). First, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time savings, and will be described later in detail. After the gaming state management processing, it is determined whether the big hit flag is ON (step S1802). If the big hit flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “1” (step S1808), and ends this processing. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again to execute the jackpot determination for the next hold.

  When the big hit flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a big winning opening and an opening pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of the hit big hit (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “open pattern 21” is set as the open pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “open pattern 31” is set as the open pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the winning pattern and the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “16” is set in the round counter (FIG. 13B).

  After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset processing is processing for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the gaming state reset processing, a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Gaming state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). If the probable change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability change counter is decremented by one (step S2002). The probability change counter counts the number of times the special symbol changes during the high probability state. Here, “160” is set in the probability change counter when shifting to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the counter value has become “0” as a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not “0” (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability change counter is “0” (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is turned off (step S2004).

  In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time reduction flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of times the special symbol has been changed during the time reduction state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set to the time saving counter in the low-accuracy high base state, and "160" is set to the time saving counter in the high-accuracy high base state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the counter value has become “0” as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (step S2007: YES), the time reduction flag is turned off (step S2008).

  In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information on the current game state that has just been set (whether the state is the probable change state, the value of the probable change counter, whether the state is the time reduction state, the value of the time reduction counter, etc.).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). If the probable change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the certainty change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the certainty change flag is turned off (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this processing ends. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the game is in the non-high probability state and the non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in the low base state in the non-time saving state, the gaming machine 1 is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern has been completed in the running big hit game. If the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), a V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V-opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls have won the first big winning opening 30. Then, when the predetermined game ball is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) is being opened (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

  If the special winning opening is not being opened (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the special winning opening (step S2203). The opening time of the special winning opening is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has elapsed and the opening start time in the first round game has been reached, or the special winning opening temporarily closed after the opening has been opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) elapses and the timing of the opening start again is reached. If it is not time to open the special winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

  If it is the time (timing) for opening the special winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of the jackpot. After the winning opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In the present embodiment, a large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when a large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during a single round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first release, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first release. After setting the round designation command, the process ends.

  In the above-mentioned step S2202, when the special winning opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings to the special winning opening in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, 9 pieces per round) or the time to close the special winning opening has been reached. One of the conditions (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening) has been satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the special winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the special winning opening (step S2211).

  If it is not the time (timing) for opening the special winning opening in the above-described step S2203, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a lapse of a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) from the closing of the special winning opening. As described above, this is because the closing time (interval time) of the special winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended based on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

  When the round game is over (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221) and determines whether the value of the round counter is “0”. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not been exhausted yet, the process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is “0”, a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when a game ball passes through the V region 39 at “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” is “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled”. The ending time when the game ball does not pass to the V region 39 in the "big hit" is the same as the ending time. Thereby, even if the game ball passes to the V region 39 in the “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” for the player, the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” ", It can be recognized that the game ball has not passed to the V region 39. Note that the ending time when the game ball does not pass to the V region 39 at “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing ends.

  In the above step S2200, when the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the last round is finished, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time of the big hit ending has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the big hit end flag (step S2231), turns off the big hit flag (step S2322), and sets the special operation status. Is set to “1” (step S2233). Thereby, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the current round game (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the value of the round counter is “15”, “13”, “11”, “9”, “7”, “5”, the game control microcomputer 81 can determine that the round is an open round. If the round is not the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), the present process is ended. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

  If it is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that a first ball has been won in the first winning port 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning opening 30 in this round, and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

  If the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2504). The short opening of the V-opening / closing member 71 is based on the opening pattern of the V-opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), regardless of whether the opening is “short opening” or “long opening”. This is for causing a short release (0.1 second in this case) to be executed. When the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is extremely short, so that the first game ball that has won the first big winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39 and is not It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V validity period setting process, the V validity period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid is set during the opening of the V open / close member 71 and several seconds after the V open / close member 71 is closed. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) in accordance with the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. One second after the closing is set as the V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the big hit game is not executed) to a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid" means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a (the V region sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, “determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is invalid” means that the V flag is not turned on even if the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is performed. It should be noted that the reason why the V effective period includes several seconds after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 (ball stroke period) is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V region sensor 39a. This takes into account the period until a game ball that has entered the V region 39 immediately before the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when V passing (the passing of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when V passing is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability change flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned ON based on the V passage caused by the wrongdoing, and the state is not set to the high probability state. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

  If the first winning flag is ON in step S2502, that is, if the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second winning flag is ON. Is performed (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that a second ball has been won in the first winning port 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is a long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long release (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short release, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is a long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball has not been detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

  When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 long and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2523). The long opening of the V-opening / closing member 71 is based on the opening pattern of the V-opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B). ). In this case, since one round game time is a maximum of 31.5 seconds (maximum winning opening maximum opening time 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), generally, the second ball is won. The time from time to the end of the round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so that the long opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V-opening / closing member 71 is relatively long, the opening time of the V-opening / closing member 71 is relatively long. It is configured to pass. In the V-valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V-valid period while the V-opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V-invalid period together with the closing of the V-opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. When the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over based on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. Make a decision.

  If the round game is over (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), closes the V opening / closing member, and disables the V period. A setting process is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a lapse of several seconds (here, 1 second) after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71, during the V invalid period. Set and end this processing.

  If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 may be, for example, that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 if the opening is short. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and the process ends. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), this processing ends with the V opening / closing member 71 in the open state and the V validity period being continued.

  In step S2540, when determining that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this processing. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the present process is terminated.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time reduction flag is turned ON (step S2302), and “100” is set in the time reduction counter (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a “non-high probability state”, a “time saving state”, and a “high base state” (ie, a low-probability high base). The low-probability-high base state ends when one of the conditions of performing the variable display of the special symbol 100 times or winning the next big hit is satisfied.

On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), and sets “10000” in the probability change counter (step S2305). The V flag is turned off (step S2306). The game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time reduction flag (step S2307), and sets “160” in the time reduction counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game becomes the “high probability state”, the “time saving state”, and the “high base state” (that is, the high probability high base). This high-accuracy high base state ends when any of the conditions of variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times or the next big hit is won.
In the high-probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, the jackpot becomes almost before the jackpot lottery is performed 10,000 times in the high-probability base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot at the special symbol 2 (via the second starting port) in the time reduction state and the jackpot scheduled to pass through V (the special symbol stop symbol data 21H) is generated during the jackpot game. If V passes, it is almost assured that the gaming state after the big hit will be in the high-precision and high-base state until the next big hit.

  In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information on the currently set game state.

[V region sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If there is no detection of a game ball by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V validity period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to a few seconds after the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round (ball brush period). Is done. If it is not during the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets a V passage command (step S2604), and ends the processing. .

[Reserved ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball count processing (FIG. 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the ordinary symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the pending ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number. . After setting the pending ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends the process.

7. Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like appearing in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. The effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, status, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interruption processing (step S4015) and performs the random number update processing (step S4020). In the random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds and updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B by one. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. In addition, two or more random numbers may be added in addition to one by one. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

  After the random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While the interruption is permitted, the sub-side timer interruption processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number updating process is repeatedly executed after the sub timer interrupt process is completed and before the next sub timer interrupt process is started.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: Step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305). The processing during the fluctuation effect is a process for setting a command before the end of the fluctuation at a specific timing during the fluctuation effect and causing the display screen 7a to execute a specific display effect. The details will be described later. After the processing during the variable effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs setting of display contents of the display screen 7a based on switch data (edge data and level data) output based on a detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like on the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107. , To the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received the various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received the various commands executes a voice effect of outputting voice from the speaker 67 according to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 receiving the various commands executes a lamp effect for controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission processing, effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4320), and ends this processing. In other processes, for example, a random number update process or the like is performed.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), a prefetch effect determination process is performed (step S4420). "Pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect, and determining a pre-reading effect pattern to be executed. The details of the prefetching effect determination processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described prefetch effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect indicating that it is highly likely that the jackpot is included in the suspension information newly stored in the special figure suspension storage area 85, and is executed during the fluctuation effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the number is set in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 on the basis of information on the special figure 1 number of reserved balls, the special figure 2 number of reserved balls, and the normal symbol number of reserved balls included in the reserved number of balls command. The updated values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the general figure reservation effect counter are updated. Thus, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the general figure reservation effect counter, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, 9B is updated. On the other hand, if the pending ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process is performed (step S4460). The “variable effect start process” is a process of selecting a variable effect pattern (contents) to be executed during a special symbol change. Details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variable effect ending process is performed (step S4470). The “variable effect end process” is a process for stopping the variable effect executed during the special symbol change. In the variable effect ending process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the variable stop command, and sets a variable effect end command for ending the variable effect. Thereby, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-described fluctuation effect ending process is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The “opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of the jackpot winning determination in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of an opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is stored in the effect command set area of the sub-RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. And displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-described opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during opening of a special winning opening or during an interval between opening in a special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data and information on the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. I do. Then, an effect pattern of a round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is directed to the effect of the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-described round effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), an ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The “ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives information on the game state included in the game state designation command (whether the state is the high probability state, the time reduction state, Counter, time-saving counter value, etc.) in the sub-RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-pass command, the effect-control microcomputer 91 causes the sub-RAM 94 to store the information on the V-pass. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process based on a command other than the above (a customer waiting standby command, a RAM clear notification command, and the like), and ends the process.

[Prefetching effect decision processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the prefetching effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a prior determination information rewriting process (step S4601). To be more specific, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the jackpot pre-judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type pre-judgment result (jackpot type information), and the fluctuation included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores the pre-reading effect pattern information in addition to the above-described large hit determination information, large hit type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect performed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39 (A) shows the jackpot determination information “losing” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” as the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figure 2 reservations, respectively. A state is shown in which the result is stored in the storage area, and the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the change is stored in the area. FIG. 39 (B) shows that a special figure 2 has been won from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80 is changed to the fourth special figure 2 suspension. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information “big jackpot”, the jackpot type information “21H”, and the variation pattern information “P61” are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, in each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the special figure 2 and the area corresponding to the change, “pattern A Is set. FIG. 39 (C) shows a state in which the change has been completed from the state of FIG. 39 (B) and the pre-determination information shift processing has been executed. Specifically, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the area, the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, The pre-determination information of the four storage areas is cleared. The advance determination information shift processing is executed in the fluctuation effect ending processing (FIG. 37: step S4470).

  Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the area and the first to fourth storage areas of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c. If the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), the process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not “reach has been lost” (step S4603). Whether it is "big hit" or "losing with reach" can be determined by, for example, a fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). If the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is “losing without reach” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is “big hit” or “losing with reach” (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination to determine whether to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, a prefetch effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the prefetch effect random number counter, and refers to the acquired random number value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether or not to perform, and a look-ahead effect pattern for performing a look-ahead effect are determined.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-determination result is “big hit” and the look-ahead effect random number is “0 to 55”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random number is “56 to 67”, the look-ahead effect is When “pattern A” is selected and the prefetch effect random number is “68 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as the prefetch effect. Also, if the pre-determination result is “losing with reach” and the look-ahead effect random number is “0 to 107”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and if the look-ahead effect random number is “108 to 114”, the look-ahead effect is When “pattern A” is selected and the prefetch effect random number is “115 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as the prefetch effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be set arbitrarily.

  Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that a prefetch effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected prefetch effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area is stored. The pre-reading effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only is "pattern A" set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command, but also the first to third storage areas, "Pattern A" is also set. Thus, the prefetching effect pattern A is also executed in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (the variable effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing of executing the pre-reading effect has already passed, the pre-reading effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing of executing the pre-reading effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the prefetch effect is not performed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation effect start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable effect start processing (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information on the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process for the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a main effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The key effect pattern determination processing includes a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image on the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable production is completed by superimposing an additional production such as a chance-up production or a look-ahead production on the basic production. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the key effect pattern with reference to the key effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for describing the key effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing an SP1 effect, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing an SP2 effect, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing an SP3 effect, A plurality of key effect patterns for performing a no-reach loss effect are set. The type of the key effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1”, the key effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. When the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P72”, the key effect pattern for performing the lossless loss effect is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the core effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern with reference to the obtained random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for describing the chance up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 illustrates a chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is “P1” to “P16”. Note that the chance up effect pattern determination table T53 includes a portion for determining a chance up effect pattern to be executed when the variation pattern is “P21” to “P33” “P41” to “P56” “61” to “73”. It may or may not be provided.

  In FIG. 43, “2-NO”, “2-SP1”, “2-SP2”, “2-SP3”, “3-NO”, “3-SP1”, “3-SP2”, “3-SP3” “ “4-NO”, “4-SP1”, “4-SP2”, “4-SP3”, and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combines the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. May be determined. From these, what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect is determined.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( Step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 converts the variable effect image It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect timer (step S5030), and ends the process. The fluctuation time (FIG. 42) according to the fluctuation pattern fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is set in the fluctuation effect timer. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is “P1”, “40 seconds” is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable effect processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable effect is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the fluctuation effect is being performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not the fluctuation effect timer is zero. When it is not during the fluctuation effect (step SS4701: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-fluctuation end command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 or the like that it is a specific timing during the fluctuation effect. The image control board 100 receives the pre-fluctuation end command. In accordance with the information included in the command before the end of the change, the effect contents are switched, a specific image is displayed, and the like.

  If it is not time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the timing to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetching effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a command before the end of the change including the prefetching effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). Thus, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the changing effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect in which a prefetch effect image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. Buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization processing, the display control processing is repeatedly executed. In the display control processing, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a fluctuation effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If the information has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received fluctuation effect start command, reads out the predetermined fluctuation effect image specified in the fluctuation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the predetermined fluctuation effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-described processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a command before the change end has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the pre-reading effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-change end command, and when the pre-change end pattern includes prefetch effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined prefetch effect image from the ROM 103, and reads the image. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Even when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not included in the pre-change end command, if a preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an advance fade effect for fading the advance image is performed. Do it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a fluctuation effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If the image has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image in which the variable effect has been stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display for displaying the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a predetermined opening effect image specified by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image designated by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. When the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image specified by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and the process ends.

9. Operation of Board Movable Body (First Movable Role 14 and Second Movable Role 15) With reference to FIGS. 46 to 47, operation of board movable body (first movable role 14 and second movable role 15) explain. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the first movable role object 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the second movable role object 15. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control for operating the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 during a game effect (display effect), during an initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like.

  The first movable role object 14 is configured such that a plate-shaped member can move up and down, and can be stopped at a retracted position (home position) illustrated in FIG. 1 (first mode). At this time, the first movable role object 14 is visible from the player. By moving (advancing) upward from the state of FIG. 1, the first movable auditorium 14 can move to the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 46, and can stop there (No. 2 aspects). In the second mode, a part of the image display device 7 is covered. In addition, the first movable role 14 can move to the retreat position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retreating) downward from the state of FIG. 46, and can stop there. The first movable role object 14 is configured such that an area covering the display screen 7a increases when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode.

  The second movable role 15 includes a rotating body on which a face is drawn. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable role object 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) where the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10 (first mode). At this time, a part of the lower side of the rotator becomes visible. In the second movable role object 15, the rotating body advances downward from the state of FIG. 1, and can perform a rotation effect as shown in FIG. 47 in front of the display screen 7a (second mode).

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Hereinafter, each effect example (display effect example, movable object effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effects to be described below are based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, and the like) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, in the display effect example, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted, but is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

  The decorative pattern fluctuation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative design change effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative design. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the decorative symbol variable effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative design fluctuation effect A]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol fluctuation effect A. In the decorative design variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 48A, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the positions of these display screens 7a in the vertical direction may be the same or different. In the stop display of FIG. 48A, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C have the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R has the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. Is also located above. Note that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be stopped and displayed in the same vertical position. The hold icons 9A are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

  At the start of the decorative symbol change effect (variable display), first, as shown in FIG. 48B, the left decorative symbol 8L moves upward. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), the middle decorative pattern 8C moves upward. The left decorative symbol 8L, which has been moving upward, has a downward moving speed as if gravity is acting downward, and turns back above the display screen 7a to start moving downward. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the right decorative symbol 8R moves upward. The upward movement speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C that has been moving upward decreases as if gravity is acting downward, and the medium decoration pattern 8C turns upward above the display screen 7a and starts moving downward. The moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L, which has moved downward, increases in the downward direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R, which has been moving upward, has a downward moving speed as if gravity is acting downward. Turn upward and start moving downward. The moving speed of the middle decorative symbol 8C which has been moving downward increases in the downward direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (F) and FIG. 48 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R sequentially increase in downward moving speed, and This is a mode in which numbers cannot be visually recognized. FIG. 48 (G) shows a mode in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed at high speed (constant speed). The moving direction when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuate is the same as the direction in which the hold icons 9A are arranged.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (H), the variably displayed left decorative symbol 8L disappears from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (I), the variably displayed middle decoration symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the right decoration symbol 8R is variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (J), the right decorative symbol 8R variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely invisible.

[Decorative design fluctuation effect B]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol fluctuation effect B. First, as shown in FIG. 49A, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. The mode in which the display is stopped and displayed is the same as that in FIG. Next, the decorative symbol variation effect of FIG. 49 (B) is executed. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as that of the decorative symbol variation effect A in FIG. That is, between the stop display in FIG. 49 (A) and the fluctuation display in FIG. 49 (B), the decorative symbol fluctuation effects A in FIG. 48 (A) to (G) may be executed. Next, the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 49 (C) is executed. The decorative design disappearance effect is the same as the decorative design change effect A in FIG. In other words, between the variation display in FIG. 49 (B) and the decorative symbol disappearance effect in FIG. 49 (C), the decorative symbol variation effects A in FIGS. 48 (G) to (J) may be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R that are variably displayed are displayed. The moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the downward direction decreases, and the numbers become gradually visible as shown in FIG. 49 (E). Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (F), a left and right symbol reverse direction movement effect is executed. Specifically, while the left decorative symbol 8L continues to move downward, the right decorative symbol 8R starts moving upward (reverse direction). Then, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 49 (G). At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may have different vertical positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (H), the middle decorative symbol 8C that is variably displayed is displayed between the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed. In the middle decoration pattern 8C, the moving speed in the downward direction decreases, and as shown in FIG. 49 (I), the numbers become gradually visible. Then, all symbols are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG.

[Decorative design fluctuation effect C]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol variation effect C. First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as that of the decorative symbol variation effect A in FIG. That is, before the variation display of FIG. 50 (A), the decoration symbol variation effects A of FIG. 48 (A) to (G) may be executed. Next, the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 50 (B) is executed. The decorative design disappearance effect is the same as the decorative design change effect A in FIG. That is, between the variation display of FIG. 50 (A) and the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 50 (B), the decorative symbol change effect A of FIGS. 48 (G) to (J) may be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), a left decorative symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L gradually becomes visually recognizable as moving from the upper side to the lower side on the curved trajectory bent leftward while the moving speed is reduced. More specifically, the left decorative design 8L appears from the upper left of the display screen 7a, moves toward the center while drawing an arc, and moves toward the lower left of the display screen 7a while drawing an arc. That is, the left decorative design 8L moves along a curved path so as to draw an arc. At this time, the image of the left decorative symbol 8L gradually increases with the movement.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), a right decorative symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R gradually becomes visually recognizable as moving from the upper side to the lower side on the curved trajectory curved rightward while the moving speed is reduced. More specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a, moves toward the center while drawing an arc, and moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while drawing an arc. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R moves along a path that is curved so as to draw an arc. At this time, the image of the right decorative design 8R gradually increases in size as it moves.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (E), a middle decoration symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the reach, the middle decorative symbol 8C moves from the upper side to the lower side on the straight track while the moving speed is reduced. Gradually become visible. At this time, the image of the middle decorative pattern 8C gradually increases with the movement. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is again difficult to visually recognize. Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have a display in which the three-dimensional figures are horizontally rotated. Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (H), a special reach effect is executed. As the contents of the special reach production, any production can be performed. Here, as an example, a battle effect in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight is performed. When defeated in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a state in which the three-dimensional figures are horizontally rotated, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is the left decorative symbol 8L. And the numbers different from the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed.

[Decoration design fluctuation effect D]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol fluctuation effect D. The decorative design variation effect D differs from the decorative design variation effect A of FIG. 48 in the direction in which the decorative symbols are arranged and the variation direction. In the decorative design variation effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 51A, the upper decorative design 8R, the middle decorative design 8C, and the lower decorative design 8L are stopped and displayed. When the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L are stopped and displayed, the positions of these display screens 7a in the left-right direction may be the same or different. In the stop display of FIG. 51A, the upper decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C have the same position in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a, and the lower decorative pattern 8L has the upper decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C. It is located on the left side. The upper decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the lower decorative pattern 8L may be stopped and displayed in the same horizontal position. The hold icon 9A is displayed below the display screen 7a side by side in the left-right direction.

  At the start of the decorative design variation effect (variable display), first, as shown in FIG. 51B, the upper decorative design 8R moves rightward. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), the middle decorative pattern 8C moves rightward. The moving speed of the upper decorative symbol 8R that has moved rightward decreases to the right as if it were drawn to the left, and the upper decorative symbol 8R turns around on the right side of the display screen 7a and starts moving leftward. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), the lower decorative symbol 8L moves rightward. The moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C that has moved rightward decreases to the right as if it is drawn to the left, and returns to the right side of the display screen 7a to start moving leftward. The moving speed of the upper decorative symbol 8R moving leftward increases in the leftward direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (E), the lower decorative pattern 8L, which has been moving rightward, has a moving speed in the rightward direction as if sucked to the leftward, and the lower decorative design 8L moves rightward on the display screen 7a. Turn around and start moving to the left. The moving speed of the middle decorative symbol 8C moving leftward increases in the leftward direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (F) and FIG. 51 (G), the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L sequentially increase in moving speed to the left, and in order. This is a mode in which numbers cannot be visually recognized. FIG. 51 (G) shows a mode in which the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L are variably displayed at high speed (constant speed). The moving direction when the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L fluctuate is the same as the direction in which the hold icons 9A are arranged.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51H, the variably displayed upper decorative symbol 8R disappears from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the lower decorative symbol 8L are variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (I), the variably displayed middle decoration symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the lower decoration symbol 8L is variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (J), the lower decorative symbol 8L that has been variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is all in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative design fluctuation effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the first effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a (FIG. 48). (A)), after the first effect, a second effect (FIG. 48 (G)) in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. After the effect of (3), the variably displayed left decorative symbol 8L disappears from the display screen 7a, and the third effect (FIG. 48 (H)) in which the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. After the third effect, the fourth effect (FIG. 48 (I)) in which the variably displayed middle decorative symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a and the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed. it can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (B) to (F), the variable display in the second effect is such that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are formed. At the start of the variable display, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R sequentially move upward, and then sequentially move downward. I do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48A, in the stop display in the first effect, one of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is provided. The position of the decorative symbol in the vertical direction is different from the positions of the other two decorative symbols. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect, a plurality of holding icons are arranged along the up-down direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (I) and (J), after the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the right-decorated decorative pattern 8R that has been variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a; As shown in FIGS. 49 (C) and (D), after the fifth effect, the sixth effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed again is shown in FIG. 49 (F). Thus, after the sixth effect, the seventh effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves upward while the left decorative symbol 8L moves downward can be executed. ing. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49 (H), after the seventh effect, the middle decorative symbol 8C is again displayed in a state where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Is fluctuated and the eighth effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (I), (J), and FIG. 50 (B), after the fourth effect, the right decorative pattern 8R which is displayed in a variable manner disappears from the display screen 7a. A fifth effect, and a sixth effect in which, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), after the fifth effect, a left decorative symbol 8L moving along an orbit curved to draw an arc is displayed. As shown in FIG. 50 (D), after the sixth effect, a seventh effect in which a right decorative symbol 8R moving along an orbit curved to draw an arc is displayed, and in FIG. 50 (E), As shown in the figure, after the seventh effect, an eighth effect in which the middle decorative symbol 8C moving in the up-down direction is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, in the sixth effect, the image of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes larger as the image moves, and in the seventh effect, the right decorative symbol 8R becomes larger as the image moves. As a result, in the seventh effect, the image of the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes larger with the movement. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the decorative symbol variation effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
48 (B) to 48 (D), the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start moving upward can be set arbitrarily. The interval at which each of them starts moving may be, for example, a one-second interval or a 0.01-second interval. The same applies to FIGS. 51B to 51D.

[Modification 2]
48 (H) to 48 (J), the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are variably displayed, disappear from the display screen 7a can be set arbitrarily. The interval at which each disappears may be, for example, one second or 0.01 second. The same applies to FIGS. 51 (H) to 51 (J).

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern,
A first effect in which the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are variably displayed,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the variably displayed first decorative symbol disappears from the display means, and the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are variably displayed,
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the variably displayed second decorative symbol disappears from the display means and the third decorative symbol is variably displayed can be executed. A gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
The variable display in the second effect is such that the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol move along a first direction, respectively. At the start of the variable display, after the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol sequentially move toward one side in the first direction, the first decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol move in order. A gaming machine characterized by moving toward the other side of the direction.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-2,
In the stop display in the first effect, one of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol is located at the position in the first direction. Characterized in that the position is different from the positions of the other two decorative patterns.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-2 or Aspect A1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
In the second effect, a plurality of the holding icons are arranged along the first direction.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-2 to A1-4,
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the variably displayed third decorative symbol disappears from the display means,
After the fifth effect, a sixth effect in which the first decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are variably displayed again,
After the sixth effect, in a state where the first decorative symbol is moving toward the other side in the first direction, the third decorative symbol is on the one side in the first direction. And a seventh effect of moving toward the game machine.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-5,
After the seventh effect, in a state where the first decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, an eighth effect in which the second decorative symbol is variably displayed can be executed again. A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-2 to A1-4,
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the variably displayed third decorative symbol disappears from the display means,
After the fifth effect, a sixth effect in which the first decorative symbol moving along an orbit curved to draw an arc is displayed,
After the sixth effect, a seventh effect in which the third decorative symbol moving along an orbit curved to draw an arc is displayed,
An eighth effect in which after the seventh effect, the eighth effect in which the second decorative symbol moving along the first direction is displayed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect A1-8]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-7,
In the sixth effect, the image of the first decorative pattern becomes larger with movement,
In the seventh effect, the image of the third decorative pattern becomes larger with movement,
In the seventh effect, the image of the second decorative symbol becomes larger with movement.

  The decorative pattern target effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative symbol target effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the decorative symbol target effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative design target effect A]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol target effect A.
In the decorative symbol target effect A, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 is set (displayed) in the area where the decorative symbol 8L has fluctuated. The target area A21 is associated with the decorative design 8L and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is broken, and serves as a target when stopping the decorative design as described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative pattern 8L is set on the reach line LAA. In addition, the decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed in the target area A21. Thereby, to the player, it appears that the decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the target area A21. Note that the other decorative symbols 8C and 8R are variably displayed in the same manner as in the fluctuation start effect. In the following, in the decorative symbol target effect A, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol on the reach line LAA, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “7” symbol on the reach line LAB. Since the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21, the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (D), a chance up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the ally character CRA and the chance-up image A22 including the character indicating “great Atsu” are displayed, and the ally character CRA shouts “great Atsu”. “Super hot” represented by the chance up image A22 indicates that the jackpot expectation degree is very high.
Note that another effect may be performed instead of the chance-up effect. For example, a timer display effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a look-ahead effect, a movable object effect, and the like may be performed. In addition, the pseudo continuous production is a production performed at the start of the fluctuation transition or during the reach production, and the like. For example, the production is repeated in which the decoration design is started to fluctuate and the temporary stop is performed. An effect that repeats an effect that temporarily stops at least a part, an effect that repeats an effect that temporarily stops a predetermined logo, or a display that reminds a pseudo series such as "x2", "x3", "pseudo", Includes an effect to execute a fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol. The same applies to the pseudo continuous production described below.

  In FIG. 52 (C), there is a case where the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L (for example, a case where the blank symbol is stopped and displayed). In this case, the target effect has failed, and the chance-up effect of FIG. 52 (D) is not performed.

[Decorative design target effect B]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect A.
In the decorative pattern target effect B, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53B, a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, a target area A21 is set (displayed) for each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8L has changed, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8C has changed, and the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8R has changed. Is set. The target area A21 is associated with each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is broken, and serves as a target when stopping the decorative symbol as described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target areas A21 corresponding to the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are set on the LBB. Further, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed in the corresponding target area A21. That is, the decorative design 8L is variably displayed within the target area A21, the decorative design 8C is variably displayed within the target area A21, and the decorative design 8R is variably displayed within the target area A21. Thereby, it appears to the player that each decorative symbol is variably displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the target area A21. In the following, in the decorative symbol target effect B, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the target region A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R is determined to be the decorative symbol 8R. Is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol on the reach line LAA, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol on the reach line LAB, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the reach line LAB. Is stopped and displayed with the symbol "7". In each of the target areas A21, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, so that the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (D), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the ally character CRA and the chance-up image A22 including the character indicating “great Atsu” are displayed, and the ally character CRA shouts “great Atsu”. “Super hot” represented by the chance up image A22 indicates that the jackpot expectation degree is very high.
Note that another effect may be performed instead of the chance-up effect. For example, a timer display effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a look-ahead effect, a movable object effect, and the like may be performed.

  In FIG. 53 (C), there may be a target area A21 in which a decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed in each of the target areas A21 (for example, a blank symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific target area A21). In this case, the target effect has failed, and the chance-up effect of FIG. 53 (D) is not performed.

[Decorative pattern target effect C]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect C.
In the decorative symbol target effect C, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54B, a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, a target area A21 is set (displayed) for each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8L has changed, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8C has changed, and the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8R has changed. Is set. The target area A21 is associated with each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is broken, and serves as a target when stopping the decorative symbol as described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target areas A21 corresponding to the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are set on the LBB. Further, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed in the corresponding target area A21. That is, the decorative design 8L is variably displayed within the target area A21, the decorative design 8C is variably displayed within the target area A21, and the decorative design 8R is variably displayed within the target area A21. Thereby, it appears to the player that each decorative symbol is variably displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the target area A21. In the following, in the decorative symbol target effect C, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the target region A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R is determined to be the decorative symbol 8R. Is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol on the reach line LAA, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol on the reach line LAB. In each target area A21, the same decorative symbol (here, the symbol "6") is stopped and displayed, so that the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the friend character CRA and the timer image A23 are displayed. The timer image A23 indicates a predetermined timer value, and indicates that when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 00:00), an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed.
Note that another effect may be performed instead of the timer display effect. For example, a chance-up display effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a look-ahead effect, a movable character effect, and the like may be performed.

  In FIG. 54 (C), there is a case where the same decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed in each target area A21 (for example, a case where a blank symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific target area A21). In this case, the target effect has failed, and the timer display effect of FIG. 54 (D) is not performed.

[Decorative design target effect D]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol target effect D.
In the decorative symbol target effect D, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 55 (A). In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55B, a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, a target area A21 is set (displayed) for each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8L has changed, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8C has changed, and the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8R has changed. Is set. The target area A21 is associated with each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is broken, and serves as a target when stopping the decorative symbol as described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target areas A21 corresponding to the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are set on the LBB. Further, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed in the corresponding target area A21. That is, the decorative design 8L is variably displayed within the target area A21, the decorative design 8C is variably displayed within the target area A21, and the decorative design 8R is variably displayed within the target area A21. Thereby, it appears to the player that each decorative symbol is variably displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the target area A21. In the following, in the decorative symbol target effect D, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

  In this target area display effect, a target symbol suggestion image A25 and a button image A24 are displayed. The button image A24 is an image for urging the player to press the effect button 63. The target symbol suggestion image A25 suggests a specific decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 in the target effect. Here, the target symbol suggestion image A25 indicates that the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 in the target effect is the symbol “6”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), a decorative symbol stop effect (button press effect) is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the target region A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R is determined to be the decorative symbol 8R. Is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol on the reach line LAA, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol on the reach line LAB. In each of the target areas A21, the decorative symbol (here, the symbol “6”) suggested by the target symbol suggestion image A25 is stopped and displayed, whereby the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the friend character CRA and the timer image A23 are displayed. The timer image A23 indicates a predetermined timer value, and indicates that when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 00:00), an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed.
Note that another effect may be performed instead of the timer display effect. For example, a chance-up display effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a look-ahead effect, a movable character effect, and the like may be performed.

  In FIG. 55 (C), in each target area A21, when the decorative symbol suggested by the target symbol suggestion image A25 is not stopped and displayed (for example, when a blank symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific target area A21, the specific symbol is not displayed). (A case where a decorative symbol other than the decorative symbol suggested in the target symbol suggestion image A25 is stopped and displayed). In this case, the target effect has failed, and the timer display effect of FIG. 55 (D) is not performed.

  The decorative symbol target effects A to D are executed before the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols and the reach effect is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern target effects A to D may be performed during the reach effect.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative design target effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the target area A21 is displayed when the decorative symbol is fluctuated in the decorative symbol target effect, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. , A chance-up effect and a timer display effect are performed. According to this configuration, at the time of the stop display of the decorative symbol, it is determined whether the chance up effect or the timer display effect is performed based on whether the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. The player can pay attention to the stop display of the decorative symbol, and the interest in the stop display of the decorative symbol can be improved. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative design target effect, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the target area A21 is set corresponding to each of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, the player can pay attention to the stop display of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the interest in the stop display of the decorative symbols can be further improved. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the decorative symbol target effect, as shown in FIGS. An up effect and a timer display effect are being performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop display of each decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and to further improve the interest in the stop display of the decorative symbols. it can. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbol target effect is performed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the start of the reach effect. According to this configuration, even before the reach effect, the player can pay attention to the stop display of the decorative symbol, and the interest in the stop display of the decorative symbol can be further improved. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the decorative symbol target effect, as shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect (timer display effect) is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop display of the specific decorative symbol, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the stop display of the decorative symbol. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the decorative design target effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 instead of one decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the target area A21.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative design target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, another object, for example, a character or a character, may be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 instead of the decorative design.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol target effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the target area A21 may be set to the same reach line, or may be set to different reach lines. For example, the target area A21 may be set to the reach line LAA, the reach line LAB, and the reach line LAC, respectively.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative design target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when setting the target area A21, not one target area A21 but a plurality of target areas A21 for each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R. You may make it.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, another display device (also referred to as another display device) may be provided in front of the display device 7. Then, in the decorative symbol target effect, the target device A21 may be set on another display device, and the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be changed and stopped. In addition, the target area A21 may be set on the display device 7 so that the variation and stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be performed on another display device.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative design target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after setting the target area A21 and stopping and displaying the decorative pattern, the target area A21 is moved so that the specific decorative pattern is included in the target area A21. You may.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
The first display effect is an effect of performing a change of a decorative pattern,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a target area for stopping the decorative symbol on the display unit,
The third display effect is an effect for performing a predetermined effect,
A combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed in the target area. The third display effect is performed based on the stop display of the decorative symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1,
The decorative pattern has a plurality of decorative pattern groups,
The target area has a plurality of target areas,
The first display effect is an effect of performing each of the plurality of decorative pattern groups,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the plurality of target areas on the display means,
In the second display effect, the plurality of target areas are displayed by the same number as the plurality of decorative pattern groups, and one decorative pattern group is associated with one target area.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-2,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed based on the stop display of one decorative symbol in each of the plurality of target areas in the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
The combination effect is performed before the start of the reach effect from the start of the change of the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed in the target area. The third display effect is performed based on the stop display of the specific decorative symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of the reach will be described below with reference to FIGS. The decorative symbol superimposed effect at the time of the reach can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative symbol (during a reach effect) or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative design superimposition effect at the time of the reach, the corresponding image data or drive data from the ROM 103 is included. Is read and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Reach decorative pattern superimposition effect A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect A at the time of the reach.
In the at-reach decorative symbol superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), a reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped on the reach line LX1, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed at a high speed, thereby forming a reach state. In FIG. 56 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the symbol “7”, and the reach state is formed using the symbol “7”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. The two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 56B, a “7” symbol is displayed as two decorative symbols 8C. Hereinafter, in the two decorative symbols 8C, one decorative symbol 8C is also referred to as a first decorative symbol 8C, and the other decorative symbol 8C is also referred to as a second decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), reach effect 3 is executed. In the reach effect 3, an effect is executed in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach. Specifically, the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, and the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative symbol 8C may move closer to the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at substantially the same speed, or one may move at a speed higher than the other. Also, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped. The design 8C may move so as to approach the direction of the second decorative design 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (D), reach effect 4 is executed. In the reach effect 4, the effect of superimposing (coalescing) the two decorative symbols 8C to form one decorative symbol 8C is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“7” symbol) are displayed on the reach line LX1. ) Is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after superimposition has lower transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before superimposition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (E), a big hit symbol display effect is executed. In the jackpot symbol display effect, a jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" symbols) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the execution of the jackpot symbol display effect, the second movable role 15 is moved and moved to the developed position, and an effect of emphasizing the jackpot is performed.

[Detailed design superimposition effect B during reach]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol superimposition effect B at the time of reach.
In the at-reach decorative symbol superimposition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), a reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed at a high speed, thereby forming the W reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 57 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the symbol “7”, and the reach state is formed using the symbol “7”. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at "6" symbols, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbols. That is, the W reach state of the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. The two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 57 (B), a “6” symbol is displayed as two decorative symbols 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), reach effect 3 is executed. In the reach effect 3, an effect is executed in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach. Specifically, the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, and the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative symbol 8C may move closer to the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at substantially the same speed, or one may move at a speed higher than the other. Also, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped. The design 8C may move so as to approach the direction of the second decorative design 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), reach effect 4 is executed. In this reach effect 4, the effect of superimposing (combining) the two decorative symbols 8C to form one decorative symbol 8C is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("6" symbols) are displayed on the reach line LX3. ) Is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after superimposition has lower transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before superimposition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), a jackpot symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, a jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("6" symbols) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the execution of the jackpot symbol display effect, the second movable role 15 is moved and moved to the developed position, and an effect of emphasizing the jackpot is performed.

[Reach decorative pattern superimposition effect C during reach]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect C at the time of the reach.
In the decorative symbol superimposition effect C at the time of the reach, first, the reach effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. In the reach effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed at a high speed, thereby forming the W reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 58 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the symbol “7”, and the reach state is formed using the symbol “7”. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at "6" symbols, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbols. That is, the W reach state of the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. The two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 58 (B), a “6” symbol is displayed as two decorative symbols 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), reach effect 3 is executed. In the reach effect 3, an effect is executed in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach. Specifically, the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, and the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative symbol 8C may move closer to the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at substantially the same speed, or one may move at a speed higher than the other. Also, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped. The design 8C may move so as to approach the direction of the second decorative design 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), reach effect 4 is executed. In the reach effect 4, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C are united to form one decorative symbol 8C is executed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C before the merging was the “6” symbol, but the decorative symbol 8C after the merging was the “8” symbol. The decorative pattern 8C after merging has a lower transmittance than the two decorative symbols 8C before merging. As a result, a lost symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the reach line LX3.

  Next, the reach effect 5 is executed as shown in FIG. In the reach effect 5, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed again, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. The two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 58 (E), a “7” symbol is displayed as two decorative symbols 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), reach effect 6 is executed. In the reach effect 3, an effect is executed in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach. Specifically, the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, and the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative symbol 8C may move closer to the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at substantially the same speed, or one may move at a speed higher than the other. Also, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped. The design 8C may move so as to approach the direction of the second decorative design 8C.

  Next, the reach effect 7 is executed as shown in FIG. In the reach effect 7, the effect of superimposing (combining) the two decorative symbols 8C to form one decorative symbol 8C is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" symbol) are displayed on the reach line LX3. ) Is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after superimposition has lower transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before superimposition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), a jackpot symbol display effect is executed. In the jackpot symbol display effect, a jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" symbols) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the execution of the jackpot symbol display effect, the second movable role 15 is moved and moved to the developed position, and an effect of emphasizing the jackpot is performed.

[Deluxe design superimposed effect during reach D]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect D at the time of reach.
In the at-reach decorative symbol superimposition effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), a reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped on the reach line LX1, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed at a high speed, thereby forming a reach state. In FIG. 59 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at “7” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “7” symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. The two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 59B, a “7” symbol is displayed as two decorative symbols 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), reach effect 3 is executed. In the reach effect 3, an effect is executed in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach. Specifically, the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, and the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative symbol 8C may move closer to the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at substantially the same speed, or one may move at a speed higher than the other. Also, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped. The design 8C may move so as to approach the direction of the second decorative design 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), reach effect 4 is executed. In the reach effect 4, the effect of superimposing (coalescing) the two decorative symbols 8C to form one decorative symbol 8C is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“7” symbol) are displayed on the reach line LX1. ) Is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after superimposition has lower transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before superimposition.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), a jackpot symbol display effect 1 is executed. In this big hit symbol display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed as compared to the reach effect 4:00. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C may be displayed large enough to overlap with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), a big hit symbol display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot symbol display effect 2, a jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("7" symbols) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the execution of the jackpot symbol display effect 2, the second movable role 15 is moved and moved to the developed position, and an effect that emphasizes the jackpot is performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of the reach will be described below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the decorative design superimposition effect at the time of the reach, the two decorative symbols 8C are arranged so as not to overlap on the line LX2 in the reach effects 2 and 5, and two in the reach effects 3 and 6. The decorative pattern 8C is approached, and the two decorative patterns 8C are superimposed (combined) in the reach effects 4 and 7 to generate the decorative pattern 8C with low transparency, and the decorative pattern 8C and the decoration forming the reach state. A jackpot symbol array is formed using the symbols 8L and 8R. According to this configuration, the two decorative symbols 8C with high transparency are superimposed (combined) to form a jackpot symbol array, so the player pays attention to the two decorative symbols 8C, and (Coalescing). As a result, it is possible to greatly improve the interest in the reach production and to enhance the interest in the game.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of the reach, the two decorative symbols 8C to be superimposed in the reach effect and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state are the same. According to this configuration, the player can recognize that the superimposition effect of the two decorative symbols 8C is greatly increased if the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined). Can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol superimposing effect at the time of the reach, the decorative symbol 8C generated by the superimposition of the two decorative symbols 8C in the reach effect, and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. The big hit symbol arrangement is constituted using. According to this configuration, if the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined), a win is achieved, so that the superimposed effect of the two decorative symbols 8C greatly excites and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the decorative symbol superimposing effects B and C at the time of the reach, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed to form the W-reach state, and the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed. In the reach decorative pattern superimposition effect B, a jackpot pattern array is formed on the reach line LX3 using the superimposed decorative pattern 8C, and in the reach decorative pattern superimposition effect C, the superimposed decorative pattern 8C is used. Thus, a jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LX1. According to this configuration, if the superimposition of the two decorative symbols 8C is successful in either of the two superimposition effects using the two decorative symbols 8C, a big hit occurs. It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation to the superimposed effect in the W reach state than when. As a result, the superimposed effect of the two decorative symbols 8C is greatly excited, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of the reach, after the execution of the big hit symbol display effect, the second movable role 15 is moved and moved to the development position to emphasize the big hit. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize to the player that the jackpot has been achieved by the superimposition effect of the two decorative symbols 8C in the reach state. When experiencing the superimposed effect of 8C, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the superimposed effect. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the reach-time decorative symbol superimposition effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the reach decoration decoration superimposition effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the reach effect, the decoration symbol 8C generated by superimposing the two decoration symbols 8C and the decoration symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state are used. Instead of the jackpot symbol array, a chance eye symbol array representing a chance eye, a look-ahead suggestion symbol array suggesting a look-ahead effect (pre-determination effect), and a pseudo consecutive effect suggestion symbol array suggesting a pseudo-sequence effect are formed. Is also good.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of the reach of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of moving the second movable role 15 and moving it to the development position is performed when the two decorative symbols 8C are successfully superimposed. Is also good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of the reach and the character appearance effect described later may be performed with the same fluctuation. For example, in the same variation, after performing the character appearance effect, a decorative pattern superimposition effect at the time of the reach may be performed, or after the decorative pattern superimposition effect at the time of the reach, a character appearance effect may be performed. The decorative symbol superimposition effect and the character appearance effect may be performed simultaneously.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of the reach, when displaying two decorative symbols 8C having high transparency, a predetermined character or character is displayed on the background of these two decorative symbols 8C. You may. Thereafter, when the superimposition of the two decorative symbols 8C is successful, a part or all of these characters or characters may be made invisible by the decorative symbol 8C generated by the superimposition.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of forming a first reach state using a first decorative pattern,
The second display effect displays a second decorative symbol having a higher transparency than the first decorative symbol at a first position and a third decorative symbol having a higher transparency than the first decorative symbol. Is displayed at a second position different from the first position,
The third display effect includes moving the second decorative symbol from the first position, moving the third decorative symbol from the second position, and moving the second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. 3 is an effect in which the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol having lower transparency than the third decorative symbol are generated by superimposing the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol,
A combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed. When the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect. Is performed, using the first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect. A first symbol arrangement is formed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
The first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect are the same symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1 or Aspect A3-2,
Using the first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect as the first symbol array A jackpot symbol array is formed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
In the first display effect, a first reach state is formed using the first decorative pattern, and a second reach state different from the first reach state is formed using a fifth decorative pattern. Is an effect that forms
In the combination effect, the second decorative symbol forming the second reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect are used to perform the second effect. The pattern arrangement of is formed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
In the combination effect, after the first symbol arrangement is formed, a role effect of moving a predetermined role is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The character appearance effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. This character appearance effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative pattern, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the target area display effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Character appearance effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect A.
In the character appearance effect A, first, a decorative symbol stop effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the lost symbol array. In FIG. 60 (A), the decorative symbol 8L is a “6” symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is an “8” symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is a “7” symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not yet changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), a reach formation effect is executed. In the reach formation effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed at a high speed, thereby forming a W-reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 60 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at "6" symbols, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbols. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the symbol "7", and the reach state is formed using the symbol "7". That is, the W reach state of the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), a character appearance effect 1 is executed. In the character appearance effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed and is displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In the character appearance effect 1, the character image A41 is arranged on the back (behind) the decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates at a low speed. In this case, the entire area of the character image A41 is located on the back (back) of the decorative pattern 8C. The decorative pattern 8C has such a degree of transparency that the character image A41 is completely invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern 8C may have a degree of transparency such that the character image A41 is slightly visible. In FIG. 60 (D), a “7” symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), a character appearance effect 2 is executed. In the character appearance effect 2, the decorative pattern 8 </ b> C continues to fluctuate at a low speed, and the transparency is higher than that in the character appearance effect 1. Therefore, in this character appearance effect 2, the character image A41 located on the back of the decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may be stopped.

  If the character image A41 appears in the character appearance effect 2, a super reach effect is performed next. Thus, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that it develops into a super reach effect.

[Character appearance effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for describing the character appearance effect B.
In the character appearance effect B, first, a decorative symbol stop effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the lost symbol array. In FIG. 60 (A), the decorative symbol 8L is a “6” symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is an “8” symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is a “7” symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not yet changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), a reach formation effect is executed. In the reach formation effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed at a high speed, thereby forming a W-reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 61 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at “6” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “6” symbols. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the symbol "7", and the reach state is formed using the symbol "7". That is, the W reach state of the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), a character appearance effect 1 is executed. In the character appearance effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed and is displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In the character appearance effect 1, the character image A41 is arranged on the back (behind) the decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates at a low speed. In this case, a part of the character image A41 is located on the back of the decorative pattern 8C, and part of the character image A41 protrudes from the decorative pattern 8C. The decorative pattern 8C has such a degree of transparency that the character image A41 is completely invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern 8C may have a degree of transparency such that the character image A41 is slightly visible. In FIG. 61 (D), a “7” symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), a character appearance effect 2 is executed. In the character appearance effect 2, the decorative pattern 8 </ b> C continues to fluctuate at a low speed, and the transparency is higher than that in the character appearance effect 1. Therefore, in this character appearance effect 2, the character image A41 (part) located on the back of the decorative pattern 8C is visible to the player, that is, the entire character image A41 is visible to the player.

  In the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may be stopped.

  If the character image A41 appears in the character appearance effect 2, a super reach effect is performed next. Thus, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that it develops into a super reach effect.

[Character appearance effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for describing the character appearance effect C.
In the character appearance effect C, first, a decorative symbol stop effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the lost symbol array. In FIG. 60 (A), the decorative symbol 8L is a “6” symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is an “8” symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is a “7” symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not yet changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), a reach formation effect is executed. In the reach formation effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed at a high speed, thereby forming a W-reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 62 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at "6" symbols, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbols. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the symbol "7", and the reach state is formed using the symbol "7". That is, the W reach state of the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), a jackpot determination effect is executed. In this jackpot determination effect, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at “7” symbol, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are all “7” symbol, and the jackpot symbol array is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. As a result, the player knows that a big hit has occurred. Further, in this jackpot determination effect, the character image A41 is arranged on the back (back) of the decorative pattern 8C. In this case, the entire area of the character image A41 is located on the back of the decorative pattern 8C. The decorative pattern 8C has such a degree of transparency that the character image A41 is completely invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern 8C may have a degree of transparency such that the character image A41 is slightly visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), a character appearance effect is executed. In this character appearance effect, the decorative pattern 8C has a higher transparency than in the case of the jackpot determination effect. Therefore, in this character appearance effect, the character image A41 located on the back of the decorative pattern 8C becomes visible to the player.

  Note that, in the above-described jackpot determination effect, the character image A41 is configured such that the entire area is located on the back of the decorative pattern 8C, but the character image A41 is partially located on the back of the decorative pattern 8C and partially decorated. It may be configured to protrude from the design 8C.

  When the character image A41 appears in the character appearance effect, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that an advantage occurs for the player. For example, when the character image A41 appears, the appearance of the character image A41 may indicate that there is a big hit in the hold (reserved ball consecutive Chang), or in the big hit game, 16R (the largest round) Number) It may indicate that it is a fixed jackpot, or it may indicate that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a state (probable change state) advantageous to the player.

[Character appearance effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for describing the character appearance effect D.
In the character appearance effect D, first, a decorative symbol stop effect is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (A). In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the lost symbol array. In FIG. 60 (A), the decorative symbol 8L is a “6” symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is an “8” symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is a “7” symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not yet changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), a reach formation effect is executed. In the reach formation effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed at a high speed, thereby forming a W-reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 63 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at "6" symbols, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbols. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the symbol "7", and the reach state is formed using the symbol "7". That is, the W reach state of the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), a character appearance effect 1 is executed. In the character appearance effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed and is displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In the character appearance effect 1, two character images A43 are arranged on the back (back) of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, respectively. In this case, part of the character image A41 protrudes from the decorative design, and part of the character image A41 is located behind the decorative design 8C. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have such a degree of transparency that the character image A43 is completely invisible to the player. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may have a degree of transparency such that the character image A43 is slightly visible. In FIG. 63 (D), a “7” symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), a character appearance effect 2 is executed. In this character appearance effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at a low speed, and the transparency of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is higher than that in the character appearance effect 1. Therefore, in this character appearance effect 2, the character image A43 located on the back of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R becomes visible to the player.

  In the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may be stopped. In the character appearance effect 1, the character image A43 may be configured such that the entire area is arranged on the back of the decorative pattern 8L or the decorative pattern 8R.

  When the character image A43 appears in the character appearance effect 2, a super reach effect is next performed. Thus, the appearance of the character image A43 suggests that it develops into a super reach effect.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the character appearance effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the character appearance effects A to C, when the decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a relatively high transparency state, the character image A41 is arranged on the back of the eight decorative patterns 8C, Thereafter, when the decorative pattern 8C is displayed with a relatively low transmittance, the character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible through the decorative pattern 8C. Also, in the character appearance effect D, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a state of relatively high transparency, the character image A43 is arranged on the back (behind) the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Thereafter, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a state of relatively low transparency, the character image A43 is displayed so as to be visible through the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, the character image hidden in the decorative pattern appears due to the increased transparency of the decorative pattern, so that a great surprise can be given to the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effects A and B, the character image A41 is arranged on the back of the eight decorative symbols 8C when the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a fluctuating manner with relatively high transparency. Thereafter, when the decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a state of relatively low transparency, the character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible through the decorative pattern 8C. According to this configuration, since the character image hidden in the decorative pattern 8C during the variable display appears due to the increase in the transparency of the decorative pattern, a great surprise is given to the player during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Can be. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effects A and B, after the decoration pattern 8C is displayed at a high speed, the decoration image 8C is displayed at a relatively high transparency, and the character image is displayed at a low speed. When A41 is arranged on the back of decorative pattern 8C, and thereafter, decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a state of relatively low transparency, character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible through decorative pattern 8C. According to this configuration, the character image hidden in the decorative pattern 8C during the low-speed fluctuation display appears by increasing the transparency of the decorative pattern, so that the appearance of the character image can be impressed to the player, and the player can be impressed. Can be given a great surprise. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effect C, the character image A41 is a decorative pattern 8C having relatively high transparency, and is arranged on the back of the stopped decorative pattern 8C. According to this configuration, since the character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible to the player through the decorative pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed, the appearance of the character image can be carefully impressed to the player. As a result, even when the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed and boring, the player can be provided with a great sense of surprise, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effect, in the character appearance effect 1 or the jackpot confirmation effect, the character image may be arranged on the back of the decorative pattern having a relatively low transparency. At this time, the character image (all or a part thereof) becomes invisible to the player due to the decorative pattern. According to this configuration, by creating the invisible state, the appearance of the next character can be emphasized, and the character appearance effect can be made more interesting. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the character appearance effects will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the character appearance effects A, B, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that a super-reach effect is developed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the appearance of the character image A41 may indicate that the character image A41 develops into a pseudo continuous production, a look-ahead production, a chance-up production, or the like. In this case, when the character image A41 appears, a pseudo continuous effect, a prefetch effect, and a chance-up effect are performed.
Further, the appearance of the character image A41 may indicate a big hit.

[Modification 2]
In the character appearance effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the appearance of the character images A41 and A43 is at the time of the character appearance effect 1 or at the time of the jackpot confirmation effect. It may be performed at the time. After that, the character appearance effect and the jackpot determination effect shown in FIGS.

[Modification 3]
In the character appearance effects A, B, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, first, the decoration pattern 8C is displayed at a low speed in a "6" pattern, and at that time, the character appearance effect 1 is executed. May be displayed in a low-speed variation with a “7” symbol, and at that time, a character appearance effect 2 may be executed. That is, in the character appearance effects A, B, and D, in the W reach state, the character appearance effect 1 is first performed at the reach of one reach line, and the character appearance effect 2 is performed at the reach of the other reach line. You may.

[Modification 4]
In the character appearance effects A to C of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effects, the character image A41 is a decorative pattern 8C (for example, a decorative pattern 8C that can constitute a jackpot symbol array together with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R when stopped). In FIG. 60, the decorative pattern 8C is arranged so as to be hidden behind the “7” pattern, and appears when the transmittance of the decorative pattern 8C increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the character appearance effect, the character image A41 is a decorative symbol 8C that cannot form a jackpot symbol array together with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R when stopped (for example, the symbol “8” in the situation of FIG. 60). And may appear when the transmittance of the decorative pattern 8C is increased.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative pattern at a first transparency,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the decorative design with a second transmittance higher than the first transmittance,
The third display effect is an effect for displaying a predetermined character,
A combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, thereafter, the second display effect is performed, and when the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed. The predetermined character in the third display effect may be arranged behind the decorative symbol displayed with the second transparency, and may be displayed so as to be visible through the decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of forming a reach state using the decorative pattern,
The decorative pattern in the reach state includes a decorative pattern in a stopped state and a decorative pattern in a fluctuating state,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the fourth display effect is being performed, the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the decorative pattern in the fluctuating state is the second transmittance. In some cases, the predetermined character is disposed behind the decorative symbol in the fluctuating state, and is displayed so as to be visible through the decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the decorative symbol in the fluctuating state is displayed from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and the predetermined character is arranged behind the decorative pattern displayed on the low-speed fluctuating display. , May be visible through the decorative design,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-2 or Aspect A4-3,
In the combination effect, when the fourth display effect is being performed, the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the decorative pattern in the stopped state is the second transmittance. The predetermined character is arranged behind the decorative pattern in the stopped state, and may be displayed so as to be visible through the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed when the first display effect or the second display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed. In the case where the third display effect is performed, the predetermined character may be arranged behind the decorative symbol displayed with the first transparency, and may be invisible due to the decorative symbol. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. This jackpot symbol array display effect can be executed during a variation effect of a decorative symbol, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the jackpot symbol array display effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Big hit design arrangement display effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect A.
In the big hit symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), a reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be in the stop display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbols 8C at a high speed. In FIG. 64 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol, and the reach state is formed using the “6” symbol. The reach line LN1 is a line that extends diagonally to the upper right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64C, a W-reach effect is executed. In this W-reach production, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped and displayed on the reach line LN2 while the decorative symbol 8C is maintained as the high-speed fluctuating display. Is formed. In FIG. 64 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol, and the W reach state is formed using the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending diagonally upward and to the left. Accordingly, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 intersect and form an "X" character by the two lines.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), a jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 1, the symbol "6" of the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN1, so that the jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 64 (D), a jackpot symbol arrangement of a symbol “6” is formed on the reach line LN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), a jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 2, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line at the upper left of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller in the jackpot display effect 1 than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1. In FIG. 64 (E), a jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols same as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), a jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller in the jackpot display effect 1 than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1. In FIG. 64 (F), the big hit symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the big hit display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. In the big hit game effect, the big hit symbol arrangement image A51 is displayed. The big hit symbol arrangement image A51 is a capture screen at the time of the big hit display effect 1, that is, the information about the reach line and the big hit symbol array that have been the big hit in the big hit display effect 1. In the big hit game effect, an image representing round information, an image indicating right-handedness, an image representing acquired payout information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

  The effects of FIGS. 64A to 64E are performed during the same fluctuation, and the effects of FIG. 64F are performed during the jackpot game immediately after any fluctuation. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effects of FIGS. 64 (E) to (F) may be performed during the big hit game.

[Big hit design layout display effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the big hit symbol arrangement display effect B.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), a reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be in the stop display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbols 8C at a high speed. In FIG. 65 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at "6" symbols, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbols. The reach line LN1 is a line that extends diagonally to the upper right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), a W-reach effect is executed. In this W-reach production, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped and displayed on the reach line LN2 while the decorative symbol 8C is maintained as the high-speed fluctuating display. Is formed. In FIG. 65 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the symbol “6” and the symbol “7”, and the W reach state is formed using the symbol “6” and the symbol “7”. The reach line LN2 is a line extending diagonally upward and to the left. Accordingly, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 intersect and form an "X" character by the two lines.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), a jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 1, the symbol "6" of the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN1, so that the jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 65 (D), a jackpot symbol arrangement of the symbol “6” is formed on the reach line LN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), a jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 2, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line at the upper left of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller in the jackpot display effect 1 than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1. In FIG. 65 (E), a jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols same as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), a jackpot display effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 3, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN6. The line LN6 is a line substantially at the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN6 is displayed larger in the jackpot display effect 2 than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4. In FIG. 65 (F), a jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols same as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), a jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller in the jackpot display effect 1 than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1. In FIG. 65 (G), a jackpot symbol arrangement of “6” symbols same as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. In the big hit game effect, the big hit symbol arrangement image A51 is displayed. The big hit symbol arrangement image A51 is a capture screen at the time of the big hit display effect 1, that is, the information about the reach line and the big hit symbol array that have been the big hit in the big hit display effect 1. In the big hit game effect, an image representing round information, an image indicating right-handedness, an image representing acquired payout information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

  The effects of FIGS. 65 (A) to (F) are performed during the same change, and the effects of FIG. 65 (G) are performed during the jackpot game immediately after any change. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects of FIGS. 65 (E) to (G) may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Big hit design arrangement display effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the big hit symbol array display effect C.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), a reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be in the stop display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbols 8C at a high speed. In FIG. 66 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at "6" symbols, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbols. The reach line LN1 is a line that extends diagonally to the upper right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), a W-reach effect is executed. In this W-reach production, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped and displayed on the reach line LN2 while the decorative symbol 8C is maintained as the high-speed fluctuating display. Is formed. In FIG. 66 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol, and the W reach state is formed using the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending diagonally upward and to the left. Accordingly, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 intersect and form an "X" character by the two lines.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), a jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 1, the symbol "6" of the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN1, so that the jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 66 (D), a jackpot symbol arrangement of the symbol “6” is formed on the reach line LN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), a jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In the big hit display effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the reach line LN1 is displayed in an enlarged manner. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C overlaps the decorative symbols 8L and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), a jackpot display effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 3, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line at the upper left of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller in the jackpot display effect 1 than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1. In FIG. 66 (F), the big hit symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the big hit display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), a jackpot display effect 4 is executed. In the big hit display effect 4, a big hit symbol array is displayed on the line LN6. The line LN6 is a line substantially at the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN6 is displayed larger in the jackpot display effect 3 than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4. In FIG. 66 (G), a big hit symbol array of “6” symbols same as the big hit display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), a jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller in the jackpot display effect 1 than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1. In FIG. 66 (G), the big hit symbol arrangement of “6” symbols same as the big hit display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. In the big hit game effect, the big hit symbol arrangement image A51 is displayed. The big hit symbol arrangement image A51 is a capture screen at the time of the big hit display effect 1, that is, the information about the reach line and the big hit symbol array that have been the big hit in the big hit display effect 1. In the big hit game effect, an image representing round information, an image indicating right-handedness, an image representing acquired payout information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

  The effects of FIGS. 66 (A) to (G) are performed during the same fluctuation, and the effects of FIG. 66 (G) are performed during the jackpot game immediately after any fluctuation. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effects shown in FIGS. 66 (F) to (H) may be performed during the big hit game.

[Small jackpot design display effect D]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for describing the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect D.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), a reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be in the stop display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbols 8C at a high speed. In FIG. 67 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at "6" symbols, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbols. The reach line LN1 is a line that extends diagonally to the upper right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), a W-reach effect is executed. In this W-reach production, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped and displayed on the reach line LN2 while the decorative symbol 8C is maintained as the high-speed fluctuating display. Is formed. In FIG. 67 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the symbols “6” and “7”, and the W reach state is formed using the symbols “6” and “7”. The reach line LN2 is a line extending diagonally upward and to the left. Accordingly, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 intersect and form an "X" character by the two lines.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), a jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 1, the symbol "6" of the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN1, so that the jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 67 (D), a jackpot symbol arrangement of a symbol “6” is formed on the reach line LN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), a jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In the big hit display effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the reach line LN1 is displayed in an enlarged manner. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C overlaps the decorative symbols 8L and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), a movable part effect is performed. In this character movable effect, the second movable character 15 is moved to the advanced position and moved to the front of the display screen 7a. In this case, on the display screen 7a, a big hit symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1. That is, the big hit symbol array on the reach line LN1 can be visually recognized by the player from the area not covered by the second movable auditory substance 15 on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), a jackpot display effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 3, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line at the upper left of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller in the jackpot display effect 1 than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1. In FIG. 67 (F), the big hit symbol array of “6” symbols same as the big hit display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), a jackpot display effect 4 is executed. In the big hit display effect 4, a big hit symbol array is displayed on the line LN6. The line LN6 is a line substantially at the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN6 is displayed smaller in the jackpot display effect 3 than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4. In FIG. 67 (G), the big hit symbol arrangement of the “6” symbol same as the big hit display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (I), a jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller in the jackpot display effect 1 than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1. In FIG. 67 (G), a jackpot symbol arrangement of “6” symbols same as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. In the big hit game effect, the big hit symbol arrangement image A51 is displayed. The big hit symbol arrangement image A51 is a capture screen at the time of the big hit display effect 1, that is, the information about the reach line and the big hit symbol array that have been the big hit in the big hit display effect 1. In the big hit game effect, an image representing round information, an image indicating right-handedness, an image representing acquired payout information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

  The effects of FIGS. 67 (A) to (H) are performed during the same change, and the effects of FIG. 67 (I) are performed during the jackpot game immediately after any change. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effects of FIGS. 67 (G) to (I) may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect, a reach state is formed on the reach line LN1, a W reach state is formed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and thereafter, on the reach line LN1. The jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed, and thereafter, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the lines LN4 and LN5. According to this configuration, the effect of the decorative symbol can be enjoyed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and thereafter, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the reach line LN1 and the line LN4 or the line LN5. The jackpot symbol arrangement can be displayed by changing the viewpoint to the player, and the jackpot can be emphasized to amplify the joy that the player has won. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect, a reach state is formed on the reach line LN1, a W reach state is formed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and thereafter, on the reach line LN1. The jackpot symbol array is displayed, thereafter, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4, and further, during the subsequent jackpot game, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN5. According to this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the effect of the decorative symbol on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and thereafter, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the reach line LN1 and the line LN4, so that the player is provided with The jackpot symbol array can be displayed by changing the viewpoint, and during the jackpot game, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN5, so that the jackpot is emphasized, and the joy of the player's jackpot is enhanced. Can be amplified. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect, an effect in which the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1 (for example, FIG. 64 (D)), and on the line LN4, the line LN5, or The effect (for example, FIG. 64E) in which the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN6 is performed during the same fluctuation. According to this configuration, the jackpot symbol arrangement can be displayed while changing the viewpoint to the player during the same change, so that the jackpot is emphasized during the same change, and the joy of the player being a big hit is further amplified. be able to. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol display effect, the jackpot symbol array displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1 is larger than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN4 or the line LN5. Is displayed. According to this configuration, the big hit can be emphasized by displaying the big hit symbol array in large size at the beginning of the big hit display effect, and the pleasure of the big hit of the player can be further amplified. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect D, after the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 2. After a part is enlarged and displayed, the big hit symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN4 in the big hit display effect 3. According to this configuration, by displaying the big hit symbol array in a large size, the big hit can be emphasized, and the joy of the big hit of the player can be further amplified. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the jackpot symbol array display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol array displayed on the line LN4 may be displayed larger than the jackpot symbol array displayed on the reach line LN1.

[Modification 2]
In the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1, the reach line LN2, the line LN4, the line LN5, and the line LN6 is one of the decorative symbols. Parts or all may overlap. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1, on the reach line LN2, on the line LN4, on the line LN5, on the line LN6 may be increased or decreased, or may be reduced. You may make a move.

[Modification 3]
In the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a bonus movable effect is performed between the large hit display effect 2 and the large hit display effect 3, but the movable movable effect is a large hit display effect 1 Between the jackpot display effect 2 and the jackpot display effect 3 and the jackpot display effect 4, between the jackpot display effect 4 and the jackpot game effect, and during these jackpot display effects or jackpot game effects. You may. In addition, the size of the big hit symbol array and the line on which the big hit symbol array is displayed may be changed before and after the movable character effect.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on a first line in the display means to bring the display into a reach state,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the first jackpot symbol array by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol on the first line,
The third display effect is an effect in which a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the second line different from the first line on the display means to bring the display into a reach state,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second jackpot symbol array by stopping and displaying a decorative symbol on a third line different from the first line and the second line,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed. When the first display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed, and the first display effect and the third display effect are performed. After the display effect, the second display effect is performed, and after the second display effect, the fourth display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-1,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a third jackpot symbol arrangement by stopping and displaying a decorative symbol on a fourth line different from the first line, the second line, and the third line. Is an effect that displays
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect and during a jackpot game.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-2,
In the combination effect, the second display effect and the fourth display effect are performed during the same fluctuation,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-3,
The first big hit symbol array in the second display effect is larger than the second big hit symbol array in the fourth display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is an effect for enlarging and displaying the first jackpot symbol array,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, after the second display effect is performed, the sixth display effect is performed, and after the sixth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect can be executed in connection with the change display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”). Note that the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effects A, B, and C are the jackpot suggestions within the reservation, and the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D is a jackpot suggestion of the change.

[Decoration pattern suggestion effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect A.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68A, a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 68 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. In the decorative design variation effect shown in FIG. 68 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the reserved number of the first special symbol is “3” and the reserved number of the second special symbol is “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss design stop effect indicates that the fluctuation result shown in FIG. 68 (A) has been lost. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are provided with an upper line JL and a lower line GL as prescribed stop positions. When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop after a change to indicate a symbol arrangement, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are usually arranged. Then, it stops in a state of being horizontally aligned along the upper line JL and the lower line GL. That is, in the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. In the present example, in the lost symbol arrangement, “869” is shown in the upper line JL and “958” is shown in the lower line GL.

On the other hand, in place of FIG. 68 (B), as shown in FIG. 68 (C), a left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect may be executed. This left decorative pattern lower shift stop production shows a state in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped after the fluctuation, and the decorative symbols 8C, 8R stop at the upper line JL and the lower line GL, which are the specified stop positions. However, the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R indicate “77” in the upper line JL and “66” in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL by “5” and the lower line “6” is shown, which is shifted downward from GL. That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect is a symbol array in which “5” of “577” is shifted downward from the upper line JL, and a symbol array of “666” is the left. "6" indicates a symbol array shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R deviates from the prescribed stop position, a lost symbol array is formed. Therefore, the "666" which becomes a jackpot symbol arrangement when stopping at the upper line JL or the lower line GL, which is the prescribed stop position, also has a lost symbol array in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. Become.
In this example, the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped, but the illustration is omitted, but the right decorative symbol 8R or the middle decorative symbol 8C is the upper decorative line 8C. Similarly, the line JL and the lower line GL may shift downward and stop.

Further, instead of FIG. 68 (B), as shown in FIG. 68 (D), there may be a case where a shift stop effect on the right decorative symbol is executed. This right decoration pattern upward shift stop effect shows a state where the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped after the fluctuation, and the decoration symbols 8L, 8C stop at the upper line JL and the lower line GL, which are the predetermined stop positions. However, the left decorative symbol 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative patterns 8L and 8C show “68” in the upper line JL and “77” in the lower line GL, and the left decorative pattern 8L deviates from the upper line JL by “8” and the lower line “7” is shown shifted upward from GL. In other words, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the right ornamental symbol upward shift stop effect is a symbol array in which the right “8” of “688” is shifted upward from the upper line JL, and “777”. “7” on the right of the symbol indicates a symbol arrangement shifted upward from the lower line GL. Therefore, the "777" which becomes a jackpot symbol arrangement when stopping at the upper line JL or the lower line GL, which is the prescribed stop position, is not the same as the lost symbol array in the right decorative symbol upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. Become.
In this example, the right decorative pattern 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped, but the illustration is omitted, but the left decorative pattern 8L or the middle decorative pattern 8C is the upper decorative line 8L. Similarly, the line JL and the lower line GL may shift upward and stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect is an effect that is performed after the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect illustrated in FIG. 68 (C) or the right decorative symbol upper shift stop effect illustrated in FIG. 68 (D) is performed. In this jackpot determination effect, the number of reservations H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the number of reservations H1 has been changed from “3” to “1”. That is, in this jackpot determination effect, the suspension of the first special symbol is started from the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) or the right decorative symbol upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D). This shows a state where two pieces have been digested. The jackpot symbol array “777” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the fluctuation result of the second holding of the first special symbol. In the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 68 (E), the jackpot symbol array “777” is displayed alone (one row) substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The characters "big hit!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
In the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 68 (E), the left decorative pattern lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) or the right decorative pattern upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D) was performed. Even in this case, the loss symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (B) may be performed at a predetermined probability without being necessarily performed.

  In other words, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 68, when any of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R deviates from the prescribed stop position and stops in the predetermined fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is likely to be a big hit in the fluctuations related to the suspension after the predetermined fluctuations. In other words, in the predetermined fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, if there is a jackpot by pre-reading the contents of the hold, the decorative symbol 8L, with a predetermined probability (a lottery using random numbers, etc.) Either 8C or 8R is shifted from a predetermined stop position and stopped. Moreover, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect A, the symbol array (losing symbol array) that is shifted from the specified stop position and stopped is indicated by the symbol array that becomes the jackpot symbol array when stopped at the specified stop position. This suggests (suggests) that the player will win a jackpot.

[Decoration pattern jackpot suggestion effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect B.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 69 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. In the decorative design change effect shown in FIG. 69 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the reserved number of the first special symbol is “3” and the reserved number of the second special symbol is “0”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), a left decorative pattern lower shift stop blue effect effect is executed. The left decorative pattern lower shift stop blue effect effect shows a state in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped after the fluctuation, and the decorative patterns 8C, 8R are the upper line JL and the lower line GL which are the specified stop positions. , But the left decorative pattern 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R indicate “77” in the upper line JL and “66” in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL by “5” and the lower line “6” is shown, which is shifted downward from GL. That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect is a symbol array in which “5” of “577” is shifted downward from the upper line JL, and a symbol array of “666” is the left. "6" indicates a symbol array shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R deviates from the prescribed stop position, a lost symbol array is formed. Therefore, the "666" which becomes a jackpot symbol arrangement when stopping at the upper line JL or the lower line GL, which is the prescribed stop position, also has a lost symbol array in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. Become.
In this example, the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped, but the illustration is omitted, but the right decorative symbol 8R or the middle decorative symbol 8C is the upper decorative line 8C. Similarly, the line JL and the lower line GL may shift downward and stop.
Further, in the symbol array in which the left “6” of “666” is shifted downward from the lower line GL, water droplets are placed so as to surround “6”, which is each stop symbol of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. A simulated blue effect image is displayed.

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 69 (B), as shown in FIG. 69 (C), there may be a case where a left decorative symbol lower shift stop red effect effect is executed. This left decorative pattern lower shift stop red effect effect is the same as the left decorative pattern lower shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69B described above, and the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is “577”. Of these, “5” indicates a symbol array shifted downward from the upper line JL, and “6” on the left of “666” indicates a symbol array shifted downward from the lower line GL. In the symbol array in which "6" on the left of "" is shifted downward from the lower line GL, a red effect image imitating a flame is provided so as to surround "6" which is the stop symbol of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss design stop effect is an effect performed after the left decorative pattern lower shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the left decorative pattern lower shift stop red effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (C) is performed. It is. In the lost symbol stop effect, the number of reservations H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the number of reservations H1 has been changed from “3” to “1”. In other words, in this lost design stop effect, the first decorative design lower shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the left decorative design lower shift stop red effect effect shown in FIG. This shows a state in which two special symbols have been reserved. That is, the losing symbol array indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the fluctuation result of the second hold of the first special symbol, and “869” is displayed on the upper line JL and “958” is displayed on the lower line GL. "It is shown.
In addition, the probability of the loss design stop effect being performed is that the lower decorative design lower shift shown in FIG. 69 (C) is performed when the left decorative design lower shift stop effect blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) is performed. It is higher than when the stop red effect effect was performed.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 69 (D), a jackpot determination effect may be executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 69 (E). This jackpot determination effect is the same as the loss symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 69 (D), and is shown in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or FIG. 69 (C). This is an effect that is performed after the stop effect red stop effect under the left decorative pattern is performed. In this jackpot determination effect, the number of reservations H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the number of reservations H1 has been changed from “3” to “1”. In other words, in the jackpot determination effect, the first special stop pattern lower displacement stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the left decorative pattern lower shift stop red effect effect shown in FIG. This shows a state in which two symbols have been retained. That is, the jackpot symbol array “777” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the fluctuation result of the second hold of the first special symbol. In the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 69 (E), the jackpot symbol array “777” is displayed alone (one step) substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The character "Big hit!" Is displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
In addition, the probability that the jackpot determination effect will be performed is higher when the left decorative design lower shift stop shown in FIG. 69 (C) is performed and the left decorative design lower shift stop illustrated in FIG. 69 (B) is performed. It is higher than when the blue effect effect was performed.

  That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect B shown in FIG. 69, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop changing, a plurality of types of effect effects (in this example, a blue effect effect and a red effect effect) can be executed. According to the types of these effect effects, the rate of giving the jackpot changes. In other words, in the predetermined fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, if there is a jackpot by pre-reading the contents of the hold, a plurality of types of effects are provided with a predetermined probability (a lottery using random numbers, etc.) as a jackpot suggesting effect. A predetermined effect production is performed from the production.

[Decoration pattern jackpot suggestion effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect C.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 70A, a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 70A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. In the decorative design variation effect shown in FIG. 70 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the reserved number of the first special symbol is “3” and the reserved number of the second special symbol is “0”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), a left decorative symbol “6” lower shift stop effect is executed. This left decorative symbol “6” lower shift stop effect shows a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped after the fluctuation, and the decorative symbols 8C, 8R are the upper line JL and the lower line which are the prescribed stop positions. Although stopped at GL, the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R indicate “77” in the upper line JL and “66” in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL by “5” and the lower line “6” is shown, which is shifted downward from GL. In other words, the symbol array of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left decorative symbol “6” lower shift stop effect is a symbol array in which “5” of “577” is shifted downward from the upper line JL, and “666”. The symbol “6” on the left indicates a symbol array shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R deviates from the prescribed stop position, a lost symbol array is formed. Therefore, "666" which becomes a jackpot symbol arrangement when stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL which is the prescribed stop position is also lost in the left decorative pattern "6" lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B). It becomes a pattern arrangement.
In this example, the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped, but the illustration is omitted, but the right decorative symbol 8R or the middle decorative symbol 8C is the upper decorative line 8C. Similarly, the line JL and the lower line GL may shift downward and stop.

On the other hand, in place of FIG. 70 (B), as shown in FIG. 70 (C), a right decoration symbol “7” upper shift stop effect may be executed. This right decoration pattern “7” upper shift stop effect shows a state in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R have stopped after the fluctuation, and the decoration patterns 8L, 8C are the upper line JL and the lower line which are the prescribed stop positions. Although stopped at GL, the left decorative symbol 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative patterns 8L and 8C show “68” in the upper line JL and “77” in the lower line GL, and the left decorative pattern 8L deviates from the upper line JL by “8” and the lower line “7” is shown shifted upward from GL. In other words, the symbol array of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the right decorative symbol “7” shift stop effect is a symbol array in which the right “8” of “688” is shifted upward from the upper line JL, and “777”. “7” on the right of “” indicates a symbol arrangement shifted upward from the lower line GL. Therefore, even if "777" which becomes a jackpot symbol arrangement when stopping at the upper line JL or the lower line GL which is the prescribed stop position, the right decoration symbol "7" shown in FIG. It becomes a pattern arrangement.
In this example, the right decorative pattern 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped, but the illustration is omitted, but the left decorative pattern 8L or the middle decorative pattern 8C is the upper decorative line 8L. Similarly, the line JL and the lower line GL may shift upward and stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the effect is performed after the left decorative symbol “6” lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) or the right decorative symbol “7” upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (C) is performed. It is. In this reach effect, the hold number H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the hold number H1 has been changed from “3” to “1”. That is, in this reach effect, the first decorative pattern “6” lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) or the right decorative pattern “7” upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. This shows a state where two special symbols have been reserved. The lost symbol array “68” of the upper line JL and the reach symbol array “77” of the lower line GL where the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped correspond to the change of the second hold of the first special symbol. ing. Further, in the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D), the character “reach!” Is displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.
It should be noted that the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) is the stop effect of stopping the left decorative symbol “6” shown below in FIG. 70 (B), or stopping the upward shift of the right decorative symbol “7” shown in FIG. 70 (C). Even if the production is performed, it is not always performed and may not reach. In addition, the probability that this reach effect is performed is that the left decorative symbol “6” shown in FIG. 70 (B) is higher when the shift stop effect with the right decorative symbol “7” shown in FIG. 70 (C) is performed. It is higher than when the lower gap stop effect was performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect switched from the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D), in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB on the player side battle instead of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. The image is displayed. That is, the battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E) is performed when the game state is reach. In this battle effect, the numbers of hold H1 and H2 indicate "1" and "0", similarly to the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D).
The battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E) is not necessarily performed even if the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) is performed, and the battle effect does not evolve from the reach effect to the battle effect. It is possible. In addition, the probability (battle development rate) that this battle effect is performed is higher when the right decorative pattern “7” upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (C) is performed and the left stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) is performed. It is higher than the case where the decoration pattern “6” lower shift stop effect was performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), a jackpot determination suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the jackpot determination suggestion effect, the character "Victory!" Indicating that the ally character CRA has won as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character “WIN!”, The player can be made to think that the current reach is a big hit (a privilege advantageous to the player is given). In addition, in this jackpot determination suggestion effect, the numbers of hold H1 and H2 indicate “1” and “0” in the same manner as the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) and the battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E). ing.
Although illustration is omitted, the ally character may be defeated in the battle effect. In this case, the jackpot determination suggestion effect shown in FIG. 70 (F) is not performed, and instead, it indicates that the ally character has defeated. "Lost!" Is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "Defeated!", It is possible to make the player think that the current reach does not become a big hit (a benefit advantageous to the player is not given).
In addition, the probability of the ally character CRA winning in the battle effect (battle victory expectation degree) is higher in the case where the stop effect on the right decorative pattern “7” shown in FIG. ) Is higher than in the case where the left decorative symbol “6” lower shift stop effect is performed. In other words, the probability of the ally character CRA losing in the battle effect is higher when the left decorative symbol “6” shown in FIG. 70 (B) is shifted downward and the right decoration shown in FIG. 70 (C) is performed. It is higher than the case where the pattern “7” top shift stop effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot determination effect, a jackpot symbol array “777” is displayed instead of the character “WIN!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has won in the jackpot determination suggestion effect shown in FIG. 70 (F). With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. In the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 70 (G), the jackpot symbol array “777” is displayed alone (one row) substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The characters "big hit!" Are displayed.
As described above, when the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) was not performed (when the reach effect was not reached), the reach effect did not evolve into the battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E). In the case, and when the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle effect and the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 70 (F) is not performed, the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 70 (G) is performed. Instead, a loss confirmation effect is performed (see FIGS. 68 (B) and 69 (D)).

  That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect C shown in FIG. 70, when any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shifted from the specified stop position and stopped in the predetermined fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Depending on the type of the shifted symbol arrangement, the rate of reaching, the rate of development to the battle after the reach, and the degree of expectation of battle victory in the battle effect change in the fluctuation related to the suspension after the predetermined fluctuation. I have. For example, as described above, the rate of reach, the rate of development to a battle after reach, and the expected degree of battle victory in a battle effect are higher when the shifted pattern arrangement is “777” than in “666”. ing. That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect C, a plurality of game indices such as a reach rate, a battle development rate, and a battle victory expectation degree are simultaneously indicated by one effect of displaying a shifted pattern arrangement.

[Decoration design suggestion effect D]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 71A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. In the decorative design variation effect shown in FIG. 68 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the reserved number of the first special symbol is “3” and the reserved number of the second special symbol is “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), a lower stage “6” symbol reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The lower stage “6” symbol reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped in the decorative symbol varying effect illustrated in FIG. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are provided with an upper line JL and a lower line GL as symbol arrangement lines, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop after a change and show a symbol array, two symbols are arranged. Stop at the same time, and stop horizontally after being aligned horizontally along the upper line JL and the lower line GL. That is, in the lower stage “6” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B), the symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two stages, and in this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are “57” in the upper line JL. “66” indicating the reach state is displayed on the lower line GL.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), a lower reach “6” symbol reach loss effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lower-level “6” symbol reach loss effect indicates that the result of the lower-level “6” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) is lost. In other words, in the lower-stage “6” symbol reach loss effect shown in FIG. 71 (C), the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped, and as a result of the change, a lost symbol array is shown in the upper and lower two columns. In the present example, in the lost symbol arrangement, “587” is shown in the upper line JL, and “676” indicating the reach loss state is shown in the lower line GL.

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 71 (B), a lower stage “7” symbol reach effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 71 (D). The lower stage “7” symbol reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped in the decorative symbol variation effect illustrated in FIG. That is, in the lower stage “7” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D), the symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two stages, and in this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are “67” in the upper line JL, “77” indicating the reach state is displayed on the lower line GL.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), on the display screen 7a, a “7” symbol jackpot determination effect is executed. The “7” symbol jackpot determination effect is an effect performed after the lower “7” symbol reach effect illustrated in FIG. 71 (D) is performed. The “7” symbol jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the lower “7” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) has a jackpot. In the “7” symbol jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 71 (E), the jackpot symbol array “777” is displayed alone (one step) substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. At the top, the characters "big hit!" Are displayed. With this “7” symbol jackpot determination effect, the player is convinced that the “7” symbol jackpot has been won.

  Furthermore, in place of FIGS. 71 (B) and 71 (D), an upper stage “8” symbol reach effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 71 (F). The upper-stage “8” symbol reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped in the decorative symbol varying effect illustrated in FIG. In other words, in the upper “8” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F), the symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two stages, and in this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R indicate the reach state in the upper line JL. “88” and “97” are displayed in the lower line GL.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), a “8” symbol jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The “8” symbol jackpot determination effect is an effect performed after the upper stage “8” symbol reach effect illustrated in FIG. 71 (F) is performed. The “8” symbol jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the upper “8” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) has a jackpot. In the “8” symbol jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 71 (G), the jackpot symbol array “888” is displayed alone (one step) substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. At the top, characters such as "big hit!" Are displayed. With this “8” symbol jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced that the “8” symbol jackpot has been won.

It should be noted that the lower “6” symbol reach production shown in FIG. 71 (C) is always performed even when the lower “6” symbol reach production shown in FIG. 71 (B) is performed. However, similarly to FIGS. 71 (E) and (G), there is a possibility that the “6” symbol jackpot determined effect is performed at a predetermined probability. Also, the above-mentioned “7” symbol jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 71 (E) is always performed even when the lower “7” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is performed. Instead, similarly to FIG. 71 (C), the lower-level “7” symbol reach loss effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability of the jackpot determination effect being performed is that the lower “7” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is performed as compared to the case where the lower “6” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) is performed. Is higher.
Also, the above-mentioned “8” symbol jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 71 (G) is always performed even when the upper stage “8” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) is performed. Instead, as in FIG. 71 (C), the upper stage “8” symbol reach loss effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Although illustration is omitted, even when a reach effect is performed on the upper line JL with a symbol other than the symbol “8”, a jackpot-determined effect is performed with a predetermined probability as in FIG. 71 (G). It may be possible. However, the probability of the jackpot confirmation effect being performed is that the upper stage “8” symbol reach effect illustrated in FIG. 71 (F) is performed compared to the case where the reach effect is performed on the upper line JL with a symbol other than the “8” symbol. Is higher.

  That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D shown in FIG. 71, in the predetermined fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a plurality of the left decorative symbols 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and a plurality of symbol arrangement lines (book In the example, the upper line JL and the lower line GL) can be displayed, and when a predetermined left decorative symbol 8L and a right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at a predetermined symbol array line among a plurality of symbol array lines (in this example, this example). , The upper line JL and the lower line GL with the symbol “77” are likely to be a big hit in the predetermined fluctuation. That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D, when a predetermined symbol arrangement line reaches the predetermined symbol arrangement, the jackpot expectation degree is high. In other words, in the case of a predetermined change in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, if the change is a big hit, a predetermined probability (a lottery using a random number or the like) is applied to a predetermined symbol array line as a big hit suggestion effect. Reach production is performed in a pattern arrangement.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern jackpot suggestion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, in the case of a predetermined change of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is stopped at a specified stop position, and the decorative symbol is shifted from the specified stop position and stopped. There is a configuration in which, when the vehicle stops at a deviation from the prescribed stop position, a jackpot is more likely to occur in the fluctuation relating to the hold after the predetermined fluctuation than when the vehicle stops at the prescribed stop position. According to this configuration, when any of the decorative symbols deviates from the prescribed stop position, the player can play the game with great expectation. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is also possible to associate the shifted decorative pattern with the jackpot expectation degree and change the jackpot expectation degree according to the type of the shifted decorative pattern.

[Effect 2]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, and stops the decorative symbol at a predetermined stop position. When the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are stopped in a line, and when the decorative symbol is shifted from a predetermined stop position and stopped, the first decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol are stopped. Any one of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol is shifted from one line and stopped. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbol is shifted from the prescribed stop position and stopped, it is possible to display the decorative symbol in a variety of modes in a manner that is easy for the player to understand. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68 to FIG. 70, a plurality of types of effect effects can be executed in connection with the stop of the decorative symbol, and the rate of giving the jackpot to the player depends on the effect effect. The configuration changes according to the type. According to this configuration, the player is delighted every time an effect effect is performed, and can start a game with great expectation when an effect effect with a high jackpot expectation is performed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a third decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern is a third decorative pattern. It is possible to stop after the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and to stop a plurality of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol and to display a plurality of symbol array lines simultaneously at a predetermined change of the decorative symbol. When a predetermined first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol stop at a predetermined symbol array line among the plurality of symbol array lines, the configuration is such that the predetermined variation easily causes a big hit. According to this configuration, when the predetermined first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped on the predetermined symbol array line, the jackpot expectation increases, and the player stops after that. While the decorative patterns are changing, it is possible to watch while maintaining great expectations. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, a plurality of symbol arrangement lines are displayed in a step shape, and a first decorative symbol is provided in a predetermined stage of the plurality of symbol arrangement lines displayed in a step shape. Also, when the second decorative symbol stops and reaches the predetermined symbol arrangement, a big hit is likely to occur in the predetermined variation. According to this configuration, when the player reaches the predetermined symbol arrangement on the symbol arrangement line of the predetermined stage, the jackpot expectation becomes extremely high, and then the player stops changing during the fluctuation of the third decorative symbol. You can watch while maintaining great expectations. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. Further, it is also possible to associate the reach symbol and the jackpot expectation degree in the symbol arrangement line of the predetermined stage and change the jackpot expectation degree depending on the type of the reach symbol.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, two stages of the upper line JL and the lower line GL are shown as the prescribed stop positions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is not limited to this. For example, the prescribed stop positions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be three steps of an upper line, a middle line, and a lower line, or four or more steps. Further, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are horizontally scrolled, a plurality of vertical lines (left line, middle line, right line) in the left-right direction may be set as the predetermined stop positions.
Also, as shown in FIG. 71, the symbol arrangement line shows two lines of the upper line JL and the lower line GL, but similarly to the above-mentioned prescribed stop position, three lines of the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, and the like. , Four or more lines above and below. Further, if there are three or more symbol arrangement lines, a diagonal symbol arrangement line may be additionally provided (for example, in the case of three upper and lower lines, two oblique symbols of upward and downward diagonal). Sequence line). Further, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are horizontally scrolled, a plurality of vertical symbol array lines (for example, left symbol array line, middle symbol array line, right symbol array line) are provided in the left-right direction. It may be.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68 to FIG. 70, the symbol arrangement in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shifted from the predetermined stop position and stopped is as follows. Although the symbol arrangement is a jackpot symbol arrangement, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol array that is shifted from the specified stop position and stopped may be a symbol array of a specific irregularity or reach. Furthermore, if the symbol array that is shifted and stopped is a symbol array that becomes a jackpot symbol array if it is stopped at the specified stop position, if it becomes a jackpot later in the hold, the symbol array that has shifted and stopped is The big hit symbol array may be displayed in the same symbol array. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest not only a jackpot but also a jackpot symbol array, and as a result, the player can determine in advance whether or not the current jackpot is a probable jackpot.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are shifted from the predetermined stop positions and stopped, the effect using the color of the blue effect effect or the red effect is performed. The jackpot rate is changed depending on the type of the effect presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect effect may use three or more colors, and the jackpot giving rate may be changed depending on the difference between these colors. Alternatively, in the effect effect, a plurality of types of characters may be used instead of colors, and the jackpot giving rate may be changed depending on the type of these characters. Of course, effect effects may be performed using both colors and characters. Furthermore, in the effect production, a blue effect image imitating water droplets and a red effect image imitating flame were used, but these water droplets and flames are not particularly limited, and the effect image is any image. (However, an image that makes a specific color felt is desirable).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are shifted from the predetermined stop positions and stopped, a battle effect is performed with a predetermined probability, and the result of the battle effect Although a jackpot suggestion was made, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a story effect may be performed in place of the battle effect, and a jackpot may be suggested based on the content of the story effect. In this case, depending on the type of the misaligned symbol arrangement, the rate of reaching in the subsequent reservation, the rate of development to the story effect after reach, and the content (expected jackpot) in the story effect may be changed. With this configuration, a single effect of displaying a shifted pattern arrangement simultaneously suggests a plurality of game indicators such as a reach rate in a subsequent hold, a story effect development rate, and a jackpot expectation degree in the story effect. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a left decorative symbol 8L and a right decorative symbol are assigned to a predetermined symbol array line among a plurality of symbol array lines. When the predetermined reach symbol is displayed when the 8R stops and the predetermined reach symbol is displayed, it is suggested that the predetermined fluctuation is likely to be a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at a predetermined symbol array line and a specific variation other than the reach is displayed, the predetermined variation may indicate that it is likely to be a big hit. Good. Then, in this case, after the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at the irregular pattern, immediately perform a so-called pseudo-run in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are changed again, and thereafter, the left decorative symbol 8L and the predetermined decorative symbol are arranged in a predetermined symbol array line. The right decorative symbol 8R may be stopped to display a predetermined reach symbol. With this configuration, the interest in the game can be further improved.
Note that the pseudo-ream is an effect that makes the decorative symbol fluctuately appear as if it has been displayed for a predetermined number of times in a pseudo manner, and is an effect that can be executed at the start of a change or during a reach effect. For example, the pseudo-ren is an effect that repeats an effect of starting to fluctuate and temporarily stop the decoration symbol, an effect of repeatedly stopping an effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of a predetermined symbol arrangement of the decoration symbol, and a predetermined logo (eg, NEXT). An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping, or an effect that executes a fluctuating effect of a decorative symbol, together with a display such as “× 2”, “× 3”, or “pseudo”, which is associated with a pseudo-run. The number of repeated effects is also referred to as the number of pseudo-runs, and if it is two times, it may be represented as “pseudo 2”, “× 2”, and if it is three times, it may be represented as “pseudo 3”, “× 3”.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A6-1]
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
A decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means,
A gaming machine with
In the predetermined change of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display means, there are cases where the decorative symbol is stopped at a specified stop position, and cases where the decorative symbol is shifted from a specified stop position and stopped,
When the vehicle is shifted from the prescribed stop position and stopped, it is easier to give a benefit that is advantageous to the player in a change related to the hold after the predetermined change than when stopped at the prescribed stop position.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A6-2]
The decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a third decorative pattern,
The decorative pattern display means,
When stopping the decorative pattern at the specified stop position, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are stopped in a line,
When the decorative symbol is shifted from the predetermined stop position and stopped, any one of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol is shifted from the one row and stopped. ,
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-1.
[Aspect A6-3]
A display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means, as one of the plurality of display effects, can execute a plurality of types of effect effects related to the stop of the decorative design,
The grant rate of the advantageous privilege to the player varies depending on the type of the effect effect,
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2.
[Aspect A6-4]
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
A decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means,
A gaming machine with
The decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a third decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern is more than the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. Shall stop later,
The decorative symbol display means can display a plurality of symbol arrangement lines simultaneously by stopping a plurality of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in a predetermined change,
When the predetermined first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at a predetermined symbol array line among the plurality of symbol array lines, a benefit advantageous to the player in the predetermined variation is given. Cheap,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A6-5]
The plurality of symbol arrangement lines are displayed in a stepped manner,
When the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at a predetermined stage of the plurality of symbol arrangement lines displayed in a stepped manner and reach the predetermined symbol arrangement, the predetermined variation In, it is easy to be given a benefit that is advantageous to the player,
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4, wherein:

  The decorative symbol superimposition effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. This decorative symbol superimposition effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the decorative symbol superimposition effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative design superimposition effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol superimposition effect A. In the decorative pattern superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), during the variable effect, a decorative pattern non-display effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. Be executed. The decorative symbol non-display effect is the same as the decorative symbol disappearance effect of the decorative symbol change effect A shown in FIG. That is, the effects of the decorative symbol variation effect A shown in FIGS. 48A to 48I may be performed before the decorative symbol non-display effect of FIG. 72A. In the decorative pattern non-display effect of FIG. 72 (A), only the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed, and even if any other image is displayed. Good. For example, any special reach production may be performed.

  Next, a decorative symbol enlarged display effect shown in FIG. 72 (B) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R partially protrude from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. It is displayed overlapping a part. Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), a jackpot image superimposed display effect is executed. Specifically, the first jackpot image MF1 is displayed overlapping the left decorative symbol 8L, the second jackpot image MF2 is displayed overlapping the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the third jackpot image MF3 is overlapping the right decorative symbol 8R. Is displayed. Each of the first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 is an image in which “jackpot” is written, and is a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative. This suggests that the jackpot is a combination of the symbol 8R. The middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first big hit image MF1, and the middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the third big hit image MF3.

  Next, a decorative design reduction display effect shown in FIG. 72 (D) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first big hit image MF1, the second big hit image MF2, and the third big hit image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. By this reduction, the middle decoration pattern 8C does not overlap the first big hit image MF1, and the middle decoration pattern 8C does not overlap the third big hit image MF3. In other words, by transiting from FIG. 72 (C) to FIG. 72 (D), the state in which the middle decorative pattern 8C overlaps the first big hit image MF1 is changed to the state in which the middle decorative pattern 8C does not overlap the first big hit image MF1. The state transitions from the state where the middle decorative pattern 8C overlaps the third big hit image MF3 to the state where the middle decorative pattern 8C does not overlap the third big hit image MF3.

  Next, a special jackpot image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 72 (E) is executed. Specifically, the first special jackpot image MS1 is displayed overlapping the first jackpot image MF1, the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping the second jackpot image MF2, and the third special jackpot image MF3 is displayed third. The jackpot images MS3 are displayed in an overlapping manner. Each of the first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 is an image written as "special jackpot", and is a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, And, it is suggested that the jackpot combined with the right decorative pattern 8R is special, that is, the jackpot is a probable jackpot. In other words, the first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 indicate the jackpot type. The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping a part of the first special jackpot image MS1, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping a part of the third special jackpot image MS3. The first special jackpot image MS1 is displayed so as to overlap a portion of the first jackpot image MF1 so as to be visible, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed such that a portion of the second jackpot image MF2 is visible. The third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed so as to be overlapped so that a part of the third jackpot image MF3 can be visually recognized.

[Decorative design superimposition effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol superimposition effect B. The decorative symbol superimposition effect B is different from the decorative symbol superimposition effect A in the timing at which the big hit images MF1 to MF3 are displayed. The decorative symbol non-display effect of FIG. 73 (A) is the same as FIG. 72 (A) of the decorative symbol superimposition effect A. Next, a jackpot image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 73 (B) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are newly displayed from a state where they are not displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the first jackpot image MF1 is already displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L, the second jackpot image MF2 is displayed on the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the third jackpot image MF3 is displayed on the right decorative symbol 8R. Is displayed. Each of the first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 is an image in which “jackpot” is written, and is a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative. This indicates that the jackpot is a combination of the symbol 8R. The middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first big hit image MF1, and the middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the third big hit image MF3.

  Next, a decorative design reduction display effect shown in FIG. 73 (C) is executed. The decorative symbol reduced display effect of FIG. 73 (C) is the same as FIG. 72 (D) of the decorative symbol superimposed effect A. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first big hit image MF1, the second big hit image MF2, and the third big hit image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. By this reduction, the middle decoration pattern 8C does not overlap the first big hit image MF1, and the middle decoration pattern 8C does not overlap the third big hit image MF3.

  Next, a special jackpot image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 73 (D) is executed. The special jackpot image superimposed display effect of FIG. 73 (D) is the same as the decorative symbol superimposed effect A of FIG. 72 (E). Specifically, the first special jackpot image MS1 is displayed overlapping the first jackpot image MF1, the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping the second jackpot image MF2, and the third special jackpot image MF3 is displayed third. The jackpot images MS3 are displayed in an overlapping manner. Each of the first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 is an image written as "special jackpot", and is a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, And, it is suggested that the jackpot combined with the right decorative pattern 8R is special, that is, the jackpot is a probable jackpot. The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping a part of the first special jackpot image MS1, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping a part of the third special jackpot image MS3.

[Decoration design superimposition effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for describing decorative symbol superimposition effect C. The decorative symbol superimposition effect C differs from the decorative symbol superimposition effect A in the contents of the images MF1 to MF3 and the images MS1 to MS3. The decorative symbol non-display effect of FIG. 74 (A) is the same as FIG. 72 (A) of the decorative symbol superimposition effect A. The decorative symbol enlarged display effect of FIG. 74 (B) is the same as FIG. 72 (B) of the decorative symbol superimposed effect A.

  Next, a predetermined image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 74 (C) is executed. Specifically, the first image MF1 is displayed so as to overlap the left decorative symbol 8L, the second image MF2 is displayed so as to overlap the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the third image MF3 is displayed so as to overlap the right decorative symbol 8R. . Each of the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 is an image in which “HELLO” is written. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first image MF1, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the third image MF3.

  Next, the decorative design reduction display effect shown in FIG. 74 (D) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. Due to this reduction, the middle decorative pattern 8C does not overlap the first image MF1, and the middle decorative pattern 8C does not overlap the third image MF3. That is, by making a transition from FIG. 74 (C) to FIG. 74 (D), a state where the middle decorative pattern 8C overlaps the first image MF1 to a state where the middle decorative pattern 8C does not overlap the first image MF1. Then, the state is shifted from the state in which the middle decoration pattern 8C overlaps the third image MF3 to the state in which the middle decoration pattern 8C does not overlap the third image MF3.

  Next, a special jackpot image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 74 (E) is executed. Specifically, the special jackpot image MS is displayed so as to overlap the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3. The special jackpot image MS is an image in which "special jackpot" is written, and the jackpot in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are combined is special, that is, the probability variable jackpot. Suggest that. In other words, the special jackpot image MS indicates the jackpot type. The special jackpot image MS is displayed in an overlapping manner so that a part of each of the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 can be visually recognized.

[Decoration design superimposition effect D]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect D. The decorative symbol superimposition effect D differs from the decorative symbol superimposition effect A in the contents of the images MF1 to MF3 and the images MS1 to MS3 and in the display conditions. First, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), a state is displayed in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at a loss during the fluctuation effect. Next, a suggested image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 75 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first suggestion image MF1 is displayed so as to overlap the left decorative symbol 8L, the second suggestion image MF2 is displayed so as to overlap the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the third suggestion image MF3 is overlapped with the right decorative symbol 8R. Is displayed. The first suggestion image MF1, the second suggestion image MF2, and the third suggestion image MF3 are images in which "Hello!", "No way!", "!!!" It is suggested that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may not be the final display yet. In addition, the middle decorative design 8C may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the first suggestion image MF1, or may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the third suggestion image MF3.

  Next, a special suggestion image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 75 (C) is executed. Specifically, the special suggestion image MS is displayed overlapping the first suggestion image MF1, the second suggestion image MF2, and the third suggestion image MF3. The special suggestion image MS is an image in which “No way !!!!” is written, and the possibility that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R during the temporary stop display are not the final display is increased. Suggest that. In other words, the special suggestion image MS suggests the start of the pseudo continuous production and suggests that the degree of expectation of the jackpot has increased. The special suggestion image MS is displayed so as to overlap each part of the first suggestion image MF1, the second suggestion image MF2, and the third suggestion image MF3 so as to be visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the temporary stop display are variably displayed again, and a pseudo continuous effect is executed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative design superimposition effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the first jackpot image MF1 is displayed overlapping the left decorative symbol 8L, and the second jackpot image MF2 is displayed overlapping the middle decorative symbol 8C. A first effect in which the third jackpot image MF3 is displayed so as to overlap the right decorative symbol 8R, and after the first effect, a first special jackpot image MS1 is overlapped with the first jackpot image MF1, and the second effect is displayed. A second effect in which the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so as to overlap the jackpot image MF2 and the third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed so as to overlap the third jackpot image MF3 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (C) and FIG. 73 (C), in the first effect, after the middle decoration symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap the third big hit image MF3, As shown in FIG. 72 (D) and FIG. 73 (D), a transition is made to a state where the middle decorative pattern 8C does not overlap the third big hit image MF3. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (C) and FIG. 73 (C), in the first effect, the middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed so as to overlap the first big hit image MF1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (E) and FIG. 73 (E), in the second effect, the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so as to overlap the first special jackpot image MS1, The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so as to overlap the third special jackpot image MS3. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (E) and FIG. 73 (E), in the second effect, the first special jackpot is set so that a part of the first jackpot image MF1 becomes visible. The second special jackpot image MS2 is overlapped so that the image MS1 is displayed overlapping and a portion of the second jackpot image MF2 is visible, and a portion of the third jackpot image MF3 is visible. The third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed overlapping. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (E) and FIG. 73 (E), in the second effect, a combination of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Indicates a jackpot, and the first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 indicate a jackpot type. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the decorative symbol superimposition effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
72B to 72E, images other than the images exemplified above may be included. For example, in FIG. 72 (B) to FIG. 48 (E), a right-handed image or the like may be displayed in addition to the decorative pattern. The same applies to FIGS. 73 and 74.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image having the same content as the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image having the same content as the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image having contents different from the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fifth image having the same content as the fourth image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a sixth image having the same content as the fourth image,
The first image is displayed so as to overlap the first decorative pattern, the second image is displayed so as to overlap the second decorative pattern, and the third image is displayed so as to overlap the third decorative pattern. The first production displayed as
After the first effect, the fourth image is displayed so as to overlap the first image, the fifth image is displayed so as to overlap the second image, and the third image is displayed so as to overlap the third image. A second effect in which the sixth image is displayed in an overlapping manner.
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-1,
In the first effect, after the second decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap the third image, a transition is made to a state in which the second decorative symbol does not overlap the third image. Gaming machine to do.
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-1 or Aspect A7-2,
In the first effect, the second decorative pattern is displayed so as to overlap the first image.
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-3,
In the second effect, the fifth image is displayed so as to overlap the fourth image, and the fifth image is displayed so as to overlap the sixth image.
◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspect A7-1 or aspect A7-4,
In the second effect, the fourth image is superimposed and displayed so that a part of the first image is visible, and the fourth image is displayed so that a part of the second image is visible. 5. A gaming machine, wherein the fifth image is displayed so as to overlap, and the sixth image is displayed so as to overlap a part of the third image.
◇ [Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5,
In the second effect, the combination of the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern indicates a jackpot, and the fourth image and the fifth And the sixth image suggests a jackpot type.

  The jackpot background display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This jackpot background display effect can be executed during a change effect of a decorative symbol, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the jackpot background display effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Big hit background display effect A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for describing the jackpot background display effect A.
The jackpot background display effect A is an effect executed when the jackpot symbol array is displayed after the reach effect. In the big hit background display effect A, first, a big hit effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. In the big hit effect 1, the background image HK1 and the big hit symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which an ally character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The big hit symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the zigzag pattern of the "6" symbol. The big hit symbol array A81 is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol arrangement of the “6” symbol is a jackpot symbol array in which it is impossible to determine whether the game state after the jackpot game is the normal state or the probable change state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), a big hit effect 2 is executed. In the big hit effect 2, the background image HK2 (cross hatch portion) is displayed as the background image of the big hit symbol array A81. The big hit symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2, and is displayed on the nearer side (front side) than the background image HK2. Further, the background image HK2 is arranged in the background image HK1, and is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), a big hit effect 3 is executed. In the big hit effect 3, the big hit symbol array A81 changes again on the background image HK2.
Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), a big hit effect 4 is executed. In the big hit effect 4, the big hit symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form the "7" symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of the jackpot effect 2, and is a jackpot symbol array that indicates that the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a probable change state.

  Note that the jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2 and suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot is in a stable state. The jackpot symbol array is not limited to this, but may be the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2.

[Big hit background display effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for describing the big hit background display effect B.
The jackpot background display effect B is an effect executed when the jackpot symbol array is displayed after the reach effect. In the big hit background display effect B, first, a big hit effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. 77 (A). In the big hit effect 1, the background image HK1 and the big hit symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which an ally character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The big hit symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the zigzag pattern of the "6" symbol. The big hit symbol array A81 is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol arrangement of the “6” symbol is a jackpot symbol array in which it is impossible to determine whether the game state after the jackpot game is the normal state or the probable change state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), a jackpot effect 2 is executed. In the big hit effect 2, the background image HK2 (cross hatch portion) is displayed as the background image of the big hit symbol array A81. The big hit symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2, and is displayed on the nearer side (front side) than the background image HK2. Further, the background image HK2 is arranged in the background image HK1, and is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, a boundary line KL is displayed at a boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), a big hit effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 changes again on the background image HK2. Also, in the big hit effect 3, the button image BTN is displayed. The button image BTN is arranged on the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 (on the boundary line KL). The button image BTN is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), a jackpot effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2 when the player presses the effect button 63. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form the "7" symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of the jackpot effect 2, and is a jackpot symbol array that indicates that the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a probable change state.

  Note that the jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2 and suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot is in a stable state. The jackpot symbol array is not limited to this, but may be the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2.

[Big hit background display effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for describing the big hit background display effect C.
The big hit background display effect C is an effect that is executed when the big hit symbol array is displayed after the reach effect. In the big hit background display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), a big hit effect 1 is executed. In the big hit effect 1, the background image HK1 and the big hit symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which an ally character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The big hit symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the zigzag pattern of the "6" symbol. The big hit symbol array A81 is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol arrangement of the “6” symbol is a jackpot symbol array in which it is impossible to determine whether the game state after the jackpot game is the normal state or the probable change state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), a jackpot effect 2 is executed. In the big hit effect 2, the background image HK2 (cross hatch portion) is displayed as the background image of the big hit symbol array A81. The big hit symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2, and is displayed on the nearer side (front side) than the background image HK2. Further, the background image HK2 is arranged in the background image HK1, and is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, a boundary line KL is displayed at a boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is larger than the size of the background image HK1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), a big hit effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 changes again on the background image HK2. Also, in the big hit effect 3, the button image BTN is displayed. The button image BTN is arranged on the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 (on the boundary line KL). The button image BTN is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), a big hit effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2 when the player presses the effect button 63. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form the "7" symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of the jackpot effect 2, and is a jackpot symbol array that indicates that the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a probable change state.

  Note that the jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2 and suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot is in a stable state. The jackpot symbol array is not limited to this, but may be the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2.

[Big hit background display effect D]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for describing the jackpot background display effect D.
The jackpot background display effect D is an effect executed when the jackpot symbol array is displayed after the reach effect. In the big hit background display effect B, first, a big hit effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. 79 (A). In the big hit effect 1, the background image HK1 and the big hit symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which an ally character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The big hit symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the zigzag pattern of the "6" symbol. The big hit symbol array A81 is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol arrangement of the “6” symbol is a jackpot symbol array in which it is impossible to determine whether the game state after the jackpot game is the normal state or the probable change state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), a big hit effect 2 is executed. In the big hit effect 2, the background image HK2 (cross hatch portion) is displayed as the background image of the big hit symbol array A81. The big hit symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2, and is displayed on the nearer side (front side) than the background image HK2. Further, the background image HK2 is arranged in the background image HK1, and is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, a boundary line KL is displayed at a boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), a big hit effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 changes again on the background image HK2. Also, in the big hit effect 3, the button image BTN is displayed. The button image BTN is arranged on the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 (on the boundary line KL). The button image BTN is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), a big hit effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2 when the player presses the effect button 63. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form the "7" symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of the jackpot effect 2, and is a jackpot symbol array that indicates that the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a probable change state.

  Note that the jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2 and suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot is in a stable state. The jackpot symbol array is not limited to this, but may be the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), a jackpot effect 5 is executed. In the big hit effect 5, the background image HK2 is deleted, and the big hit symbol array A81 is displayed on the background image HK1. The big hit symbol array A81 is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. In the big hit symbol array A81, the display position moves to the center of the display screen 7a, and is displayed larger than in the case of the big hit effect 4.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the jackpot background display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect, the background image HK1 is displayed, and when the background image HK1 is displayed, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed, and the jackpot symbol array A81 includes the background image HK1. , The background image HK2 is displayed when the background image HK1 is displayed after the display of the jackpot symbol array A81, and the background image HK2 is displayed in front of the background image HK1. And the background image HK2 is displayed, the big hit symbol array A81 is displayed, and the big hit symbol array A81 is displayed in front of the background image HK2. According to this configuration, at the time of the big hit, since the background image HK2 is displayed in front of the background image HK1 and the big hit symbol array A81 is displayed in front of this background image HK2, a predetermined effect is produced in the background image HK1. While performing, the big hit symbol array A81 can be emphasized. Therefore, the player can enjoy the joy of the jackpot symbol array A81 while enjoying the effect in the background image HK1. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the big hit background display effect, the boundary line KL is provided between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. According to this configuration, since the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 is clear, the player can clarify the division between the effect performed in the background image HK1 and the display of the big hit symbol array A81. it can. Therefore, the player can enjoy the joy of the jackpot symbol array A81 while enjoying the effect in the background image HK1. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the big hit background display effects A, B, and D, the size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1. According to this configuration, even when the big hit symbol array A81 is displayed, the predetermined effect in the background image HK1 can be meaningfully enjoyed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect, the jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 2 is a jackpot symbol array in which it is impossible to determine whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a probable change state. The jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2 and suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be in a stable state. It is a big hit symbol array to do. The jackpot pattern arrangement A81 for both the jackpot effect 2 and the jackpot effect 4 is performed in an area in which the background image HK2 is displayed in front of the background image HK2. According to this configuration, the re-lottery effect of changing from the jackpot symbol array that suggests that the player is relatively disadvantageous to the jackpot symbol array that suggests that the player is relatively advantageous is provided before the background image HK1. Since the displayed background image HK2 can be executed as a background, the re-lottery effect can be impressed on the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect D, after the re-lottery effect, the background image HK2 is deleted, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the background image HK1. The big hit symbol array A81 is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. According to this configuration, the big hit symbol array A81 can be further emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect, the jackpot symbol arrangement A81 in the jackpot effect 1 and the jackpot effect 2 is a symbol array using the same symbol. According to this configuration, the big hit symbol array A81 can be further emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the decorative symbol variation effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the jackpot background display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol arrangement A81 may be different between the jackpot effect 1 and the jackpot effect 2.

[Modification 2]
In the jackpot background display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the position of the background image HK2 may be at the upper left, lower left, lower right, or middle of the background image HK1. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a display device different from the image display device 7. Then, the background image HK1 may be displayed on a display device different from the image display device 7, and the background image HK2 may be displayed on the display device.

[Modification 3]
In the big hit background display effect B of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image BTN may have a plurality of display modes (for example, colors and patterns). In this case, the jackpot expectation may differ depending on the display mode of the button image BTN. Further, when the button image BTN is displayed, the effect button 63 may be illuminated in a plurality of patterns. In this case, the jackpot expectation may be changed depending on how the effect button 63 is illuminated.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A8-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect for displaying a first background image,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a first jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot,
The third display effect is an effect for displaying a second background image,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot,
A combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and the first jackpot in the second display effect is performed. The symbol array is displayed in front of the first background image of the first display effect, and after the second display effect has been performed and the first display effect has been performed. The third display effect is performed, and the second background image in the third display effect is arranged before the first background image in the first display effect, and the third display effect is provided. Is performed, the fourth display effect is performed, and the second jackpot symbol array in the fourth display effect is located in front of the second background image of the third display effect. Is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A8-1,
When the second background image is arranged before the first background image, a predetermined line is arranged at a boundary between the second background image and the first background image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A8-2,
When the second background image is arranged in the first background image, an area where the second background image is displayed is smaller than an area where the first background image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A8-3,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of changing the second jackpot symbol array to a third jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot,
The jackpot represented by the third jackpot symbol array is a jackpot more advantageous to the player than the jackpot represented by the second jackpot symbol array,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect is an area in which the second background image of the third display effect is displayed. Performed in
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A8-4,
In the combination effect, the display of the second background image in the third display effect is terminated after the fifth display effect, and thereafter, the third jackpot symbol array is displayed on the first background image. Displayed in the foreground,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect A8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 5,
The first jackpot symbol array and the second jackpot symbol array are the same symbol array,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The multiple timer effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This multiple-timer effect can be executed, for example, during a fluctuation effect of a decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the multiple timer effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Multi-timer effect A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for describing the multiple timer effect A. The timer effects from FIG. 80 (A) to FIG. 80 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the multiple timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), a variable effect of a decorative symbol is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, a timer image display effect shown in FIG. 80 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol change effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, “ 01 "to" 99 "seconds). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, a random number display / countdown effect shown in FIGS. 80 (C) and 80 (D) is executed. Specifically, “30” is displayed on the first timer TM1 at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), and a random number is displayed. Here, the random number display means that numerical values between “00” and “99” are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1.

  After the random number display / countdown effect has been executed for a while, as shown in FIG. 80 (E), the countdown of the second timer TM2 is started (started). When the second timer TM2 starts, a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 is displayed. Here, in a state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 is displaying "28", the second timer TM2 displays "10" as the remaining period after displaying the random number, and then starts counting down. You. When the second timer TM2 starts counting down, the switching speed of the numerical value is reduced. Thereby, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the second timer TM2 starts counting down (after starting), for a while, as shown in FIG. 80 (F), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 executes a countdown (double countdown effect) ). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 80 (H). In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and the first expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 80 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and the second timer “1” is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expected degree suggestion image EI2 displays a content having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first expected degree suggested image EI1.

[Multi-timer effect B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for describing the multiple timer effect B. The multiple timer effect B differs from the multiple timer effect A in the number of timer images displayed and the number of digital digits to be displayed. The timer effects from FIG. 81 (A) to FIG. 81 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the multiple timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the first timer TM1 is displayed in a state in which the decorative symbol variable effect is executed. Here, the first timer TM1 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period (here, “001” to “999”) until reaching a certain point in time is counted down. In seconds). When the first timer TM1 is displayed, “100” is displayed as the remaining period, and then the countdown is started (started). Note that, as in the case of the multiple timer effect A, the certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the certain point in time is reached, it is not always necessary for some display change to occur. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the second timer TM2 is displayed while the first timer TM1 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a timer image of a three-digit digital display. When the first timer TM1 is displayed, it is not started (countdown is not started), and a random number is displayed. Here, the random number display means that numerical values between "000" and "999" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. The countdown of the first timer TM1 is continuing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the third timer TM3 is displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed. The third timer TM3 is a timer image of a three-digit digital display, and displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 is displaying "86", the remaining period of the second timer TM2 is displayed as "60", and the countdown is started (started). Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the countdown of the second timer TM2 is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is started, a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 and the third timer TM3 is displayed. Here, in a state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 indicates "55" and the remaining period of the third timer IM3 indicates "55", the second timer TM2 sets the remaining period after displaying the random number. Is displayed as the period of, and then a countdown is started. When the second timer TM2 starts counting down, the switching speed of the numerical value is reduced. Thereby, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After each of the three timers TM1 to TM3 performs countdown, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, as shown in FIG. 81 (F). , A first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and the first expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0” as shown in FIG. 81 (G), a third expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 81 (H). In the third expectation effect suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed in the same manner as the first expectation effect effect effect. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the display of the third timer TM3 disappears and the third heat TM is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image EI3 is displayed. Here, the third expectation suggestion image EI3 displays a content with a higher jackpot expectation than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 81 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first and third expectation degree suggestion effects. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and the second timer “1” is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expectation suggestion image EI2 displays a content with a higher jackpot expectation than the first expectation suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation suggestion image EI3.

[Multi-timer effect C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for describing the multiple timer effect C. The multiple timer effect C differs from the multiple timer effect A in the configuration of the timer image and the display content of the timer image before starting. The timer effects from FIG. 82 (A) to FIG. 82 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the multiple timer effect C, first, a timer image display effect shown in FIG. 82A is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol change effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 have a frame image formed around a two-digit digital display, and have “ON” or “OFF” display beside the frame image. The second timer TM2 has a mode in which the shutter is closed and the digital display cannot be seen. “ON” and “OFF” shown beside each frame image of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate whether or not the shutter is open. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 display the remaining period (here, the number of seconds from “01” to “99”) until reaching a certain point in time by countdown. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B) and FIG. 82 (C), a first timer countdown effect is executed. Specifically, “30” is displayed on the first timer TM1 at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 has not been started during the display (the countdown has not been started), and the shutter is closed. Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), when the shutter of the second timer TM2 is opened, the digital display indicating "10" becomes visible. That is, a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), the second timer TM2 countdown is started (started).

  After the second timer TM2 starts counting down (after starting), for a while, as shown in FIG. 82 (F), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 executes a countdown (double countdown effect) ). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 82 (H). In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and the first expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 82 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and the second timer “1” is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expected degree suggestion image EI2 displays a content having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first expected degree suggested image EI1.

[Multi timer effect D]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for describing the multiple timer effect D. The multiple timer effect D is different from the multiple timer effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects from FIG. 83 (A) to FIG. 83 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the multiple timer effect D, first, a timer image display effect shown in FIG. 83A is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol change effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are bar-shaped meters, and represent a remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate that the remaining period of the meter decreases as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and that a certain point of time is reached when the remaining amount of the meter is exhausted (zero). Suggests. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), a first timer start effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed in a state where the meter is full, and thereafter, the decrease of the remaining meter is started (started). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started at the time of display, and the meter does not decrease. Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the third timer TM3 is displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed. The third timer TM3 is a bar-shaped meter and represents a remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. When the third timer TM3 is displayed, a remaining amount smaller than the remaining amount of the meter of the first timer TM1 is displayed. Then, the meter remaining amount starts decreasing. Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the second timer TM2 starts. That is, the decrease in the meter remaining amount of the second timer TM2 is started. Immediately after the start, the second timer TM2 displays a remaining amount smaller than the meter remaining amount of the first timer TM1 and larger than the remaining meter amount of the third timer TM3. Then, the meter remaining amount starts decreasing. After a while, the meter remaining amount decreases in each of the three timers. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the third timer TM3 becomes zero, a third expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (F). In the third degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the third timer TM3 becomes zero, the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. The 3 expectation suggestion image EI3 is displayed.

  Next, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero as shown in FIG. 83 (G), a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (H). . In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and "Heat !!" is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed. Here, the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 displays a content with a higher jackpot expectation degree than the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, a second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (J). . In the second degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and "extra hot!" Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expectation suggestion image EI2 displays a content with a higher jackpot expectation than the first expectation suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation suggestion image EI3.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the multiple timer effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (B) (C), 81 (B) (C), 82 (B) (C), and 83 (B) (C), A first effect in which the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed on the screen 7a, and the first timer TM1 is started while the second timer TM2 is not started, and FIG. 80 (D) As shown in FIG. 81 (D), FIG. 82 (D), and FIG. 83 (D), after the first effect, the second timer TM2 starts, and the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. And a second effect in which the second timer TM2 displays a shorter period of time than the remaining period. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (B) (C), 81 (B) (C), and FIGS. 82 (B) (C), in the first effect, the second timer TM2 Indicates a random number on a digital display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (G) (H), 81 (G) (H), 82 (G) (H), and 83 (G) (H), After the effect of No. 2, while the first timer TM1 is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 is exhausted, and the first expectation degree is displayed at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. A third effect in which the suggestion image EI1 is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (I) (J), 81 (I) (J), 82 (I) (J), and 83 (I) (J), After the effect of 3, the fourth effect in which the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 is gone and the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed may be executed. it can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (H) (J), 81 (H) (J), 82 (H) (J), and 83 (H) (J), The first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect are executed during the fluctuation effect, and include a first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 and a second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is a suggestion image indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (H) (J), 81 (H) (J), 82 (H) (J), and 83 (H) (J), The jackpot expectation level indicated by the second expectation level suggestion image EI2 may be higher than the jackpot expectation level indicated by the first expectation level suggestion image EI1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the multiple timer effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80 (J)), the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays a content with a higher jackpot expectation than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1. However, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 may display a content having a lower jackpot expectation degree than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1, or may display the same expectation degree. In FIG. 81 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays a content with a higher jackpot expectation than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation degree suggestion image EI31. . However, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 may display a content having a lower jackpot expectation than at least one of the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3, or may have the same expectation degree. The content may be displayed.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 becomes “0”, the expected degree suggestion images EI1 and EI2 are displayed. However, an image other than the expected degree suggestion image may be displayed. For example, an operation unit image may be displayed, or an image in which a decorative symbol during variable display is stopped and displayed may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80B), the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. However, the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 may be the same as or slower than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. Further, the second timer TM2 may not be displayed with a random number but stopped in a state where a specific numerical value is displayed.
[Modification 4]
As described above (for example, FIG. 80), the timer may include not only a portion that changes over time (for example, a digital display portion) but also other image elements. For example, the timer may be an image digitally displayed in the middle of the triangle image. In this case, the triangle image portion also corresponds to the timer. Further, an image in which the digital display portion is temporarily difficult to visually recognize also corresponds to the timer.
[Modification 5]
In the above-described timer speed effect, the timer effect is executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). However, the above-described timer speed effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating a remaining period until a certain point in time is reached,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer that indicates a remaining period until a certain time point is reached,
A first effect in which the first timer and the second timer are displayed on the display means, and the first timer is started in a state where the second timer is not started;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the second timer is started and the second timer displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the first timer. A gaming machine capable of executing
◇ [Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The second timer indicates the remaining period by a digital display countdown,
In the first effect, the second timer displays a random number on the digital display.
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B1-1 or Aspect B1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first predetermined image,
After the second effect, in a state where the first timer indicates the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the second timer runs out, and the position where the second timer is displayed is displayed. A game machine capable of executing a third effect in which the first predetermined image is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second predetermined image,
After the third effect, the remaining period indicated by the first timer runs out, and a fourth effect in which the second predetermined image is displayed at the position where the first timer was displayed is executed. A gaming machine characterized by what is possible.
◇ [Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-4,
The first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect are executed during a variable effect,
The gaming machine, wherein the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are suggestion images indicating a jackpot expectation degree.
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5,
A gaming machine, wherein the jackpot expected by the second predetermined image may be higher than the jackpot expected by the first predetermined image.

  The timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This timer effect can be executed in connection with the change display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”). For example, it can be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, at the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like.

[Timer effect A]
FIG. 84 is a view for explaining the timer effect A.
In the timer effect A, first, a timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed as shown in FIG. 84 (A). In this timer effect execution effect, the decoration effect is performed in synchronization with the special symbol change display. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left design display area has a left decoration design 8L and a middle design. A middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 84A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a battle effect in which an image of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB on the player side is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for deciding whether or not to execute a timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA loses. Direction is not executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), a timer effect impossibility effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer effect impossibility effect, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 84 (A), the character “Defeat!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has defeated is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Displaying the character “Defeat!” Indicates that the timer effect is not executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss symbol stop effect indicates that the variation results of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 84 (A) have been lost. In the present example, “958” is shown in the lost symbol arrangement.

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 84 (B), as shown in FIG. 68 (D), a timer effect possible indication effect may be executed. In the timer effect suggestion effect, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 84 (A), the character “WIN!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has won is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Displaying the character “WIN!” Indicates that the timer effect is to be executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 84 (E), 10 seconds is shown as a timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), a timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 84 (E) is counted down to 0 second, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array. It has become. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), a jackpot expectation degree suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot expectation degree suggestion effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 second. In this jackpot expectation suggestion effect, the timer image TM is erased, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right corner, and a predetermined jackpot expectation suggestion appears at the center of the display screen 7a. The production DKE is being performed. The jackpot expectation degree suggesting effect DKE is not particularly limited, and any effect that suggests the jackpot expectation, such as a battle effect or a story effect, may be used.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (H), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the reach results shown in FIGS. 84 (F) and 84 (G) were jackpots. That is, the jackpot symbol array “777” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
The jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 84 (E) is not necessarily performed, and the loss design stop effect shown in FIG. 84 (C) may be performed with a predetermined probability.

  That is, in the timer effect A shown in FIG. 84, a timer effect execution possibility effect (battle effect) is performed as a first effect of whether or not to perform the timer effect. , A timer effect is performed as a second effect. Then, when the timer value is counted down in the timer effect and reaches “0”, that is, when the timer value stops at the predetermined value, the timer image TM is deleted (timer effect ends), and the big hit expectation degree as the third effect is suggested. In addition, a jackpot expectation degree suggestion effect DKE is being performed.

[Timer effect B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect B.
In the timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), a timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed. In this timer effect execution effect, the decoration effect is performed in synchronization with the special symbol change display. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left design display area has a left decoration design 8L and a middle design. A middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 85 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a battle effect in which an image of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB on the player side is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for deciding whether or not to execute a timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA loses. Direction is not executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a timer effect possible indication effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer effect suggestion effect, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 85 (A), the character “WIN!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has won is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Displaying the character “WIN!” Indicates that the timer effect is to be executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 85 (A). Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 85 (C), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), a timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 85 (C) is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array. It has become. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), a character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is deleted, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the deleted timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the fluctuation. In FIG. 85 (E), the character MKE of “chance” is displayed at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Is done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the reach result shown in FIG. 85 (E) has been lost. In the present example, “958” is shown in the lost symbol arrangement. That is, the lost symbol array “958” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicates the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 85 (E), a character display effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 85 (G). This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is deleted, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the deleted timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the fluctuation, and in FIG. 85 (E), the character MKE of “hot heat” is positioned almost at the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the reach result shown in FIG. 85 (G) was a jackpot. That is, the jackpot symbol array “777” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
The jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 85 (H) is not always performed, and the loss symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 85 (F) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 85 (F) is not necessarily performed, and the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 85 (H) may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability of performing the jackpot determination effect is higher in the case where the character display effect illustrated in FIG. 85 (G) is performed than in the case where the character display effect illustrated in FIG. 85 (E) is performed. I have.

  That is, in the timer effect B shown in FIG. 85, a timer effect execution possibility effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not to perform the timer effect. , A timer effect is performed as a second effect. Then, when the timer value is counted down in the timer effect and reaches “0”, that is, when the timer value stops at the predetermined value, the timer image TM is deleted (timer effect ends), and the big hit expectation degree as the third effect is suggested. Character display effect is performed. Then, a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the character display effect, and the content of the displayed predetermined character MKE indicates a jackpot expectation degree. That is, the character display effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation changes depending on the content of the character displayed in the character display effect.

[Timer effect C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect C.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), a timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed. In this timer effect execution effect, the decoration effect is performed in synchronization with the special symbol change display. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left design display area has a left decoration design 8L and a middle design. A middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 86 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a battle effect in which an image of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB on the player side is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for deciding whether or not to execute a timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA loses. Direction is not executed.

  When the ally character CRA wins the battle effect in the timer effect execution availability effect shown in FIG. 86 (A), a timer display effect is then executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 86 (B). In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (B), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), a timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (B) is counted down to 0 second, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array. It has become. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), a character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is deleted, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the deleted timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the fluctuation, and in FIG. 86 (D), the character MKE of “chance” is displayed at almost the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Is done.
Then, although illustration is omitted, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (D) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F) described above, the lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Is done.

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 86 (B), as shown in FIG. 86 (E), a decorative symbol change effect may be executed. This decorative pattern change is an effect performed after the ally character CRA has won in the battle effect in the timer effect execution availability effect illustrated in FIG. 86 (A). In this decorative design variation effect, only the variation effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are performed, and the timer image TM is not yet displayed. In other words, the decorative design variation effect shown in FIG. 86 (E) is an image in which the battle effect has been eliminated in the timer effect execution availability effect shown in FIG. 86 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), a timer display reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer display reach production is performed when the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the reach design arrangement in the decorative design variation production shown in FIG. 86 (E), or the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R When a predetermined time has elapsed after stopping in the reach symbol arrangement (before the middle decorative symbol 8C stops), the timer image TM is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (F), 50 seconds is shown as the timer initial value. That is, in the timer display reach effect shown in FIG. 86 (E), the display timing of the timer image TM is at or after the reach is established due to the fluctuation, and is later than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86 (B). The timer initial value is longer than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), a timer stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop effect, a predetermined reach effect (super-reach effect) RE is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (F) is counted down to 0 seconds. . In this timer stop effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a and the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and the predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed in the center of the display screen 7a. It has become. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (H), a character display effect is executed. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is deleted, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the deleted timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the fluctuation, and in FIG. 86 (E), the character MKE of “hot heat” is positioned almost at the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Is displayed.
Then, although illustration is omitted, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (H) is executed, then, as shown in FIG. 85 (H) above, a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. You.
Note that the jackpot determination effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (H) is not necessarily performed, and a loss design stop effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (D) is not necessarily performed, and a jackpot-determined effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability of the jackpot confirmation effect being performed is higher in the case where the timer display reach effect shown in FIG. 86 (F) is performed than in the case of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86 (B). The case where the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (H) is performed is higher than the case where the character display effect shown in D) is performed.

  In other words, in the timer effect C shown in FIG. 86, a timer effect execution possibility effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not to perform the timer effect, and the ally character CRA wins as a result of the battle effect. , A timer effect is performed as a second effect. Here, in the timer effect, the larger the display timing of the timer image TM and the longer the time of the timer initial value of the timer image TM, the higher the jackpot expectation. That is, the display timing of the timer image TM and the timer initial value of the timer image TM are effects that suggest the jackpot expectation. It is changing. Then, when the timer value is counted down in the timer effect and reaches “0”, that is, when the timer value stops at the predetermined value, the timer image TM is deleted (timer effect ends), and the big hit expectation degree as the third effect is suggested. Character display effect is performed. Then, a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the character display effect, and the content of the displayed predetermined character MKE indicates a jackpot expectation degree. That is, the character display effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation changes depending on the content of the character displayed in the character display effect.

[Timer effect D]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect D.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), a timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed. In this timer effect execution effect, the decoration effect is performed in synchronization with the special symbol change display. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left design display area has a left decoration design 8L and a middle design. A middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 87 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a battle effect in which an image of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB on the player side is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for deciding whether or not to execute a timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA loses. Direction is not executed.

  When the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect in the timer effect execution possibility effect shown in FIG. 87A, a timer display effect is then executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 87B. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 87 (B), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), a timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 87 (B) is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array. It has become. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), a character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is deleted, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the deleted timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the fluctuation, and in FIG. 87 (D), the character MKE “CHANCE” is displayed at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Is done.
Then, although illustration is omitted, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (D) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Is done.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in place of FIG. 87 (B), when the timer effect execution enable / disable effect shown in FIG. 87 (A) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. 86 (E) described above, On the display screen 7a, a decorative design change effect may be executed. In this decorative design variation effect, only the variation effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are performed, and the timer image TM is not yet displayed. In other words, the decorative design variation effect is an image in which the battle effect has been deleted in the timer effect execution availability effect illustrated in FIG. 87 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), a timer W (double) display reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The timer W display reach production is performed when the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R stop in the reach design arrangement in the decorative design change production, or when the left decorative design 8L and the right decoration design 8R stop in the reach design arrangement. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed (before the middle decorative pattern 8C stops), the timer image TM1 and the timer image TM2 are displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The timer images TM1 and TM2 are displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In FIG. 87 (E), timer image TM1 shows 50 seconds as a timer initial value, and timer image TM2 shows 30 seconds as a timer initial value. That is, in the timer W display reach effect shown in FIG. 86 (E), the display timing of the timer images TM1 and TM2 is set when the reach is established due to the fluctuation or after that, and the timer display effect shown in FIG. The timer initial value is longer than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), a timer TM2 stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer TM2 stop effect, a predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM2 shown in FIG. 87 (E) is counted down to 0 seconds. I have. At this time, the timer image TM1 is similarly counted down to 20 seconds. In the timer TM2 stop effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a and the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and a predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed in the center of the display screen 7a. It has become. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), a timer TM2 character display effect is executed. This timer TM2 character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM2 stops at 0 second. In the timer TM2 character display effect, the timer image TM2 is deleted, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the deleted timer image TM2. The predetermined character MKE is an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the change, and in FIG. 87 (E), the character MKE2 of “CHANCE” is displayed at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM2 was displayed. Is done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), a timer TM1 character display effect is executed. This timer TM1 character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM1 stops at 0 second. In the timer TM1 character display effect, the timer image TM1 is deleted, and a predetermined character MKE1 is displayed instead of the deleted timer image TM1. This predetermined character MKE1 is an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the change. In FIG. 87 (H), the character MKE1 of "hot heat" is located at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed. Is displayed.
Then, although illustration is omitted, when the timer TM1 character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (H) is executed, then, as shown in FIG. Be executed.
Note that the jackpot determination effect after the timer TM1 character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (H) is not necessarily performed, and a loss design stop effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the loss design stop effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (D) is not necessarily performed, and the jackpot determination effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability of the jackpot confirmation effect being performed is higher in the case where the timer W display reach effect shown in FIG. 87 (E) is performed than in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87 (B), and in FIG. The case where the character display effect shown in FIGS. 87 (G) and 87 (H) is performed is higher than the case where the character display effect shown in (D) is performed.

  In other words, in the timer effect D shown in FIG. 87, a timer effect execution possibility effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not to perform the timer effect. , A timer effect is performed as a second effect. Here, in the timer effect, the larger the display timing of the timer image TM, the longer the time of the timer initial value of the timer image TM, and the greater the number of displayed timer images TM, the higher the jackpot expectation. . That is, the display timing of the timer image TM, the timer initial value of the timer image TM, and the number of displayed timer images TM are effects that suggest the jackpot expectation, and the display timing of the timer image TM, the timer initial value of the timer image TM, and The big hit expectation changes according to the difference in the number of displayed timer images TM. Then, when the timer value is counted down in the timer effect and reaches “0”, that is, when the timer value stops at a predetermined value, the timer images TM1 and TM2 are sequentially deleted (timer effect ends), and a big hit as the third effect is expected. A character display effect indicating the degree is performed. Then, in the character display effect, predetermined characters MKE1 and MKE2 are sequentially displayed, and the content of the displayed predetermined characters MKE1 and MKE2 indicates a jackpot expectation degree. That is, the character display effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation changes depending on the content of the character displayed in the character display effect.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the timer effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, predetermined first effects, second effects, and third effects can be executed, and the first effect is displayed in the first mode. An effect that includes an effect and an effect displayed in the second mode. The second effect displays a predetermined timer image, counts a timer value using the timer image, and sets the timer value to a predetermined value. The third effect is an effect including a display indicating a jackpot expectation degree. When the effect displayed in the first mode in the first effect is performed, the second effect is performed. The third effect is performed when the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value in the second effect. According to this configuration, when the effect displayed in the first mode in the first effect is performed, and when the timer value is stopped at the predetermined value in the second effect and the third effect is performed, , Can play games with great expectations. In addition, since it is determined whether or not to perform an effect indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot with a timer image whose timer value visually changes with time, the player can maintain a sense of expectation with time. Further, by stopping the timer value at various values, the player can be delighted. Furthermore, it is also possible to associate the timer value to be stopped with the jackpot expectation degree and change the jackpot expectation degree by the numerical value of the stopped timer value. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 to FIG. 87, the first effect is a battle effect in which an ally character on the player side and an enemy character battle, and the first mode is a battle effect. This is an effect in which the ally character wins, and the second mode is an effect in which the ally character loses in the battle effect. According to this configuration, a battle effect for determining whether or not to perform the second effect is performed, and the second effect is performed when the ally character on the player side wins in this battle effect. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the determination as to whether or not to perform the second effect in an easy-to-understand manner, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the second effect is an effect in which a countdown display is performed and the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value, and the third effect is that the timer value is a predetermined value. , A predetermined character is displayed when stopped, and the jackpot expectation degree changes according to the content of the character displayed in the character effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to display characters of various contents in a character effect and change the jackpot expectation degree. As a result, the player is delighted with the contents of the displayed characters, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the jackpot expectation degree is changed according to the display timing of the timer image in the second effect. According to this configuration, the timer image can be displayed at various timings to change the jackpot expectation. As a result, the player is delighted with the display timing of the timer image, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, the jackpot expectation degree is configured to change according to the number of displayed timer images. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily change the jackpot expectation by changing the number of timer images. As a result, the player is delighted with the number of displayed timer images, and can enhance the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the timer effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, in the timer display effect, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value is counted down, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, in the timer display effect, the timer value may be changed irregularly (random change). Alternatively, the timer display effect may be displayed by a count-up method in which a timer value is counted up.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 to FIG. 87, when the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value (0 second), a jackpot expectation degree suggestion effect is performed, and a big hit is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined value at which the timer value is stopped is associated with the jackpot expectation suggestion effect, and the jackpot expectation suggestion effect also indicates the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot with a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot or a different number of rounds as a jackpot type). You may do so. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest not only the jackpot but also the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol arrangement). As a result, the player can determine whether or not the current jackpot is a variable jackpot, or It is possible to determine in advance whether or not it is a jackpot with many.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, two timer images are displayed in the timer display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, three or more timer images may be displayed. Further, the color arrangement of the timer image may be different from the same color instead of the same color. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation also by the color and the number of timer images. In addition, the display of the two timer images (a plurality of timer images) may be displayed so that the timer values are partially superimposed so as to be visually recognized. Further, the display timings of the two timer images (a plurality of timer images) need not be simultaneous, and may be displayed with a time difference.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the characters indicating the jackpot expectation degree displayed in the character display effect showed two types of “chance” and “hot fever”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be a plurality of types of characters indicating the jackpot expectation degree displayed in the character display effect, such as “fever”, “NEXT”, and “big hit”. In this case, the character type and the jackpot type (jackpot pattern arrangement) are associated with each other to indicate the jackpot type (for example, the jackpot type, the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot, or the jackpot with a different number of rounds). Is also good. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest not only the jackpot but also the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol arrangement). As a result, the player can determine whether or not the current jackpot is a variable jackpot, or It is possible to determine in advance whether or not it is a jackpot with many. In addition, the display of two characters (a plurality of characters) of “chance” and “hot fever” may be displayed so that the characters are partially overlapped so that the characters can be visually recognized. Furthermore, characters (a plurality of characters) may not be displayed at the same time, and the previously displayed character may be deleted before the next character is displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 to FIG. The battle effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect to determine whether or not to execute the timer effect is a button effect (for example, when the meter is full with continuous tapping of the button, or when an effect indicating success is performed by pressing the button) or the like. An effect that wins by lottery (for example, an effect that wins with roulette), or an effect that wins first place in a competition (for example, an effect that wins in sprinting), or the like ( However, it is desirable to have an effect that can determine victory or defeat, or success or failure.)

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means can execute a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means can execute a predetermined third effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is an effect including an effect displayed in a first mode and an effect displayed in a second mode,
The second effect is a display that displays a predetermined timer image, a display that counts a timer value using the timer image, and a display that includes a display that stops the timer value at a predetermined value.
The third effect is an effect including a display indicating a jackpot expectation degree,
The display means performs the second effect when the effect displayed in the first mode in the first effect is performed, and when the timer value stops at a predetermined value in the second effect, Perform the third production,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect B2-2]
The first effect is a battle effect in which an ally character on the player side and an enemy character compete against each other,
The first aspect is an effect in which the ally character wins in the battle effect,
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1, wherein the second aspect is an effect in which the ally character is eliminated in the battle effect.
[Aspect B2-3]
The second effect is an effect of performing a countdown display and stopping the timer value at a predetermined value,
The third effect is a character effect of displaying a predetermined character when the timer value stops at a predetermined value,
The jackpot expectation degree changes depending on the content of the character displayed in the character effect,
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2.
[Aspect B2-4]
The jackpot expectation degree changes according to a display timing of the timer image in the second effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of modes B2-1 to B2-3, characterized in that:
[Aspect B2-5]
The jackpot expectation degree changes according to the number of the timer images displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of modes B2-1 to B2-4, characterized in that:

  The timer speed effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This timer speed effect can be executed during a fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the timer speed effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Timer effect A]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect A. The timer effects from FIG. 88 (A) to FIG. 88 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer speed effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), a variable effect of a decorative symbol is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, a timer image display effect shown in FIG. 88 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol change effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, “ 01 "to" 99 "). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), a countdown effect is executed. Specifically, “20” is displayed on the first timer TM1 at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is displayed, “30” is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). The switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the first timer TM1 is 1 second, but the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is the same as the numerical value of the first timer TM1. It is faster than the switching speed (1 second) (for example, 0.5 seconds). Here, a description will be given assuming that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 second. That is, in the second timer TM2, the numerical value (digital display) switches twice per second (the numerical value is decremented), so that the numerical value switches at twice the speed of the first timer TM1. The value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. Note that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are "30" and "20" at the time of display, but the difference between the numerical values (count value) decreases. . Here, the difference between the numerical values (count value) at the time of display is “10”, but the difference is “8”. Then, the difference between the numerical values (count values) gradually decreases, and the count values temporarily match as shown in FIG. 88 (E), and thereafter, the count values reverse as shown in FIG. 88 (F). . After the count value is reversed, as shown in FIG. 88 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0” first, as shown in FIG. 88 (H), the first expectation degree is suggested. Direction is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and the first expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 88 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and the second timer “1” is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expected degree suggestion image EI2 displays a content having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first expected degree suggested image EI1.

[Timer speed effect B]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect B. The timer speed effect B is different from the timer speed effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects from FIG. 89 (A) to FIG. 89 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer speed effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), a variable effect of a decorative symbol is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, a first timer image display effect shown in FIG. 89 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 is a bar-shaped meter and represents the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The first timer TM1 indicates that the remaining period of the meter decreases as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and indicates that a certain time point has been reached when the remaining amount of the meter is exhausted (reduced to zero). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed. The first timer TM1 is displayed in a state where the meter is full at the time of display, and thereafter, the decrease of the remaining meter is started (starts).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (C), the second timer TM2 is displayed while the first timer TM1 is displayed. The second timer TM2 is a bar-shaped meter, and indicates a remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The second timer TM2 is displayed in a state where the meter is full at the time of display, and thereafter, the meter remaining amount starts to be reduced (starts). The decreasing speed of the meter of the second timer TM2 (the speed at which the remaining period changes) is faster than the decreasing speed of the meter of the first timer TM1.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), the difference between the meter remaining amount of the first timer TM1 and the meter remaining amount of the second timer TM2 gradually decreases. Then, the meter remaining amount temporarily matches as shown in FIG. 89 (E), and thereafter, the meter remaining amount reverses as shown in FIG. 89 (F). When the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero as shown in FIG. 89 (G) after the meter remaining amount is reversed, the first expectation is made as shown in FIG. 89 (H). A suggestion effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and "Heat !!" is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (I), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, a second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 89 (J). . In the second degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and "extra hot!" Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expected degree suggestion image EI2 displays a content having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first expected degree suggested image EI1.

[Timer production C]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect C. . The timer speed effect C is different from the timer speed effect A in that the timer speed changes halfway. The timer effects from FIG. 90 (A) to FIG. 90 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer speed effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), a variable effect of a decorative symbol is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, a timer image display effect shown in FIG. 90 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol change effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, “ 01 "to" 99 "). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), a countdown effect is executed. Specifically, when both the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed, “20” is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). The switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the first timer TM1 and the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 are the same and are 1 second. Therefore, the same numerical value (count value) is displayed on the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 for a while after the display.

  Thereafter, a speed-up start effect shown in FIG. 90 (D) is executed. Specifically, a suggestion image C1 indicating that the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 is increased is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, an image drawn as “Speed UP” is displayed. Then, the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. Here, the description will be given on the assumption that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, the numerical value (digital display) switches twice per second (the numerical value is decremented), so that the numerical value switches at twice the speed of the first timer TM1. The value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. Note that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

  Thus, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 have the same count value for a while after the display (the difference between the count values is “0”), but are shown in FIGS. 90 (E) and 90 (F). Thus, the difference between the count values increases. In FIG. 90 (E), the difference between the count values is “1”, and in FIG. 90 (F), the difference between the count values is “3”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0” first, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and the first expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 90 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and the second timer “1” is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expected degree suggestion image EI2 displays a content having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first expected degree suggested image EI1.

[Timer production D]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect D. The timer speed effect D differs from the timer speed effect A in the number of displayed timer images and the number of digital digits to be displayed. The timer effects from FIG. 91 (A) to FIG. 91 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer speed effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the third timer TM3 is displayed in a state in which the decorative effect variable effect is executed. Here, the third timer TM3 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period (here, “001” to “999”) until a certain time is reached by countdown. )). The certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the certain point in time is reached, it is not always necessary for some display change to occur. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.
At the time of display, the third timer TM3 is not started (countdown is not started), and a random number is displayed. Here, the random number display means that numerical values between “000” and “999” are displayed randomly (irregularly).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the first timer TM1 is displayed while the third timer TM3 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a timer image of a three-digit digital display, and “100” is displayed as a remaining period at the time of display, and then a countdown is started (started). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the third timer TM3 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the second timer TM2 is displayed while the third timer TM3 and the first timer TM1 are displayed. The second timer TM2 is a timer image of a three-digit digital display, and displays a remaining period longer than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 is displaying "86", the remaining period of the second timer TM2 is displayed as "100", and the countdown is started (started).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the countdown of the third timer TM3 is started (started). When the third timer TM3 starts, a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is displayed. Here, in a state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 displays “70” and the remaining period of the second timer IM2 displays “68”, the third timer TM3 displays the remaining period after displaying the random number. Is displayed as the period of, and then a countdown is started. In the third timer TM3, at the start of the countdown, the switching speed of the numerical value is reduced. Thereby, the player can recognize that the countdown has started. In addition, around the start of the countdown of the third timer TM3, a speed-up start effect of the second timer TM2 is executed. Specifically, the display screen 7a displays a suggestion image (not shown) indicating that the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 is increased. Then, the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. Here, the description will be given on the assumption that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, the numerical value (digital display) switches twice per second (the numerical value is decremented), so that the numerical value switches at twice the speed of the first timer TM1. The value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. Note that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the third expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 91 (F). In the third degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the display of the third timer TM3 disappears and the third expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI3 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 91 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the third expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first heat “!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed. Here, the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 displays a content with a higher jackpot expectation degree than the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 91 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first and third expectation degree suggestion effects. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and the second timer “1” is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expectation suggestion image EI2 displays a content with a higher jackpot expectation than the first expectation suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation suggestion image EI3.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the timer speed effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the remaining time period indicated by the first timer TM1 is displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Can be executed in which the speed at which the time changes varies and the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, FIG. 90, and FIG. 91, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate the remaining period by counting down the digital display. In the production, the speed of each countdown is different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 each indicate the remaining period by changing so that the length of a specific image is shortened. In the first effect, the speed at which the length of each specific image decreases is different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, before the first effect, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed, and the remaining time indicated by the first timer TM1 is displayed. A second effect in which the speed at which the period changes and the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes is the same can be executed. According to this configuration, the speed at which the remaining period changes changes from the middle, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, in the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes is the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 changes. In a state where the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed before the first effect, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 is shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2. After the short second effect and the first effect, while the first timer TM1 is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 is gone, and the second timer TM2 is displayed. And a third effect in which the predetermined image is displayed at the position where the predetermined image is displayed. According to this configuration, since the remaining period is reversed, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, in the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes depends on the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. Is faster than the changing speed and before the first effect, the first timer TM1 is displayed, and the second timer TM2 is newly displayed from the state where the second timer TM2 is not displayed. In the state where the first timer TM1 is displaying the remaining period after the first effect, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 is gone, and the second timer TM2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. 3 and the effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the timer displayed later becomes zero first, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the timer speed effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 88), the switching speed of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 may be at least temporarily different from the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. For example, the switching speed of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 may be temporarily lower than the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1, or the switching speed changes and the switching speed temporarily changes. However, it may be faster or slower than the first timer TM1. In the above description (for example, FIG. 89), the decreasing speed of the meter of the second timer TM2 may be at least temporarily different from the decreasing speed of the meter of the first timer TM1. For example, the decreasing speed of the meter of the second timer TM2 may be temporarily lower than the decreasing speed of the meter of the first timer TM1, or the decreasing speed may change and the decreasing speed of the first timer TM1 may temporarily decrease to the first speed. It may be faster or slower than the timer TM1.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 88), at least one of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 may move during the countdown. Further, they may move and partially overlap each other. Further, at least one of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 may be invisible from the display screen 7a during the countdown.
[Modification 3]
In the above-described timer speed effect, the timer effect is executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). However, the above-described timer speed effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating a remaining period until a certain point in time is reached,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer that indicates a remaining period until a certain time point is reached,
In a state where the first timer and the second timer are displayed on the display means, a speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes, and a remaining period indicated by the second timer A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute a first effect that differs from the speed at which the speed changes.
◇ [Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The first timer and the second timer indicate a remaining period by a digital display countdown,
In the first effect, each of the countdown speeds is different.
◇ [Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The first timer and the second timer each indicate a remaining period by changing the length of a specific image to be shorter,
In the first effect, the speed at which the length of each specific image decreases is different.
◇ [Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B3-1 to Aspect B3-3,
Before the first effect, in a state where the first timer and the second timer are displayed, a speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes, and a second timer A second effect in which the speed of change of the remaining period indicated by the second effect is the same as that of the second effect.
◇ [Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B3-1 to Aspect B3-3,
In the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes is faster than the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer changes,
Prior to the first effect, in a state where the first timer and the second timer are displayed, the remaining period indicated by the second timer is longer than the remaining period indicated by the first timer. A short second production,
After the first effect, in a state where the second timer is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the first timer is gone, and the position where the first timer was displayed is displayed. A third effect in which a predetermined image is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B3-1 to Aspect B3-3,
In the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes is faster than the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer changes,
A second effect in which the second timer is displayed before the first effect, and the first timer is newly displayed from a state in which the first timer is not displayed;
After the first effect, in a state where the second timer is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the first timer runs out, and the first timer is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute a third effect that disappears.

  The timer count effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This timer count effect can be executed during a fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the timer count effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Timer count effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect A. The timer effects from FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer count effect A, first, a timer image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol change effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, “ 01 "to" 99 "seconds). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, a random number display / countdown effect shown in FIGS. 92 (B) and 92 (C) is executed. Specifically, “2” is displayed at the time of the display of the second timer TM2, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of displaying (counting down is not started), and a random number is displayed. Here, the random number display means that numerical values between “00” and “99” are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the second timer TM2.

  On the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the linked image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, the linked image RM is an image (region image) showing a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). The area of the linked image RM periodically changes inside a rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 92 (A) to 92 (D), when the area of the linked image RM decreases with the passage of time and the area of the linked image RM runs out, a digital display portion (numeral portion) is displayed. In), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM again covers the entire inside of the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (the area is recovered). As described above, the shape of the linked image RM changes constantly (the area decreases) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when the count is switched to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one second). Each time), a constant change (reduction in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the linked image RM can strongly impress the countdown on the player.

  After the random number display / countdown effect has been executed for a while, as shown in FIG. 92 (D), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the first timer TM1 starts counting (starts), the linked image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, the first timer TM1 displays “5” as the remaining period after the random number is displayed. By displaying the linked image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (after starting), for a while, as shown in FIGS. 92 (E) to 92 (H), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 counts down. Execute (double countdown effect). At this time, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes in accordance with the switching of each count. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 92 (J). In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and the first expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, and the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and the second timer “1” is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image is displayed. Here, as the second expected degree suggestion image, a content having a higher jackpot expected degree than the first expected degree suggested image EI1 is displayed.

[Timer count effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect B. The timer count effect B differs from the timer count effect A in the operation mode of the linked image RM and the mode until the timer starts. The timer effects from FIG. 93 (A) to FIG. 93 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer count effect B, first, a timer image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol change effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image. 01 "to" 99 "seconds). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, 88 display / countdown effects shown in FIGS. 93 (B) and 93 (C) are executed. Specifically, “2” is displayed at the time of the display of the second timer TM2, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), "88" is displayed, and the first timer TM1 is stopped in that state. On the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the linked image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numeral portion). The area of the linked image RM periodically changes in a manner like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numeral portion). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 93 (A) to 93 (D), when the area of the linked image RM increases with time, and the image region of the linked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image. , The next count is displayed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (starts from zero again). As described above, the shape of the linked image RM changes constantly (the area increases) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when the count is switched to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one second). Each time), a constant change (increase in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the linked image RM can strongly impress the countdown on the player.

  After the random number display / countdown effect has been executed for a while, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the first timer TM1 starts counting (starts), the linked image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, the first timer TM1 displays “5” as the remaining period after the random number is displayed. By displaying the linked image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (after starting), for a while, as shown in FIGS. 93 (E) to 93 (H), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 counts down. Run (double countdown effect). At this time, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes in accordance with the switching of each count. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 93 (J). In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and the first expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, and the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and the second timer “1” is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image is displayed. Here, as the second expected degree suggestion image, a content having a higher jackpot expected degree than the first expected degree suggested image EI1 is displayed.

[Timer count effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect C. The timer count effect C differs from the timer count effect A in the operation mode of the linked image RM and the combination mode with the movable role. The timer effects from FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer count effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol change effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image. 01 "to" 99 "seconds). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, a countdown effect shown in FIGS. 94 (B) to 94 (E) is executed. Specifically, “10” is displayed at the time of the display of the first timer TM1, and then the countdown is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is displayed, “2” is displayed, and then the countdown starts (starts). The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 that have started (started) the countdown respectively display the linked image RM so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numeral portion). The area of the linked image RM periodically changes in a manner like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numeral portion). On the other hand, the switching timing (cycle) of the linked image RM of the first timer TM1 and the linked image RM of the second timer TM2 are different. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 94 (B) to (E), in the linked image RM of the first timer TM1, the image area of the linked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image at the time of display, and the area is increased with the countdown. Decreases and the count becomes zero, the area of the linked image RM also disappears. That is, the linked image RM of the first timer TM1 represents the remaining period until the count becomes zero. Even in this case, it can be said that the interlocked image RM is interlocked with the count since the area is constantly reduced with the count. On the other hand, the interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 increases in area over time, similarly to the timer count effect B, and when the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion (number In part) the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (starts from zero again). The interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 changes its shape constantly (increases in area) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when the count is switched to the next count. A constant change (an increase in area) is repeated every second.

  During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), a movable accessory drive effect may be executed. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves upward (moves) from the retreat position and stops at the advanced position. By this. A part of the display screen 7 a is covered with the first movable role 14. At this time, the lower half of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable role 14, and it is difficult to visually recognize them. On the other hand, the player can recognize that the countdown of the timer is continuing by changing the visible portion of the linked image RM.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 94 (H). In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and the first expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (I), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is continued, and when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0” as shown in FIG. An effect suggesting the degree of expectation is performed. In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and the second timer “1” is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image is displayed. Here, as the second expected degree suggestion image, a content having a higher jackpot expected degree than the first expected degree suggested image EI1 is displayed.

[Timer count effect D]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect D. The timer count effect D differs from the timer count effect A in the operation mode of the linked image RM and the combination mode with the movable role. The timer effects from FIG. 95 (A) to FIG. 95 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer count effect D, first, a first timer image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 95 (A). Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, “1” to “999”) by countdown. In seconds). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, a countdown effect shown in FIG. 95 (B) is executed. Specifically, "100" is displayed at the time of the display of the first timer TM1, and then the countdown is started (started). In the first timer TM1 that has started (started) the countdown, the linked image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, the linked image RM is an image (region image) showing a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). The area of the linked image RM periodically changes inside a rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, similarly to the timer count effect A, the area of the linked image RM decreases with the passage of time, and when the area of the linked image RM runs out, the next count is displayed on the digital display portion (numeral portion). Is done. When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM again covers the entire inside of the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (the area is recovered). As described above, the shape of the linked image RM changes constantly (the area decreases) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when the count is switched to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one second). Each time), a constant change (reduction in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the linked image RM can strongly impress the countdown on the player.

  Next, a second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 95 (C) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 is newly displayed in a state where the first timer TM1 is performing the countdown during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the second timer TM2 is a timer image in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image, and the remaining period (here, “01” to “99”) until a certain time is reached by countdown. In seconds). Note that the certain time point is an arbitrary time point as described above, and it is not always necessary to cause some change in display when the certain time point is reached.

  Next, a countdown effect shown in FIG. 95 (D) is executed. Specifically, “2” is displayed on the second timer TM2 at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). On the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the linked image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numeral portion). The area of the linked image RM periodically changes in a manner like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numeral portion). As in the case of the timer count effect B, the area of the linked image RM of the second timer TM2 increases with time, and when the image area of the linked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, a digital display portion (numeral portion) In, the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (starts from zero again). The interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 changes its shape constantly (increases in area) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when the count is switched to the next count. A constant change (an increase in area) is repeated every second. The change in the shape of the linked image RM can strongly impress the countdown on the player.

  Next, a third timer image display effect shown in FIG. 95 (E) is executed. Specifically, the third timer TM3 is newly displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are counting down. Here, the third timer TM3 is not superimposed on the linked image RM and is displayed at a position close to the linked image RM. The third timer TM3 is a two-digit digital display, and displays the remaining period (here, the number of seconds from “01” to “99”) until reaching a certain point in time by countdown. The linked image RM is an image (region image) indicating a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the rectangular image. The area of the linked image RM periodically changes inside a rectangular image that does not surround the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, the area of the linked image RM decreases with the passage of time, and when the area of the linked image RM runs out, the next count is displayed on the digital display portion (number portion). When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM is again in a state of covering the entire inside of the rectangular image (the area is recovered). As described above, the shape of the linked image RM changes constantly (the area decreases) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when the count is switched to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one second). Each time), a constant change (reduction in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the linked image RM can strongly impress the countdown on the player.

  During the countdown effect by the three timers, as shown in FIG. 95 (F), a movable accessory-driven effect may be executed. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves upward (moves) from the retreat position and stops at the advanced position. By this. A part of the display screen 7 a is covered with the first movable role 14. At this time, the lower half of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable role 14, and it is difficult to visually recognize them. On the other hand, the player can recognize that the countdown of the timer is continuing by changing the visible portion of the linked image RM.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 95 (H). In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and the first expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (I), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 95 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the second heat TM is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expected degree suggestion image EI2 displays a content having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first expected degree suggested image EI1.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the timer count effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, in a state where the first timer TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first timer TM1 is superimposed on the countdown of the first timer TM1. The linked image RM linked can be displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the linked image RM has a shape in a predetermined manner from the time when one count during the countdown is displayed until the time when the next count is switched. Every time the count changes, the shape changes in a predetermined manner are repeated. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the area of the linked image RM changes over time during one count. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, after the first effect in which the first timer TM1 that has not been started is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, The second effect in which the one timer TM1 starts counting down can be executed. In the first effect, the linked image RM is not displayed, and in the second effect, the linked image RM is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, in the first effect, the first timer TM1 displays a random number in digital display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the first effect, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed, and the first timer TM1 is not started. The second timer TM2 has been started, and the linked image RM linked with the countdown of the second timer TM2 is displayed superimposed on the second timer TM2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the timer count effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 95 (J)), the second expected degree suggestion image EI2 displays a content with a higher jackpot expectation than the first expected degree suggested image EI1. However, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 may display a content having a lower jackpot expectation degree than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1, or may display the same expectation degree.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 95), when the remaining periods of the first timer TM1 and the third timer TM3 become “0”, the expected degree suggestion images EI1 and EI2 are displayed. However, an image other than the expected degree suggestion image may be displayed. For example, an operation unit image may be displayed, or an image in which a decorative symbol during variable display is stopped and displayed may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the above (for example, FIG. 93 (D)), the first timer TM1 displays a period longer than the remaining period displayed by the second timer TM2 at startup, but the second timer TM2 displays the period. A period longer than the remaining period may be displayed.
[Modification 4]
In the above-described timer speed effect, the timer effect is executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). However, the above-described timer speed effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer that indicates a remaining period until a certain point in time is reached by countdown,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a state where the first timer is displayed on the display means, an interlocked image interlocked with the countdown of the first timer can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the first timer.
◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The interlocking image changes in shape in a predetermined manner between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when the count is switched to the next count. Gaming machine characterized by the following.
◇ [Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-2,
A gaming machine, wherein the area of the linked image changes with time during the one count.
◇ [Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B4-1 to Aspect B4-3,
A first effect in which the first timer that has not been started is displayed on the display means, and a second effect in which the first timer starts counting down after the first effect is executed. Is possible,
In the first effect, the interlocked image is not displayed, and in the second effect, the interlocked image is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4,
In the first effect, the first timer displays a random number on a digital display.
◇ [Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B4-4 or Aspect B4-5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer that indicates a remaining period until a certain point in time is reached by countdown,
In the first effect, the first timer and the second timer are displayed, and the second timer is started in a state where the first timer is not started, and the second timer is started. And a linked image linked to the countdown of the second timer is displayed in a superimposed manner.

  The movable role timer effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This movable accessory timer effect can be executed during a variation effect of a decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the movable role timer effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Moveable role timer effect A]
FIG. 96 is a view for explaining the movable role timer effect A. The timer effects from FIG. 96 (A) to FIG. 96 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the movable character timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96A, a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol change effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image. 01 "to" 99 "seconds). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, a random number display / countdown effect shown in FIG. 96 (B) is executed. Specifically, “22” is displayed at the time of the display of the second timer TM2, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of displaying (counting down is not started), and a random number is displayed. Here, the random number display means that numerical values between “00” and “99” are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the second timer TM2.

  On the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the linked image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numeral portion). The area of the linked image RM periodically changes in a manner like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numeral portion). Specifically, as shown in the timer count effect B in FIG. 93, the area of the linked image RM increases with the passage of time, and when the image area of the linked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion is displayed. In the (numerical part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (starts from zero again). As described above, the shape of the linked image RM changes constantly (the area increases) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when the count is switched to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one second). Each time), a constant change (increase in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the linked image RM can strongly impress the countdown on the player.

  During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), a movable character advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves (advance) upward from the retreat position. Thereby, a part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable role 14. During the movement of the first movable role 14, the lower half of the second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable role 14, and the second timer TM2 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second timer TM2. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet, and is displayed as a random number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), a movable role stationary effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves upward (moves) from the retracted position and then stops at the advanced position. As a result, almost the entire second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable role object 14, and the second timer TM2 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it. In addition, the second timer TM2 may be covered with the first movable auditors 14 and may be completely invisible, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet, and is displayed as a random number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), a movable character retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable role 14 moves downward (retreats) from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which is almost entirely covered by the first movable role 14, becomes visible again. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet, and is displayed as a random number.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (F), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the first timer TM1 starts counting (starts), the linked image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, the first timer TM1 displays “5” as the remaining period after the random number is displayed. That is, the first timer TM1 starts and displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2. The display of the linked image RM on the first timer TM1 allows the player to recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (after starting), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 executes a countdown for a while (double countdown effect). At this time, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes in accordance with the switching of each count. Thereafter, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0” as shown in FIG. 96 (G), a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 96 (H). In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and the first expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 96 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and the second expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A suggestion image is displayed. Note that the second expectation degree suggestion image EM1 may display a content with a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Moveable character timer effect B]
FIG. 97 is a view for explaining the movable role timer effect B. The movable role timer effect B is different from the movable role timer effect A in that the first timer TM1 is started from the time of display. The timer effects from FIG. 97 (A) to FIG. 97 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the movable character timer effect B, first, a timer image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol change effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image. 01 "to" 99 "seconds). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, a double countdown effect shown in FIG. 97 (B) is executed. Specifically, "17" is displayed on the first timer TM1 at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is displayed, "23" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started).

  The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 that have started (started) the countdown respectively display the linked image RM so as to be superimposed on the digital display part (number part). The linked image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numeral portion). The area of the linked image RM periodically changes in a manner like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numeral portion). Specifically, as shown in the timer count effect B in FIG. 93, the area of the linked image RM increases with the passage of time, and when the image area of the linked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion is displayed. In the (numerical part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (starts from zero again). As described above, the shape of the linked image RM changes constantly (the area increases) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when the count is switched to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one second). Each time), a constant change (increase in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the linked image RM can strongly impress the countdown on the player.

  During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), a movable character advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves (advance) upward from the retreat position. Thereby, a part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable role 14. During the movement of the first movable role 14, the lower half of the second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable role 14, and the second timer TM2 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second timer TM2. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue counting down. Therefore, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes according to the switching of each count.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), a movable role stationary effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves upward (moves) from the retracted position and then stops at the advanced position. As a result, almost the entire second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable role object 14, and the second timer TM2 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it. In addition, the second timer TM2 may be covered with the first movable auditors 14 and may be completely invisible, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue counting down.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), a movable character retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable role 14 moves downward (retreats) from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which is almost entirely covered by the first movable role 14, becomes visible again. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue counting down. Therefore, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes according to the switching of each count.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (F), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to count down again in a state where the whole is visible (double countdown effect). The linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 97 (H). In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and the first expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 97 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and the second expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A suggestion image is displayed. Note that the second expectation degree suggestion image EM1 may display a content with a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Moveable character timer effect C]
FIG. 98 is a view for explaining the movable role timer effect C. The movable role timer effect C differs from the movable role timer effect A in the number of displayed timers. The timer effects from FIG. 98 (A) to FIG. 98 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the movable character timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 98A, a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol change effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image. 01 "to" 99 "seconds). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, a random number display / countdown effect shown in FIG. 98 (B) is executed. Specifically, “22” is displayed at the time of the display of the second timer TM2, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of displaying (counting down is not started), and a random number is displayed. Here, the random number display means that numerical values between “00” and “99” are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the second timer TM2. Further, the third timer TM3 is displayed during the random number display / countdown effect. The third timer TM3 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period (here, “001” to “999” seconds) until a certain time is reached by countdown. Number). When the third timer TM3 is displayed, “100” is displayed as the remaining period, and then the countdown is started (started).

  On the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the linked image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numeral portion). The area of the linked image RM periodically changes in a manner like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numeral portion). Specifically, as shown in the timer count effect B in FIG. 93, the area of the linked image RM increases with the passage of time, and when the image area of the linked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion is displayed. In the (numerical part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (starts from zero again). As described above, the shape of the linked image RM changes constantly (the area increases) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when the count is switched to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one second). Each time), a constant change (increase in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the linked image RM can strongly impress the countdown on the player. The linked image RM is not displayed on the third timer TM3 that has started (started) the countdown. As a result, different characteristics can be provided for each timer, and the interest can be improved.

  During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), a movable character advance appearance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves (advance) upward from the retreat position. Thereby, a part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable role 14. During the movement of the first movable role 14, the third timer TM3 and the second timer TM2 are sequentially covered with the first movable role 14 from the bottom, and are in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize them. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet, and is displayed as a random number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), a movable role stationary effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves upward (moves) from the retracted position and then stops at the advanced position. Thus, the entirety of the third timer TM3 and almost the entirety of the second timer TM2 are covered by the first movable role object 14, and are in a state in which it is difficult to view them. In addition, the second timer TM2 may be covered with the first movable auditors 14 and may be completely invisible, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet, and is displayed as a random number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), a movable character retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable role 14 moves downward (retreats) from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2 and the third timer TM3, which are almost entirely covered by the first movable role 14, become visible again. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet, and is displayed as a random number.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (F), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the first timer TM1 starts counting (starts), the linked image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, the first timer TM1 displays “5” as the remaining period after the random number is displayed. That is, the first timer TM1 starts and displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 and the third timer TM3. The display of the linked image RM on the first timer TM1 allows the player to recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (after starting), each of the first timer TM1, the second timer TM2, and the third timer TM3 executes a countdown for a while (double countdown effect). At this time, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1, the second timer TM2, and the third timer TM3, and the area changes according to the switching of each count. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 98 (H). In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and the first expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 98 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and the second expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A suggestion image is displayed. Note that the second expectation degree suggestion image EM1 may display a content with a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1. Thereafter, the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, and the third expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the third expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first and second expectation degree suggestion effects, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third timer TM3 is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. The expected degree suggestion image is displayed.

[Moveable role timer effect D]
FIG. 99 is a view for explaining the movable role timer effect D. The movable role timer effect D is different from the movable role timer effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects from FIG. 99 (A) to FIG. 99 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the movable character timer effect D, first, a timer image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the second timer TM2 is displayed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the second timer TM2 is a bar-shaped meter and represents the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The second timer TM2 indicates that the remaining period of the meter decreases as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and indicates that a certain point of time has been reached when the remaining amount of the meter runs out (becomes zero). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when the point in time reaches a certain point, it is not always necessary to cause some change in display. Here, a certain time point means a time point at which an expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a point in time when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be a time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed. The second timer TM2 is displayed in a state where the meter is full at the time of display, and thereafter, the meter remaining amount starts to be reduced (starts).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), the first timer TM1 is displayed while the second timer TM2 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a bar-shaped meter, and represents a remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The first timer TM1 is displayed in a state where the meter is full at the time of display, and thereafter, the decrease of the remaining meter is started (started). The decreasing speed of the meter of the first timer TM1 (the changing speed of the remaining period) is the same as the decreasing speed of the meter of the second timer TM2. Note that the meter decreasing speed of the first timer TM1 (the speed at which the remaining period changes) may be faster than the meter of the second timer TM2.

  While the meter remaining amount of both the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is decreasing, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves (advance) upward from the retreat position. Thereby, a part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable role 14. During the movement of the first movable role 14, the lower half of the second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable role 14, and the second timer TM2 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second timer TM2. In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, the meter remaining amount continues to decrease.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), a movable character stationary effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves upward (moves) from the retracted position and then stops at the advanced position. As a result, almost the entire second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable role object 14, and the second timer TM2 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it. In addition, the second timer TM2 may be covered with the first movable auditors 14 and may be completely invisible, or may be partially visible. In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, the meter remaining amount continues to decrease.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), a movable character retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable role 14 moves downward (retreats) from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which is almost entirely covered by the first movable role 14, becomes visible again. In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, the meter remaining amount continues to decrease.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to decrease the meter remaining amount while the whole is visible again (double meter remaining amount reduction effect). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the first expectation degree suggestion effect is produced as shown in FIG. 99 (H). It is carried out. In the first degree-of-expectation suggestion effect, an image indicating the probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The first expected degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (I), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the second expectation degree suggestion effect is produced as shown in FIG. 99 (J). It is carried out. In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) of a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The second expected degree suggestion image is displayed. Note that the second expectation degree suggestion image EM1 may display a content with a higher jackpot expectation degree than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the movable role timer effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 99, a first effect in which the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect. And the second effect in which at least a part of the second timer TM2 becomes difficult to see due to the advance of the first movable role object 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, in the first effect, the second timer TM2 is started while the first timer TM1 is not started, and the second In the effect, the first timer TM1 has not been started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate the remaining period by the countdown of the digital display, and in the first effect, The first timer TM1 has not been started, a random number is displayed in digital display, the second timer TM2 is counting down, and in the second effect, the first timer TM1 has not been started, A random number is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96 and FIG. 98, after the second effect, the third effect in which the first movable auditorium 14 retreats and the second timer TM2 becomes visible. ,
After the third effect, the first timer TM1 is started, and the fourth effect in which the first timer TM1 displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 is executed. be able to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, after the fourth effect, the remaining time indicated by the first timer TM1 is displayed with the second timer TM2 indicating the remaining period. The fifth effect in which the period expires and the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, in the first effect, the linked image RM linked to the countdown of the two timers TM2 can be displayed by being superimposed on the two timers TM2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the movable role timer effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described movable character stationary effect (for example, FIG. 96 (D)), the second timer TM2 may be completely invisible due to the first movable character 14. Further, the second timer TM2 may be configured such that a plurality of difficult states are caused by the first movable accessory 14 moving up and down a plurality of times. In addition, the first movable role object 14 may be configured to make not only the second timer TM2 but also at least a part of the first timer TM1 difficult to view.
[Modification 2]
In the above-described timer effect, the first movable role 14 is configured so that at least a part of the second timer TM2 is difficult to visually recognize. However, for example, it may be configured such that at least a part of the second timer TM2 becomes invisible due to an accessory such as the second movable accessory 15 other than the first movable accessory 14.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 96 and 98, after the first timer TM1 is displayed, random numbers are displayed until the countdown starts. However, after the first timer TM1 is displayed, a display other than the random number display may be displayed until the countdown is started. For example, the first timer TM1 may be stopped at 88 after the display until the countdown is started.
[Modification 4]
The timer effect described above is executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). However, the above-described timer speed effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B5-1]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A movable machine that can advance over the entire surface of the display means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating a remaining period until a certain point in time is reached,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer that indicates a remaining period until a certain time point is reached,
A first effect in which the display section displays the first timer and the second timer;
A gaming machine capable of executing, after the first rendering, a second rendering in which at least a part of the second timer becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the advancement of the movable role.
◇ [Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
In the first effect, in a state where the first timer is not started, the second timer is started,
In the second effect, the first timer has not been started.
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-2,
The first timer and the second timer indicate a remaining period by a digital display countdown,
In the first effect, the first timer is not started, a random number is displayed on a digital display, and the second timer is counting down,
In the second effect, the first timer is not started, and the random number is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-3,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the movable role is retracted and the second timer becomes visible,
After the third effect, the first timer is started, and a fourth effect in which the first timer displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer. A gaming machine capable of executing
◇ [Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
After the fourth performance, in a state where the second timer is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the first timer is exhausted, and the position where the first timer was displayed is displayed. A gaming machine capable of executing a fifth effect in which the predetermined image is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-3 to B5-5,
In the first effect, it is possible to display a linked image that is linked to the countdown of the second timer so as to be superimposed on the second timer.

  The icon selection effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This icon selection effect can be executed during a change effect of a decorative symbol, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the icon selection effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon selection effect A]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for describing the icon selection effect A.
In this icon selection effect A, first, a first icon display effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. In the first icon display effect 1, an icon B62A, an icon B62B, and an icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display effect 1, a button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon B62, a star mark is associated with a character image in each icon. This star mark indicates the jackpot expectation degree, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation degree. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1 to 5. One star mark indicates that the jackpot expectation is very low, two star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and three star marks indicates that the jackpot expectation is medium. This means that four star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and that five star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is very high. The character image represents a type of reach effect to be developed from now on, and specifically suggests a reach effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. Further, the icon B62B indicates that the icon B62A has three star marks, and the expectation degree of the jackpot is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C each have a different icon image character, and thus have different reach effects of the suggested development destination. Each of the first icons B62 has a circular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), a second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which characters representing “NEXT” are represented. The character “NEXT” indicates that if the icon is selected in an icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. The second icon B63 has a square shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), an icon selection effect 1 is executed. The icon selection effect 1 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and to select a plurality of icons in order (the selected icons are indicated by hatching). ), One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 100C shows that the second icon B63 has been selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), an icon number change effect is executed. In this icon number change effect, an icon number decrease suggestion image B64 and a re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The icon re-selection suggestion image B65 is an image suggesting that the icon selection effect will be performed again next time, and the character “NEXT” is displayed. The character “NEXT” also indicates that the icon number change effect is a pseudo continuous effect. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 indicates that the number of icons is reduced in the next icon selection effect performed again.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), a first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, an icon B62A and an icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display 2, a button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is reduced by one as compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62C has disappeared.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), a second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), an icon selection effect 2 is executed. The icon selection effect 2 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (the icon B62A, the icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and to select a plurality of icons in order (the selected icon is indicated by hatching). ), One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 100 (G) shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 has been selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in the icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the effect is developed into a reach effect in which the character included in the icon B62B appears. In this reach effect, the icon B62B has three star marks, which suggests that the jackpot expectation degree is medium.
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect B.
In the icon selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 101A, a first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, an icon B62A, an icon B62B, and an icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display effect 1, a button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon B62, a star mark is associated with a character image in each icon. This star mark indicates the jackpot expectation degree, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation degree. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1 to 5. One star mark indicates that the jackpot expectation is very low, two star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and three star marks indicates that the jackpot expectation is medium. This means that four star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and that five star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is very high. The character image represents a type of reach effect to be developed from now on, and specifically suggests a reach effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. Further, the icon B62B indicates that the icon B62A has three star marks, and the expectation degree of the jackpot is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C each have a different icon image character, and thus have different reach effects of the suggested development destination. Each of the first icons B62 has a circular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), a second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which characters representing “NEXT” are represented. The character “NEXT” indicates that if the icon is selected in an icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. The second icon B63 has a square shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), an icon selection effect 1 is executed. The icon selection effect 1 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and to select a plurality of icons in order (the selected icons are indicated by hatching). ), One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 101C shows that the second icon B63 has been selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), an icon number change effect is executed. In the icon number change effect, an icon number increase suggestion image B66 and a re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The icon re-selection suggestion image B65 is an image suggesting that the icon selection effect will be performed again next time, and the character “NEXT” is displayed. The character “NEXT” also indicates that the icon number change effect is a pseudo continuous effect. The icon number increase suggestion image B66 indicates that the number of icons will increase in the next icon selection effect performed again.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), a first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, an icon B62A and an icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display 2, a button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is increased by one as compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62D is newly displayed. This icon B62D has five star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is extremely high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62D appears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), a second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), an icon selection effect 2 is executed. The icon selection effect 2 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C, icon B62D) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and to select a plurality of icons in order (the selected icon is indicated by hatching). ), One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 101G shows that the icon B62D of the first icon B62 has been selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in the icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62D is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the character effect included in the icon B62D is developed into a reach effect. This reach effect suggests that the jackpot expectation is very high because the icon B62D includes five star marks.
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect C]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for describing the icon selection effect C.
In the icon selection effect C, first, a first icon display effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. In the first icon display effect 1, an icon B62A, an icon B62B, and an icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display effect 1, a button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon B62, a star mark is associated with a character image in each icon. This star mark indicates the jackpot expectation degree, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation degree. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1 to 5. One star mark indicates that the jackpot expectation is very low, two star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and three star marks indicates that the jackpot expectation is medium. This means that four star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and that five star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is very high. The character image represents a type of reach effect to be developed from now on, and specifically suggests a reach effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. Further, the icon B62B indicates that the icon B62A has three star marks, and the expectation degree of the jackpot is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C each have a different icon image character, and thus have different reach effects of the suggested development destination. Each of the first icons B62 has a circular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), a second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, a square second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which characters representing “NEXT” are represented, and a star mark. The character “NEXT” indicates that if the icon is selected in an icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. The star mark indicates the jackpot expectation degree, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation degree. The number of star marks included in the second icon B63 is 1 to 5. One star mark indicates that the jackpot expectation is extremely low, two star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and three star marks indicates that the jackpot expectation is medium. When there are four star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is very high. The second icon B63 shown in FIG. 102 (B) has three star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is medium.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), an icon selection effect 1 is executed. The icon selection effect 1 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and to select a plurality of icons in order (the selected icons are indicated by hatching). ), One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 102 (C) shows that the second icon B63 has been selected. Since the selected second icon B63 has three star marks, this indicates that an effect with a medium expectation degree of jackpot will be performed in the future.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), an icon number change effect is executed. In this icon number change effect, an icon number decrease suggestion image B64 and a re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The icon re-selection suggestion image B65 is an image suggesting that the icon selection effect will be performed again next time, and the character “NEXT” is displayed. The character “NEXT” also indicates that the icon number change effect is a pseudo continuous effect. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 indicates that the number of icons is reduced in the next icon selection effect performed again.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), a first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, an icon B62A and an icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display 2, a button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is reduced by one as compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62C has disappeared.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), a second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed. In this case, the second icon B63 includes a star mark. The number of the star marks is three, as in the icon selection effect 1 in FIG. 102 (C), indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is medium.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), an icon selection effect 2 is executed. The icon selection effect 2 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (the icon B62A, the icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and to select a plurality of icons in order (the selected icon is indicated by hatching). ), One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 102 (G) shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 has been selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in the icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the effect is developed into a reach effect in which the character included in the icon B62B appears. The number of star marks (three) included in the icon B62B indicates that the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect is medium.
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect D]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for describing the icon selection effect D.
In the icon selection effect D, first, a first icon display effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. In the first icon display effect 1, an icon B62A, an icon B62B, and an icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display effect 1, a button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon B62, a star mark is associated with a character image in each icon. This star mark indicates the jackpot expectation degree, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation degree. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1 to 5. One star mark indicates that the jackpot expectation is very low, two star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and three star marks indicates that the jackpot expectation is medium. This means that four star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and that five star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is very high. The character image represents a type of reach effect to be developed from now on, and specifically suggests a reach effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. Further, the icon B62B indicates that the icon B62A has three star marks, and the expectation degree of the jackpot is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C each have a different icon image character, and thus have different reach effects of the suggested development destination. Each of the first icons B62 has a circular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), a second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, a square second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which characters representing “NEXT” are represented, and a star mark. The character “NEXT” indicates that if the icon is selected in an icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. The star mark indicates the jackpot expectation degree, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation degree. The number of star marks included in the second icon B63 is 1 to 5. One star mark indicates that the jackpot expectation is extremely low, two star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and three star marks indicates that the jackpot expectation is medium. When there are four star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is very high. The second icon B63 shown in FIG. 103 (B) has two star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), an icon selection effect 1 is executed. The icon selection effect 1 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and to select a plurality of icons in order (the selected icons are indicated by hatching). ), One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 103C shows that the second icon B63 has been selected. Since the selected second icon B63 has three star marks, this indicates that an effect with an expected degree of jackpot of medium or higher will be performed in the future.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), an icon number change effect is executed. In this icon number change effect, an icon number decrease suggestion image B64 and a re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The icon re-selection suggestion image B65 is an image suggesting that the icon selection effect will be performed again next time, and the character “NEXT” is displayed. The character “NEXT” also indicates that the icon number change effect is a pseudo continuous effect. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 indicates that the number of icons is reduced in the next icon selection effect performed again.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), a first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, an icon B62A and an icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display 2, a button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is reduced by one as compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62C has disappeared.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), a second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed. In this case, the second icon B63 includes a star mark. The number of the star marks is increased by one as compared with the icon selection effect 1 of FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), an icon selection effect 2 is executed. The icon selection effect 2 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (the icon B62A, the icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and to select a plurality of icons in order (the selected icon is indicated by hatching). ), One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 103 (G) shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 has been selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in the icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the effect is developed into a reach effect in which the character included in the icon B62B appears. In this reach effect, the icon B62B has three star marks, which suggests that the jackpot expectation degree is medium.
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the icon selection effect.
[Effect 1]
In the icon selection effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display of the first icon B62 and the display of the second icon B63 are performed, and one icon is selected from the first icon B62 and the second icon B63. When the icon selection effect 1 to be selected is performed and the second icon B63 is selected, the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 are displayed, and the icon selection effect 2 is performed again. According to this configuration, in the icon selection effect 1, when the second icon B63 different from the first icon B62 in which the jackpot expectation degree and the character are associated is selected, the icon selection effect 2 is performed again. Therefore, it is possible to amplify the sense of expectation of the jackpot while maintaining the player's expectation of the jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the icon selection effects A, C, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of the first icons B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is smaller than the number of the first icons B62 in the icon selection effect 1. According to this configuration, in the icon selection effect 2, the number of the first icons B62 is smaller than the number of the first icons B62 in the icon selection effect 1, so that the player can It is possible to make the user feel that the first icon B62 desired to be selected is easily selected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the icon selection effect 2. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the icon selection effects A, C, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of the first icons B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is one less than the number of the first icons B62 in the icon selection effect 1. . According to this configuration, in the icon selection effect 2, the number of the first icons B62 is one less than the number of the first icons B62 in the icon selection effect 1, so that the player selects the icon in the icon selection effect 2. Is suppressed, and the player can be made to feel that the first icon B62 that he / she wants to select is more likely to be selected, and the interest of the icon selection effect 2 is improved. Can be done. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the icon selection effects A, C, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the lowest jackpot expectation degree of the jackpot expectation suggestion display included in the icon of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is the icon selection effect. 1 is higher than the lowest jackpot expectation degree in the jackpot expectation degree suggestion display included in the icon of the first icon B62 in FIG. According to this configuration, the expectation of the jackpot is likely to be higher when the icon is selected in the icon selection effect 2 than in the icon selection effect 1. Expectation can be given. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the icon selection effects A and B of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second icon B63 in the icon selection effect 1 and the icon selection effect 2 does not include the indication of the jackpot expectation (star mark). According to this configuration, when the second icon B63 is selected, the next development is unknown, so that the player can be excited. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following describes a variation of the icon selection effect.
[Modification 1]
In the icon selection effect A of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, two or more icons may be reduced in the icon selection effect 2 compared to the icon selection effect 1. Further, in the icon selection effect B, in the icon selection effect 2, two or more icons may be increased as compared to the icon selection effect 1. In the icon selection effects A to D, a plurality of second icons B63 may be provided.

[Modification 2]
In the icon selection effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 may have the same icon shape. For example, both the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 may be circular. Further, the first icon B62 may have different shapes for the respective icons.

[Modification 3]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first icon display effect 2, the icon with the largest number of star marks among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1 (high jackpot expectation degree) An icon having more star marks (an icon having a high jackpot expectation) than an icon) may appear.
Further, in the icon selection effects A to D, in the first icon display effect 2, among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1, the icon with the least star mark (the icon with the lower jackpot expectation degree) is selected. An icon with many marks (an icon with a high jackpot expectation) may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first icon display effect 2, the icon with the least star mark (lower jackpot expectation degree) among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1 (Icon) and an icon having the same number of star marks (icon with a high jackpot expectation) may appear. Further, in the icon selection effects A to D, in the first icon display effect 2, among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1, the icon with the least star mark (the icon with the lower jackpot expectation degree) than the icon with the least star mark is displayed. An icon with a small number of marks (an icon with a high jackpot expectation) may be displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, each icon of the second icon B63 of the first icon display effect 2 uses the same character as each icon of the first icon B62 in the first icon display effect 1. You may use it as it is and increase or decrease the number of star marks.

[Modification 6]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the highest jackpot expectation degree of the jackpot expectation degree suggestion display included in the icon of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is the icon selection effect 1 You may make it higher than the highest jackpot expectation degree among the jackpot expectation degree indication displays included in the icon of the first icon B62. According to this configuration, when an icon is selected in the icon selection effect 2 rather than the icon selection effect 1, an icon having a very high jackpot expectation can be selected. Can give a great sense of expectation to the person. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 are not stars (stars) but numbers (for example, percentages), colors, patterns, icon sizes, and icon sizes. The jackpot expectation may be indicated by the density, the position of the icon, or the like.

[Modification 8]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 1, in the next icon selection effect 2, the star associated with the second icon B63 is selected. The number of marks may be configured to be equal to or more than the number of star marks of the second icon B63 selected in the icon selection effect 1. Further, in the icon selection effect 2, the first icon B62 of the star mark smaller than the star mark number of the second icon B63 may be configured not to be displayed. That is, the larger the number of icon selection effects, the higher the jackpot expectation may be.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of performing a first display that displays a plurality of icons including a character display indicating a development destination of a reach effect by a character and a jackpot expectation suggestion indicating a jackpot expectation. Yes,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second display that displays an icon different from the icon in the first display,
The third display effect performs the first display effect and the second display effect, and selects one icon from the first display icon and the second display icon. It is an effect of performing the first selection effect to be selected,
The fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect, and when the second display icon is selected in the first selection effect of the third display effect, the first display effect is performed. And the second display effect, and performing a second selection effect of selecting one icon from the first display icon and the second display icon. is there,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Application Example B6-2]
The gaming machine according to Application Example B6-1,
The number of icons of the first display in the second selection effect is smaller than the number of icons of the first display in the first selection effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Application Example B6-3]
A gaming machine according to Application Example B6-1 or Application Example B6-2,
The number of icons of the first display in the second selection effect is one less than the number of icons of the first display in the first selection effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Application Example B6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples B6-1 to B6-3,
The lowest jackpot expectation level among the jackpot expectation level suggestions included in the icon of the first display in the second selection effect is the jackpot included in the icon of the first display in the first selection effect. Higher than the lowest jackpot expectation in the expectation indication,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Application Example B6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of application examples B6-1 to B6-4,
The icon of the second display in the first selection effect does not include the jackpot expectation degree suggestion display,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The fluctuating effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. The effect during the fluctuation can be executed in connection with the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”). For example, it can be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, at the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like.

[Direction A during fluctuation]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the effect A during fluctuation.
In the changing effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 68 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), a transparent logo effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This transparent logo effect is a decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104 (A), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are still stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, a character (logo) image TLG1 of “G” is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The "G" logo image TLG1 is displayed in a mode in which the entirety of the logo image is colored blue and the logo has a low degree of transparency (has almost no transparency). In other words, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (B), the effect of indicating the jackpot expectation is indicated by the degree of transmission and the color of the “G” logo image TLG1. The degree is small (the jackpot expectation is blue <green <red).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the “G” logo image TLG1 shown in FIG. 104 (B) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again, and the decorative pattern change effect shown in FIG. 104 (A) is displayed. This shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array. In this example, “8 ↓ 8” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss design stop effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 104 (A) is a loss (reach loss) after reaching the reach in FIG. 104 (C). . In the present example, “858” is shown in the lost symbol arrangement.

  On the other hand, the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (E) may be executed instead of FIG. 104 (B). This transparent logo effect is a decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104 (A), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are still stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, a character (logo) image TLG2 of “G” is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In the “G” logo image TLG2, the outline of the logo is bordered by dark red, and the entire color is light red. As a result, the “G” logo image TLG2 is displayed in such a manner that the degree of transparency of the logo is large (the background behind can be almost visually recognized). In other words, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (E), the effect of indicating the jackpot expectation is indicated by the degree of transmission and the color of the “G” logo image TLG1, and the degree of transparency is large and the color is red and the big hit is expected. The degree is greater (the jackpot expectation is blue <green <red).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the “G” logo image TLG2 shown in FIG. 104 (E) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again, and the decorative design change effect shown in FIG. 104 (A) is displayed. This shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 104 (A) has hit after reaching the reach in FIG. 104 (F). In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
The jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 104 (G) is a case where the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (E) (an effect with a high red logo transparency and a high jackpot expectation effect) is performed. This is not always performed, and the loss symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (D) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (D) is performed when the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (B) (the effect of the blue logo has a low degree of transparency and a low jackpot expectation) is performed. However, the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 104 (G) may be performed at a predetermined probability without necessarily being performed.

  In other words, in the fluctuating effect A shown in FIG. 104, it is possible to execute a transparent logo effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating. The degree is changing. That is, in the logo image (character image) displayed in the transparent logo effect, the jackpot expectation is low when the logo transparency is low, and the jackpot expectation is high when the logo transparency is high. In a logo image (character image), the jackpot expectation is low when the logo is blue, and the jackpot expectation is high when the logo is red. In other words, when the variation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is a jackpot, a plurality of logos having different degrees of transparency as a jackpot suggesting effect are provided with a predetermined probability (a lottery using a random number or the like) during the variation. A predetermined transparent logo effect is performed from the type of transparent logo effect.

[Fluctuating production B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for describing the effect B during fluctuation.
In the fluctuating effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), a decorative design fluctuating effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 68 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), a transparent logo effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This transparent logo effect is a decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 105 (A), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are still stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, a character (logo) image TLG3 of “G” is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The “G” logo image TLG3 is displayed in a mode in which the entirety of the logo image is colored green and the degree of transparency of the logo is medium (semi-transparent, and the background behind is visible by about 50%). In other words, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B), the effect is to suggest the jackpot expectation by the transmission degree and color of the “G” logo image TLG3, and the transmission degree is medium and the color is green. And the jackpot expectation is moderate (the jackpot expectation is blue <green <red).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the “G” logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105 (B) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again, and the decorative pattern change effect shown in FIG. 105 (A) is displayed. This shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array. In this example, “8 ↓ 8” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss design stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 105 (A) is a loss (reach loss) after reaching the reach in FIG. 105 (C). . In the present example, “858” is shown in the lost symbol arrangement.

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 105 (B), a logo character movable effect shown in FIG. 105 (E) may be executed. In this logo character movable effect, the logo character LYA descends from the home position during the decorative design change effect shown in FIG. ing. The logo character LYA has the same “G” logo at the front end as the “G” logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105 (B). The whole is stopped almost at the center on the front side of the display screen 7a so as to be visible. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are deleted, and instead, a display effect is made as if the periphery of the “G” logo body is shining. This enhances the production effect. Note that the logo role LYA as a movable role shown in this drawing is provided as a part of the above-described panel movable role 15 (see FIG. 1).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), a transparent logo effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this transparent logo production, the logo character LYA rises until the “G” logo body, which has stopped at approximately the center of the front side of the display screen 7a, is about half hidden as shown in FIG. 105 (F). A character (logo) image TLG3 of “G” is displayed immediately below the “logo” in the center of the display screen 7a. The “G” logo image TLG3 is displayed in a mode in which the entirety of the logo image is colored green and the degree of transparency of the logo is medium (semi-transparent, and the background behind is visible by about 50%). The “G” logo image TLG3 is displayed in the same size as the “G” logo body. This enhances the production effect. That is, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B), the “G” logo image TLG3 is displayed in association with the movement of the logo combination LYA. Although the display of the “G” logo image TLG3 is the same as that shown in FIG. 105B, the jackpot expectation degree shown in FIG. ) Is higher than the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the “G” logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105 (F) is displayed for a predetermined period, the logo role LYA rises and returns to the home position, and the display screen 7a is switched again and FIG. The decorative design variation effect shown in A) is displayed, showing a state in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R have stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 105 (A) has hit after reaching the reach in FIG. 105 (G). In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
The jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 105 (H) is a case where the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (F) (the transparent logo effect performed in connection with the movement of the logo role LYA) is performed. However, it is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 105 (D) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, in the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 105 (D) described above, the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B) (a transparent logo effect not performed in connection with the movement of the logo role LYA) is performed. Even if it does, it is not necessarily performed, and the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 105 (H) may be performed with a predetermined probability.

  That is, in the fluctuating effect B shown in FIG. 105, it is possible to execute a transparent logo effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating. The degree of expectation of the jackpot changes depending on whether or not the movement is performed. In other words, when the logo image (character image) displayed in the transparent logo effect is displayed in connection with the movement of the movable auditorium, the jackpot expectation increases, and when the logo image (character image) is displayed regardless of the movement of the movable auditorium. Has a lower jackpot expectation. In other words, when the variation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is a big hit, the probability that the logo image is displayed in connection with the movement of the movable auditorium is irrespective of the movement of the movable auditorium. Will be higher than the probability of being displayed.

[Fluctuating production C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for describing the effect C during fluctuation.
In the fluctuating effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), a decorative design fluctuating effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 106A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in the decorative design variation effect, the display stage 7a is an effect stage displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and is a first stage as a background image HG1 with a motif of “mountain”. (Stay stage) is displayed. The effect stage is such that when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an effect stage selected from a plurality of effect stages having different background images is displayed (for example, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the symbol When the number of times reaches a predetermined number, when a predetermined time elapses, when a game state changes, when a player performs an effect stage selection operation, and the like.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), a reach symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach symbol stop effect is a decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 106 (A), and shows a state where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), a reach effect dedicated to the first stage is executed on the display screen 7a. This first stage exclusive reach effect is a dedicated reach effect corresponding to the first stage, which is performed only when the first stage is staying. In the first stage exclusive-reach production, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and the first stage-specific character CRA1 appears in the center of the display screen 7a. It is to direct. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 106 (A) has hit after reaching the reach in FIG. 106 (B). In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 106 (D) is not always performed, and a loss may occur at a predetermined probability.

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 106 (A), there may be a case where a decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 106 (E) is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 106 (E) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Also, in this decorative design variation effect, the display stage 7a is an effect stage displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and is a second stage as a background image HG2 with a “tree” motif. (Stay stage) is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), a reach symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach symbol stop effect is a decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 106 (E), in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (G), a reach effect dedicated to the second stage is executed on the display screen 7a. This second stage exclusive reach effect is a dedicated reach effect corresponding to the second stage, which is performed only when the second stage is staying. In the second stage-specific reach effect, a predetermined reach in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a and the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and the second stage-specific character CRA2 appears in the center of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to direct. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 106 (E) has hit after reaching the reach in FIG. 106 (F). In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 106 (H) is not always performed, and a loss may occur at a predetermined probability. However, there is a difference in the big hit expectation (big hit reliability) between the above-described first stage exclusive reach effect shown in FIG. 106 (C) and the second stage exclusive reach effect shown in FIG. 106 (G). Therefore, the expected value of the jackpot when the first-stage dedicated reach or the second-stage dedicated reach is performed is the same.

  That is, in the fluctuating effect C shown in FIG. 106, an effect stage in which a plurality of background images are selected from among effect stages different from each other is displayed as a staying stage. Exclusive reach production with no difference in the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) corresponding to the stage can be executed.

[Fluctuating production D]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for describing the effect A during fluctuation.
In the changing effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 68 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), a G zone entry effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G-zone entry effect is a decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 107 (A), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped. That is, the entry timing to the G zone in the G zone entry effect shown in FIG. 107 (B) is fluctuating before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop. When the display screen 7a is switched, a character image "G zone!" Is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. Note that the G zone is an effect accompanied by display of information indicating the jackpot expectation degree, and is a specific image effect in which the background, motif, and the like are different from the decorative design change effect shown in FIG. 107 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), a G zone fluctuation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone fluctuation effect is performed by switching the character image “G zone!” Shown in FIG. 107 (B). When the G zone fluctuation effect is executed, an upper telop (caption) UT and a lower telop (caption) ST flow on the upper and lower portions of the display screen 7a. In the upper telop UT, a horizontal band is displayed from the left end of the display screen 7a to the right end while being inclined upward in a tapered shape, and characters of "G zone" and "chance" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters “G zone” and “chance” repeatedly flow in the direction indicated by the arrow YAR (to the right). In the lower telop ST, a horizontal band is displayed from the right end of the display screen 7a to the left end while inclining upward in a tapered shape, and characters of "G zone" and "chance" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters “G zone” and “chance” repeatedly flow in the direction (leftward) indicated by the arrow YAL. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed between the upper telop UT and the lower telop ST. As shown in FIG. 107 (C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changing before stopping, and the change of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 107 (A) is the G zone change. This shows that the production is continuing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIGS. 107 (A) and 107 (C) has been lost. In the present example, “958” is shown in the lost symbol arrangement.

  On the other hand, after the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 107A is executed, the reach effect shown in FIG. 107E may be executed instead of FIG. 107B. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 107A, and as a result, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array. It shows the situation. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (F), a G zone entry effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone entry effect is the reach effect shown in FIG. 107 (E), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative symbol 8C is stopped. That is, the entry timing to the G zone in the G zone entry effect shown in FIG. 107 (F) is during reach before the decorative symbol 8C stops. That is, the timing of entry into the G zone shown in FIG. 107 (B) is fluctuating before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped, whereas the entry into the G zone shown in FIG. 107 (F) is changing. The timing is during reach after the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, a character image "G zone!" Is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (G), a G zone reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone reach effect is performed by switching the character image “G zone!” Shown in FIG. 107 (F). When the G zone reach effect is executed, an upper telop (caption) UT and a lower telop (caption) ST flow on the upper and lower portions of the display screen 7a. In the upper telop UT, a horizontal band is displayed over the right end while being tapered upward from the left end of the display screen 7a, and characters of "G zone" and "fever" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters “G zone” and “fever” repeatedly flow in the direction indicated by the arrow YAR (to the right). In the lower telop ST, a horizontal band is displayed from the right end of the display screen 7a to the left end while inclining upward in a tapered manner, and characters of "G zone" and "fever" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters “G zone” and “fever” flow repeatedly in the direction indicated by the arrow YAL (to the left). The reach effect is displayed between the upper telop UT and the lower telop ST. As shown in FIG. 107 (G), in the reach effect, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left end of the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right end, and a predetermined character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a. Will be directed. The predetermined reach effect is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (H), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 107 (A) is a big hit as a result of the reach effect of FIGS. 107 (E) and 107 (G). . In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 107 (H) is not always performed, and the loss design stop effect shown in FIG. 107 (D) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 107 (D) is not necessarily performed, and the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 107 (H) may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability of the jackpot confirmation effect being performed is that the timing of entry into the G zone is such that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped compared to when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fluctuating before stopping. The later reach is higher (the later the entry timing into the G zone, the higher the probability of the jackpot confirmation effect being performed), and the character in the telop in the G zone effect is "Fever" Is higher.

  That is, in the fluctuating effect D shown in FIG. 107, it is possible to execute a zone effect accompanied by the display of information indicating the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is determined by the timing of entry into the G zone and the character display in the G zone. It changes according to the content of That is, when the variation results of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a big hit, the probability that the entry timing to the G zone is delayed is high, and the character in the telop in the effect of the G zone is “fever”. Is higher.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect during fluctuation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, it is possible to execute display of a certain character image or mark image as the first display, and the first effect is the display of the first display. The effect is to change the degree of transmission of the image, and to provide an effect indicating the expectation of the jackpot based on the degree of transmission of the first display image. According to this configuration, the jackpot expectation changes due to the difference in the degree of transmission of the first display image, and thus the player is delighted with the difference in the degree of transmission of the first display image. Also, by displaying the first display image with various degrees of transmission, it is possible to easily change the jackpot expectation variously. Further, as shown in the fluctuating effect B, the first display image is displayed in association with the movement of the movable auditorium, or the color scheme of the first display image is related to the degree of transmission, thereby achieving the jackpot expectation degree. Can also be changed. In particular, by making the movable role and the first display image the same, it is possible to give more relevance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the jackpot expectation degree is configured to increase as the degree of transmission of the first display image increases. According to this configuration, when the first display image is displayed as an image having a high degree of transparency, the player can play the game with great expectation. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, it is possible to execute the display of the effect stage in which a plurality of background images are selected from among the effect stages different from each other as the second display. Is configured to perform a dedicated reach corresponding to the production stage displayed in the second display. According to this configuration, since the dedicated reach specialized for each of the production stages is provided, the player can easily determine the production stage in which he / she is currently staying by looking at the dedicated reach. . For example, if the game state is associated with the production stage, the player can easily determine the current game state simply by looking at the exclusive reach. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, each of the exclusive reach corresponding to the effect stage has a configuration in which there is no difference in the jackpot expectation degree. According to this configuration, the player can have a sense of expectation for a jackpot regardless of the stage where the exclusive reach is performed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, it is possible to execute display of a certain zone effect accompanied by display of information indicating the jackpot expectation degree as the third display. It is possible to execute an effect that enters the zone effect at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot expectation degree is configured to change according to the inrush timing of the zone effect. According to this configuration, the jackpot expectation degree changes at the timing of entering the zone production, so that the player is delighted with the difference in the timing of entering the zone production. Further, by performing the timing of entering the zone effect at various timings, it is possible to easily change the jackpot expectation variously. Furthermore, by associating the timing of entering the zone production with the information display of the jackpot expectation suggested in the zone production, it is possible to change the jackpot expectation in various ways. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the effect during fluctuation will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 105, the first display having different degrees of transmission is shown as a character (logo) image of “G”. It is not limited to this. For example, instead of a character (logo) image, the first display may be a symbol or mark, or an image of a specific shaped object or article.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the degree of expectation of the jackpot changes according to the degree of transparency or coloration of the first display, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the degree of expectation of the jackpot may be changed depending on the size of the first display, the number of the first display, or the display timing.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, each of the plurality of effect stages has a dedicated reach effect corresponding to each effect stage, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not something. For example, a plurality of dedicated reach effects may be performed on one effect stage, or the number of exclusive reach effects set in each effect stage may be different.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, the difference in the timing of entry into the zone effect suggests the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the content of the hold may be read in advance, and the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuation related to the hold may be indicated by a difference in the entry timing to the zone effect. In this way, it is possible to indicate the jackpot expectation over a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, the entry timing to the zone effect is shown in the during-fluctuation effect D shown in FIG. 107 during the symbol change and during the reach, for example, at the start of the symbol change, at the end of the symbol change, immediately after the reach, and It may be during reach or the like.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, in the zone effect, the characters indicating the jackpot expectation displayed on the upper telop and the lower telop are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not something. For example, the characters displayed in the upper telop and the lower telop may be different. By doing so, the jackpot expectation degree can be further changed by the combination of the characters displayed in the upper telop and the lower telop.
In addition, the characters displayed on the telop flow in the horizontal band of the telop, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot expectation degree is extremely high, the characters displayed on the telop may be displayed larger than the horizontal band of the telop. Alternatively, the horizontal band itself may be deleted and only the characters may be displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B7-1]
Production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming machine with
One of the plurality of indications is a first indication;
The first display is a display of a certain character image or mark image,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect that changes the degree of transmission of the first display image, and is an effect that indicates a jackpot expectation degree by the degree of transmission of the first display image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect B7-2]
The jackpot expectation degree is higher as the degree of transmission of the first display image is higher,
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1, wherein:
[Aspect B7-3]
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display of the effect stage selected from a plurality of effect stages different background images,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect of performing a dedicated reach corresponding to the effect stage displayed in the second display,
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1 or aspect B7-2.
[Aspect B7-4]
Each of the dedicated reach corresponding to the production stage, there is no difference in the jackpot expectation,
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-3, wherein:
[Aspect B7-5]
One of the plurality of indications is a third indication,
The third display is a display of a certain zone effect accompanied by a display of information indicating the jackpot expectation degree,
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that enters the zone effect at a predetermined timing,
The jackpot expectation degree changes depending on the entry timing of the zone effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes B7-1 to B7-4, characterized in that:

  The character display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This character display effect is an effect in which characters (including kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabets, numbers, symbols, marks, and the like) displayed on the display screen are displayed in a predetermined mode, and the gaming state becomes a predetermined state. It can be executed when it is done.

[Character display effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for describing the character display effect A.
In the character display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), a decorative design change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 108A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), a display effect that runs off the number of rounds is executed on the display screen 7a. When the big hit occurs, the display of the big hit symbol array “777” shown in FIG. 108 (B) is switched to the round display RSH indicating the current round number of the big hit shown in FIG. 108 (C). In this round-number-protruding display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of rounds is displayed in the round display RSH so as to protrude from the display screen 7a. That is, among the displays of "16R" indicating the number of rounds of the current jackpot, the numeral 16 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and a part of the lower end protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 108 (C). Have been. Note that R in the display of “16R” is displayed at the lower right of the numeral 16 in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), a display effect in which the number of balls protrudes is displayed on the display screen 7a. The display effect for displaying the number of protruding balls is switched from the screen of the round display RSH indicating the number of rounds shown in FIG. It is a production. In this number-of-projected-ball display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of projected balls is displayed in the jackpot-displayed number suggestion display DSH in such a manner as to protrude from the display screen 7a. In other words, of "2200 MAX" indicating the number of payouts of the current jackpot, the numeral 2200 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end thereof is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 108 (D). (The left end 2 is also displayed with a part of the left end protruding from the display screen 7a). MAX in the display of “2200 MAX” is displayed below the number of 2200 in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit of the number of payouts in this 16R jackpot.

  In other words, in the character display effect A shown in FIG. 108, a part of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-balls-indicated display DSH when the jackpot is reached as the character display related to the jackpot is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a protruding manner.

[Character display effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B.
In the character display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 109A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), a display effect that runs off the number of rounds is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, the display of the jackpot symbol array “777” shown in FIG. 109 (B) is switched to the round display RSH indicating the number of rounds of the current jackpot shown in FIG. 109 (C). In this round-number-protruding display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of rounds is displayed in the round display RSH so as to protrude from the display screen 7a. That is, among the displays of "16R" indicating the number of rounds of the current jackpot, the numeral 16 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and a part of the lower end are displayed off the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109 (C). Have been. Note that R in the display of “16R” is displayed at the lower right of the numeral 16 in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (D), a display effect is executed on the display screen 7a in which the number of balls protrudes is displayed. The display effect of the number of protruding balls is switched from the screen of the round display RSH indicating the number of rounds shown in FIG. 109 (C), and a display of the number of hits of jackpots DSH indicating the number of payouts of the current jackpot is displayed. It is a production. In this number-of-projected-ball display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of projected balls is displayed in the jackpot-displayed number suggestion display DSH in such a manner as to protrude from the display screen 7a. That is, of "2200 MAX" indicating the number of balls to be hit at this time, the number of 2200 is displayed in large size, and a part of the upper end thereof is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109 (D). (The left end 2 is also displayed with a part of the left end protruding from the display screen 7a). MAX in the display of “2200 MAX” is displayed below the number of 2200 in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit of the number of payouts in this 16R jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (E), on the display screen 7a, a fever V protruding display effect is executed. This fever V protruding display effect is switched from the screen of the jackpot payout number suggestion display DSH indicating the number of jackpots shown in FIG. 109 (D), and a jackpot suggestion display FEHV indicating that the jackpot has been achieved. This is an effect to be displayed. In the Fever V overhang display effect, a part of a specific character of a character string (alphabet) suggesting a big hit is displayed in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV so as to protrude from the display screen 7a. In other words, of "FEVER" indicating that a big hit has occurred this time, only the letter V is displayed in an enlarged manner, and the upper end and a part of the lower end protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109 (E). Is displayed. In the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the V character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a covers a part of another character (a character E which is adjacent to the V) constituting the character string. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (F), a right-hit V winning instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot this time is the above-mentioned 16RV passing scheduled jackpot, and in this right-handed V prize instruction production, the V opening / closing member 71 is long opened and the passage to the V region 39 in the first big prize entrance 30 becomes easy. This is done at the start of a round game. In the right-handed V winning instruction effect, a message MGL including the character “Aim for V!” Is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the message MGL is such that the character “V” is larger than other characters. (About twice). Above the message MGL, a right-handed arrow YAR1 for urging the player to right-hand is displayed, and in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR1, a message MGU1 consisting of the characters "right-handed" is displayed. . The player is prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR <b> 1 and makes a right-handed shot so that a game ball can be awarded in the V region 39 in the first special winning opening 30.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (G), a V-rendering display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This V-protruding display effect is performed when a game ball passes through the V region 39 in a round game in which the passage to the V region 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is easy. That is, when the game ball passes through the V region 39, the screen is switched from the right-handed V winning instruction effect screen shown in FIG. 109 (F) and the game ball passes through the V region 39. This is an effect of displaying a suggested V region passage suggestion display VRH. In the V-extended display effect, a part of a single character indicating that the game ball has passed through the V-region 39 is displayed in the V-region passing suggestion display VRH in such a manner as to protrude from the display screen 7a. That is, a letter “V” indicating that the game ball has passed through the V region 39 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and a part of the lower end thereof are protruded from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. ing.

  In other words, in the character display effect B shown in FIG. 109, a part of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-ball-out suggestion display DSH when the jackpot is reached is displayed from the display screen 7a as the character display related to the jackpot. It is displayed in a protruding manner. In addition, as a character display related to the jackpot, a part of specific characters in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV indicating that a jackpot has been reached is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a. Further, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, a specific character enlarged and displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a is displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character string. Further, as a character display related to the jackpot, a part of the character in the V region passage suggestion display VRH indicating that the game ball has passed the V region 39 is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a.

[Character display effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 110 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 110 (A) has a jackpot. In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), a display effect that runs off the number of rounds is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, the display of the jackpot symbol array “777” shown in FIG. 110 (B) is switched to the round display RSH indicating the current round number of jackpots shown in FIG. 110 (C). In this round-number-protruding display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of rounds is displayed in the round display RSH so as to protrude from the display screen 7a. That is, among the displays of "16R" indicating the number of rounds of the current jackpot, the numeral 16 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and a part of the lower end are displayed off the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110 (C). Have been. Note that R in the display of “16R” is displayed at the lower right of the numeral 16 in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), a display effect is performed on the display screen 7a in which the number of balls protrudes is displayed. The display effect of the number of protruding balls is switched from the round display RSH screen showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 110 (C) to display a jackpot number suggestion display DSH indicating the present number of jackpots. It is a production. In this number-of-projected-ball display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of projected balls is displayed in the jackpot-displayed number suggestion display DSH in such a manner as to protrude from the display screen 7a. That is, of "2200 MAX" indicating the number of balls to be hit at this time, the number of 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end thereof is protruded from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110 (D) and displayed. (The left end 2 is also displayed with a part of the left end protruding from the display screen 7a). MAX in the display of “2200 MAX” is displayed below the number of 2200 in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit of the number of payouts in this 16R jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (E), a fever-barrel display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This fever breach display effect is performed by switching from the screen of the jackpot payout number suggestion display DSH indicating the number of jackpot payouts shown in FIG. 110 (D). In this fever variability display effect, a character string (alphabet) indicating that a jackpot has been detected is moved and displayed one character at a time. In other words, the character string of "FEVER" indicating that a big hit has occurred this time is moved from the near side to the far side of the display screen 7a and is displayed with the characters being separated one by one. As shown in FIG. 110 (E), the character string of “FEVER” is separated from the near side to the far side of the display screen 7a by separating each character in the order of “R”, “E”, “V”, “E”, and “F”. Is displayed while swinging. Therefore, in FIG. 110 (E), “R” moved and displayed first is displayed smallest and “F” moved and displayed last is displayed largest. This "F" is displayed with a part of its lower end protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110 (E). In other words, when the characters to be moved and displayed one by one at a time are located on the near side of the display screen 7a, a part of the characters is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (F), an overall fever reduction display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this fever overall reduced display effect, the characters “R”, “E”, “V”, “E”, and “F” are displayed on the display screen 7a as a result of execution of the fever dispersal display effect shown in FIG. After all the characters are moved to the back side and reduced and displayed, they are arranged to form a character string "FEVER", and all characters are entirely displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the overall fever reduction display effect is an effect that displays the jackpot suggestion display FEHS that indicates that a big hit has occurred. In the big hit suggestion display FEHS, as shown in FIG. 110 (F), all characters are reduced and displayed almost at the approximate center of the display screen 7a. However, of "FEVER", only the letter V is displayed larger than the other letters, and the other letters are displayed in the same size.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (G), the display screen 7a executes an enlarged display effect in which the fever V runs off. In the Fever V-extended display effect, the character string of “FEVER” which is reduced to approximately the center in the display screen 7a and displayed as a whole in the Fever-wide reduced display effect shown in FIG. This is an effect in which the display screen 7a is integrally moved and displayed from the back side to the front side and enlarged and displayed. In other words, the Fever V protruding enlarged display effect is an effect of displaying the jackpot suggestion display FEHV indicating that a jackpot has been achieved. The jackpot suggestion display FEHV is displayed by enlarging only the letter V in “FEVER” indicating that the jackpot has been detected, like the jackpot suggestion display FEHS shown in FIG. Part of the lower end is displayed off the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110 (G). In the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the V character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a covers a part of another character (a character E which is adjacent to the V) constituting the character string. Is displayed.

  That is, in the character display effect C shown in FIG. 110, a part of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-yield-suggestion display DSH as the character display related to the big hit is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a protruding manner. In addition, a jackpot suggestion display FEHS indicating a jackpot as a character display related to the jackpot is displayed in a reduced size on the display screen 7a in which all characters are reduced and all characters are displayed. It is designed to be enlarged and displayed. In addition, the jackpot suggestion display FEHV that indicates that a jackpot has been reached as a character display related to the jackpot is displayed in such a manner that the jackpot suggestion display FEHS is enlarged and a part of specific characters protrude from the display screen 7a. It is displayed. Further, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, a specific character enlarged and displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a is displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character string.

[Character display effect D]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 111A, a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 111A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 111 (A) is a jackpot. In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), a display effect that runs off the number of rounds is executed on the display screen 7a. When the big hit occurs, the display of the big hit symbol array “777” shown in FIG. 111B is switched to the round display RSH indicating the number of rounds of the current big hit shown in FIG. 111C. In this round-number-protruding display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of rounds is displayed in the round display RSH so as to protrude from the display screen 7a. That is, among the displays of “16R” indicating the number of rounds of the current jackpot, the numeral 16 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and a part of the lower end are displayed off the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111 (C). Have been. Note that R in the display of “16R” is displayed at the lower right of the numeral 16 in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), a display effect is performed on the display screen 7 a in which the number of payouts is extended. This display of the number of protruding balls is switched from the screen of the round display RSH indicating the number of rounds shown in FIG. 111 (C) to display a jackpot number suggestion display DSH indicating the present number of jackpots. It is a production. In this number-of-projected-ball display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of projected balls is displayed in the jackpot-displayed number suggestion display DSH in such a manner as to protrude from the display screen 7a. That is, of the “2200 MAX” that indicates the number of payouts at the current jackpot, the numeral 2200 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end thereof is displayed outside the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111 (D). (The left end 2 is also displayed with a part of the left end protruding from the display screen 7a.) MAX in the display of “2200 MAX” is displayed below the number of 2200 in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit of the number of payouts in this 16R jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (E), a fever-barrel display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This fever breach display effect is performed by switching from the screen of the big hit payout number suggestion display DSH indicating the number of big payouts shown in FIG. 111 (D). In this fever variability display effect, a character string (alphabet) indicating that a jackpot has been detected is moved and displayed one character at a time. In other words, the character string of "FEVER" indicating that a big hit has occurred this time is moved from the near side to the far side of the display screen 7a and is displayed with the characters being separated one by one. As shown in FIG. 111 (E), the character string of “FEVER” is separated from the near side to the far side of the display screen 7a by separating each character in the order of “R”, “E”, “V”, “E”, and “F”. Is displayed while swinging. Therefore, in FIG. 111 (E), “R” moved and displayed first is displayed smallest and “F” moved and displayed last is displayed largest. This "F" is displayed with a part of its lower end protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111 (E). In other words, when the characters to be moved and displayed one by one at a time are located on the near side of the display screen 7a, a part of the characters is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (F), an overall fever reduced rotation display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this fever overall reduced rotation display effect, the characters "R", "E", "V", "E", and "F" are displayed on the display screen 7a as a result of execution of the fever dispersal display effect shown in FIG. After being moved all the way to the back side and reduced and displayed, it is arranged to form a character string "FEVER" and display all the characters entirely on the display screen 7a. In other words, the overall fever reduced rotation display effect is an effect that displays the jackpot suggestion display FEHS indicating that a big hit has occurred. In the big hit suggestion display FEHS, as shown in FIG. 111 (F), all characters are reduced and displayed almost at the approximate center of the display screen 7a. However, of "FEVER", only the letter V is displayed larger than the other letters, and the other letters are displayed in the same size. Then, in the big hit suggestion display FEHS, after all the characters are reduced and displayed substantially at substantially the center in the display screen 7a, the FEHS is horizontally rotated at the same position as shown by the arrow YA.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (G), the display screen 7a executes an enlarged display effect in which the fever V runs off. In this Fever V enlarged display effect, the character string of “FEVER” which is reduced to approximately the center in the display screen 7a and entirely displayed by the Fever whole reduced rotation display effect shown in FIG. This is an effect in which the display is stopped, and conversely, the display screen 7a is integrally moved and displayed from the back side to the front side to be enlarged and displayed. In other words, the Fever V protruding enlarged display effect is an effect of displaying the jackpot suggestion display FEHV indicating that a jackpot has been achieved. The jackpot suggestion display FEHV is displayed by enlarging only the letter V in “FEVER” indicating that a jackpot has been detected, similarly to the jackpot suggestion display FEHS shown in FIG. Part of the lower end is displayed off the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111 (G). In the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the V character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a covers a part of another character (a character E which is adjacent to the V) constituting the character string. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (H), a fever display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This fever V display effect is an effect of reducing the character of V displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a, in an enlarged display effect of the fever V shown in FIG. 111 (G). In other words, the fever display effect is an effect that displays the jackpot suggestion display FEH indicating that a jackpot has been achieved. The jackpot suggestion display FEH is displayed in such a manner that the character of V protruding from the display screen 7a shown in FIG. 111 (G) is reduced, and all character strings (“FEVER”) fit within the display screen 7a. However, of "FEVER", only the letter V is displayed larger than the other letters, and the other letters are displayed in the same size. Then, in the jackpot suggestion display FEH, the character V is displayed so as not to cover a part of other characters (the character E adjacent to the V) forming the character string.

  That is, in the character display effect D shown in FIG. 111, a part of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-ball-out suggestion display DSH when the jackpot is reached is displayed as the character display related to the jackpot from the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a protruding manner. In addition, a jackpot suggestion display FEHS indicating a jackpot as a character display related to the jackpot is displayed in a reduced size on the display screen 7a in which all characters are reduced and all characters are displayed. It is designed to be enlarged and displayed. In addition, the jackpot suggestion display FEHV that indicates that a jackpot has been reached as a character display related to the jackpot is displayed in such a manner that the jackpot suggestion display FEHS is enlarged and a part of specific characters protrude from the display screen 7a. It is displayed. Further, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, a specific character enlarged and displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a is displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character string. The jackpot suggestion display FEH, which indicates that the jackpot has become a jackpot, is displayed as a character display related to the jackpot, in which the specific characters protruding from the display screen 7a of the jackpot suggestion display FEHV are reduced and displayed, and all character strings are displayed. It is displayed in such a manner that it fits within the screen 7a. However, in the jackpot suggestion display FEH, a specific character is displayed so as to be larger than other characters, and is displayed so as not to cover other characters constituting the character string.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect during fluctuation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108 to FIG. 111, a character display related to a jackpot can be executed as the first display. , It can be displayed in a manner that it protrudes from the display screen. According to this configuration, the character display related to the jackpot can be appealed to the player in an extremely high impact mode. Therefore, a player is less likely to overlook a character display related to a jackpot which is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, the character display is composed of a plurality of characters, and the first effect is to enlarge a specific character in the character display from the display screen. It is configured to display in a protruding mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to appeal a specific character in the character display related to the jackpot to the player in a very high impact mode. Therefore, a player is less likely to overlook a character display related to a jackpot which is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to make a specific character a prominent shape or color scheme to further appeal to the player.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, a specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen is displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character display. It is a configuration that can be performed. According to this configuration, only a specific character in the character display related to the jackpot can be intensely appealed to the player in an extremely powerful manner. Therefore, a player is less likely to overlook a character display related to a jackpot which is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to make a specific character a prominent shape or color scheme to further appeal to the player.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111, the second effect is to display a character display composed of a plurality of characters with the display screen separated by one character, and then display the display screen. It is possible to display all the characters in the whole, and the first effect is configured to be performed after the second effect. According to this configuration, a character display including a plurality of characters related to the jackpot can be appealed to the player in an extremely powerful manner. Therefore, a player is less likely to overlook a character display related to a jackpot which is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the third effect is performed after the first effect, and a specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen in the first effect is displayed. This is an effect of reducing the display to fit within the display screen. In a mode in which a specific character is reduced and displayed, the character is displayed larger than other characters forming the character display. According to this configuration, even if a specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen is reduced, the character is displayed larger than other characters constituting the character display. Among the characters can be appealed to the player in a very high impact manner. Therefore, a player is less likely to overlook a character display related to a jackpot which is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to make a specific character a prominent shape or color scheme to further appeal to the player.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the effect during fluctuation will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, a specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen is displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen may be displayed so as to cover all other characters constituting the character display.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108 to FIG. 111, the numbers of “2200 MAX” indicating the number of jackpots are displayed in such a manner that all the numbers protrude from the display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the numbers of “2200 MAX” may be displayed in such a manner that only some of the numbers protrude from the display screen (for example, a part of 2 displayed on the left end protrudes from the display screen). Display in a manner). Further, although MAX is made to fit within the display screen, the present invention is not limited to this, and all or some characters of MAX are displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen. Is also good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, in the right-handed V winning instruction effect, the V opening / closing member 71 is long opened at the scheduled V passing jackpot, and the V region 39 in the first winning opening 30 is provided. Is performed at the start of a round game in which passing through is easy, that is, the V prize remaining time notification effect is performed on a game machine commonly called a V-ST machine. It is not limited to. For example, a right-handed V-prize instruction production is performed when a two-type attacker having a V region is opened by hitting at a variable starting opening (special 2), that is, performed by a game machine generally called a one-type two-type mixer. You may do so.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108 to FIG. 111, a part of the characters in the character display is displayed in a manner protruding from one display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, an image display device is provided with a first display screen arranged on the near side and a second display screen arranged on the rear side, and characters displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen are displayed on the first display screen. May be displayed. In this way, characters that protrude from the display screen are displayed closer to the player, and can be strongly appealed to the player in an extremely powerful manner. Note that the image display device having the first display screen and the second display screen may be configured to be able to display a stereoscopic image (3D). This makes it possible to further appeal to the player by displaying the characters that protrude from the display screen in 3D.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a part of the characters in the character display related to the jackpot is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen. However, it is not limited to this. For example, characters to be displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen are characters that instruct the operation of the effect button (for example, press, push, and continuous hitting) or characters that instruct the right-handing (for example, A part of characters in the character display related to the game instruction may be displayed in such a manner as to protrude from the display screen.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C1-1]
Production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming machine with
One of the plurality of indications is a first indication;
The first display is a character display related to a jackpot,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
In the first effect, a part of the characters in the character display may be displayed in a manner protruding from a display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect C1-2]
The character display includes a plurality of characters,
The first effect is to display a specific character of the character display in an enlarged manner so as to protrude from the display screen,
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1, wherein:
[Aspect C1-3]
The specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen may be displayed so as to cover some or all of the other characters constituting the character display,
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2, wherein:
[Aspect C1-4]
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect in which the character display composed of the plurality of characters is displayed on the display screen with one character at a time, and then all characters are entirely displayed in the display screen.
The first production is performed after the second production,
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2 or aspect C1-3.
[Aspect C1-5]
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect performed after the first effect,
The third effect is an effect in which the specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen in the first effect is reduced and displayed so as to fit within the display screen,
In the aspect in which the specific character is displayed in a reduced size, the specific character is displayed larger than other characters constituting the character display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-2 to C1-4, wherein:

  In the following, with reference to FIGS. This hold-in-consecutive-chan suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game in relation to the contents of the hold. For example, during the jackpot game, the content of the hold is pre-read, and if there is a jackpot in the content of the hold, it may be executed during the round game, during the ending, or immediately after the end of the jackpot game.

[Representative Chang's suggestion effect A]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A.
In the pending-in consecutive-chair suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, FIG. 112 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. In addition, in the decorative design variation effect shown in FIG. 112 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the reserved number of the first special symbol is “3” and the reserved number of the second special symbol is “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 112 (A) has a jackpot. In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is performed. In the jackpot game, first, a predetermined opening effect indicating start of the jackpot game (round game) is performed on the display screen 7a, and then a round game effect is executed. It has become. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 112 (C), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown at the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, “5R” is shown), and at the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed. Also, in this round game production, the number of holds H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the number of holds H1 is increased by one and changed from “3” to “4”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), on-screen display 7a executes a pending-in-consecutive-chan suggestion effect. In this hold-in-representative Chang suggestion effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates “8R”, and the hold numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same “4” and “0” as before. I have. In addition, in this hold-in-consecutive-chan suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), when a game ball wins in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during the round game, the holding that has occurred during the jackpot game is performed. Sound effect KM indicating that there is a jackpot, that is, suggesting that the reserved in-line chunk is to be emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, the effect sound “Tallary Lara” is shown). The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening arranged at the lower right of the gaming area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30. Therefore, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when the player strikes right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (E), a predetermined ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game (round game) is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ending effect, the numbers of reservations H1 and H2 indicate "4" and "0" which are the same as before.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (F), a suspended digestive design symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this pending digestion decorative symbol variation effect, a decorative effect is varied based on the reservation occurring during the jackpot game, thereby sequentially extinguishing the reservation occurring during the jackpot game. 112 (F), the reserved number H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the reserved number H1 has decreased from “4” to “2”. In other words, this reserved digest decoration symbol variation effect shows a state in which two of the first special symbol are retained from the ending effect (the big hit game end) shown in FIG. 112 (E). That is, the fluctuating effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 112 (F) correspond to the second reserved symbol of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner as shown in FIG. 112 (F). This indicates that the vehicle has stopped. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (H), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 112 (F) has resulted in a hit as a result of the reach effects of FIGS. 112 (E) and 112 (G). . In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 112 (H) is not always performed, and a loss may occur at a predetermined probability.

  In other words, in the holding-in-representative-chance suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 112, when a specific winning port (in this example, a normal winning port (general winning port) 29) is won during the jackpot game, it is related to the winning. As a result, a predetermined sound effect KM is emitted from the speaker 67, and this sound effect KM indicates that there is a big hit in the hold generated during the big hit game, that is, an effect indicating the on-hold consecutive chan. ing.

[Representative Chang's suggestion production B]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the pending-in-consecutive-chan suggestion effect B.
In the pending in-sequence Chang suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 113A, a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is performed. In the jackpot game, first, a predetermined opening effect indicating start of the jackpot game (round game) is performed on the display screen 7a, and then a round game effect is executed. It has become. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 113 (A), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown at the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, “5R” is shown), and at the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed.
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 113 (A), H1 indicates “4” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the reserved number of the first special symbol is “4” and the reserved number of the second special symbol is “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), the on-representation consecutive Chang suggestion 1 effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this hold-in-representation suggestion 1 effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates "8R", and the hold numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before. ing. In addition, in this one-representation of a held in-consecutive-chan suggestion, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), if a game ball wins in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during the round game, it occurs during the big hit game. A line SM1 indicating that there is a jackpot in the reservation, that is, a line indicating the in-reserved consecutive channel, is emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, a line saying “Maybe a chance!” Is shown). The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening arranged at the lower right of the gaming area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30. Therefore, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when the player strikes right. In addition, in the holding-in-representing-chan suggestion 1 effect, a line SM1 (“Chance may be!”) Indicating the holding-in-representing channel issued by the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as a line display SMH1. . The dialogue display SMH1 enables the player to recognize the suggestion of the pending consecutive chunks even if the player misses the dialogue SM1.

  On the other hand, after the round game effect shown in FIG. 113 (A) is executed, there may be a case where the in-reserved consecutive-chan suggestion 2 effect shown in FIG. 113 (C) is executed instead of FIG. 113 (B). In the 2nd effect of suggestion of the in-reserved consecutive chan, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates "8R", and the numbers of reservations H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before. ing. In addition, in the 2nd suggestion of the in-reserved consecutive chan, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), if a game ball wins in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during the round game, it occurs during the jackpot game. A line SM2 indicating that there is a jackpot in the reservation, that is, a line indicating the reserved internal chan is emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, a line saying "It's not over!" Is shown). I have. Further, in the holding-in-representing-chan suggestion 2 effect, the line SM1 (“still not finished!”) Indicating the holding-in-representing channel issued by the speaker 67 is displayed as the line display SMH2 on the display screen 7a as it is. ing. With this serif display SMH2, even if the player misses the serif SM2, the player can recognize the suggestion of the in-reserved consecutive chan.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), a predetermined ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game (round game) is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ending effect, the numbers of reservations H1 and H2 indicate "4" and "0" which are the same as before.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (E), on the display screen 7a, a pending digestive design variation effect is executed. In this pending digestion decorative symbol variation effect, a decorative effect is varied based on the reservation occurring during the jackpot game, thereby sequentially extinguishing the reservation occurring during the jackpot game. In the suspended digestion decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 113 (E), the reserved number H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the reserved number H1 has decreased from “4” to “2”. In other words, in this pending digestion decorative symbol variation effect, two reserves of the first special symbol are consumed from the ending effect (big hit game end) shown in FIG. 113 (D). That is, the fluctuating effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 113 (E) correspond to the second reserved symbol of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the reserved digestion decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 113 (E) has been lost. In the present example, “958” is shown in the lost symbol arrangement.

  On the other hand, after the suspended digestion decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 113 (E) is executed, the reach effect shown in FIG. 113 (G) may be executed instead of FIG. 113 (F). In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the pending digestive decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 113 (E). This indicates that the vehicle has stopped. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (H), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 113 (E) has been a big hit as a result of the reach effect of FIG. 113 (G). In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. The jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 113 (H) is not always performed, and the loss symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 113 (F) may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability of the jackpot-determining effect being performed is higher when the on-hold in-consecutive-chan suggestion 2 effect shown in FIG. 113 (C) is executed than on-hold in-consecutive-chan suggestion 1 effect shown in FIG. 113 (B). Is higher than when it was executed. In other words, the probability of the jackpot-determining effect being performed is that when the line SM2 saying "It's not over yet!" Is issued, which indicates a pending in-line chan, and the line SM1 saying "Maybe a chance!" Is higher than.

  In other words, in the hold-in-representative-chan suggestion effect B shown in FIG. 113, when a specific winning port (in this example, a normal winning port (general winning port) 29) is won during a jackpot game, the winning related game is related to the winning. Thus, a predetermined line is emitted from the speaker 67, and an effect indicating that there is a big hit in the hold generated during the big hit game by the words, that is, an effect of indicating a held in-line chunk is performed. Moreover, in the pending-representative-chan suggestion effect B, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the on-reserve consecutive-chan changes depending on the content (type) of the dialogue, and the dialogue emitted from the speaker 67 is directly displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed as a display.

[Representative Chang's suggestion production C]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for describing the pending in-line chan suggestion effect C.
In the pending consecutive Chang suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 114 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. In the decorative design variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the reserved number of the first special symbol is “3” and the reserved number of the second special symbol is “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 114 (A) has been a jackpot. In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is performed. In the jackpot game, first, a predetermined opening effect indicating start of the jackpot game (round game) is performed on the display screen 7a, and then a round game effect is executed. It has become. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 114 (C), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown at the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, “5R” is shown), and at the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed. Also, in this round game production, the number of holds H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the number of holds H1 is increased by one and changed from “3” to “4”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), on-screen display 7a performs a pending-in-round in-round consecutive-chan suggestion effect. In this round-directed suggestion of the in-consecutive consecutive Chang, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates “8R”, and the number of reservations H1 and H2 is “4” and “0”, which are the same as before. Is shown. In addition, in this round-retained-in-consecutive-chan suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), if a game ball wins in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during the round game, it occurs during the big hit game. The word SM that indicates that there is a jackpot in the held game, that is, the word that indicates the held consecutive chunk is emitted from the speaker 67 (in the present example, the words “Still not finished!” Are shown). ing. The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening arranged at the lower right of the gaming area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30. Therefore, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when the player strikes right. Further, in the production suggestion of the held consecutive chan during the round, the dialogue SM (“still not finished!”) Indicating the pending continuous chan issued from the speaker 67 is displayed as the dialogue display SMH on the display screen 7a as it is. Has become. With this serif display SMH, even if the player misses the serif SM, he / she can recognize the suggestion of the pending consecutive chan. Here, in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), a predetermined character CRA is drawn on the front plate portion of the main body. That is, the motif of the character CRA is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. The setting of this motif will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (E), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending pending in-sequence Chang suggestion effect indicating the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed. In addition, in this ending reservation in-line consecutive-chan suggestion effect, the reservation numbers H1 and H2 show the same “4” and “0” as before. Here, in the ending pending consecutive consecutive-chan suggestion effect, the background of the display screen 7a is configured using the same character CRA as the motif set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. In other words, in the ending pending consecutive consecutive-chan suggestion effect, a specific image with the character CRA as a motif is displayed. In other words, by displaying this specific image at the end of the jackpot game, the in-reservation consecutive chan is suggested.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), on the display screen 7 a, a suspended digestion decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this pending digestion decorative symbol variation effect, a decorative effect is varied based on the reservation occurring during the jackpot game, thereby sequentially extinguishing the reservation occurring during the jackpot game. In the pending digestion decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (F), the number of reservations H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the number of reservations H1 has decreased from “4” to “2”. In other words, in this pending digestion decorative symbol variation effect, two reserves of the first special symbol have been consumed from the ending pending in-line consecutive suggestion effect (big hit game end) shown in FIG. 114 (E). I have. That is, the fluctuating effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 114 (F) correspond to the second reserved symbol of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the pending digestion decorative pattern change effect shown in FIG. 114 (F). As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in a reach pattern array. This indicates that the vehicle has stopped. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (H), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 114 (F) has been a big hit as a result of the reach effect of FIG. 114 (G). In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 114 (H) is not necessarily performed, and a loss may occur at a predetermined probability. However, the probability of the jackpot-determining effect being performed is higher when the ending-reserved-in-consecutive-chan suggestion effect shown in FIG. (When a normal ending effect in which a specific image with a CRA motif is not displayed) is performed. More specifically, the probability of performing the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 114 (H) is as follows. In other words, the highest is the time when the suggestion effect for the consecutive chans during the round (FIG. 114 (D)) and the effect for suggestion for the ending pending chan (FIG. 114 (E)) are performed. The next highest when the event was held, and the next highest when only the suggestions for the pending chan in the round were held, and the suggestions for the pending chan in the round and the ending pending chan were not performed. Is the lowest.

  In other words, in the hold-in-representative-Chang suggestion effect C shown in FIG. 114, when a specific winning port (in this example, a normal winning port (general winning port) 29) is won during the jackpot game, it is related to the winning. Thus, a predetermined line is emitted from the speaker 67, and an effect indicating that there is a big hit in the hold generated during the big hit game, that is, an effect of indicating the in-reserved consecutive chan is performed by this line. In addition, in the pending-in-consecutive-chan suggestion effect C, the dialogue emitted from the speaker 67 is displayed as a dialogue display on the display screen 7a as it is. In addition, in the reserved in-line champion suggestion effect C, a predetermined motif is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 which has caused the speech SM indicating the reserved in-line champion to be issued, and the ending of the jackpot game By displaying the specific image using this predetermined motif, it is possible to further suggest that there is a jackpot in the hold that has occurred during the jackpot game, that is, to produce an effect that suggests a hold in-ream chan. ing. In other words, in the pending in-line consecutive channel suggestion effect C, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of pending in-line consecutive channel suggestion effects at different timings, that is, during a round, in-line pending in-line consecutive channel suggestion effect. .

[Representative Chang's Suggestion Direction D]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for describing the pending in-line consecutive-chan suggestion effect D.
In the pending in-consecutive chan suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 115 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. In the decorative design variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the reserved number of the first special symbol is “3” and the reserved number of the second special symbol is “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 115 (A) has a jackpot. In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is performed. In the jackpot game, first, a predetermined opening effect indicating start of the jackpot game (round game) is performed on the display screen 7a, and then a round game effect is executed. It has become. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 115 (C), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown at the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, “5R” is shown), and at the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed. Also, in this round game production, the number of holds H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the number of holds H1 is increased by one and changed from “3” to “4”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), on-screen display 7a executes a round pending pending consecutive chan suggestion effect. In this round-directed suggestion of the in-consecutive consecutive Chang, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates “8R”, and the number of reservations H1 and H2 is “4” and “0”, which are the same as before. Is shown. In addition, in this round-represented consecutive-chan suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), if a game ball wins in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during the round game, it occurs during the big hit game. The word SM that indicates that there is a jackpot in the held game, that is, the word that indicates the held consecutive chunk is emitted from the speaker 67 (in the present example, the words “Still not finished!” Are shown). ing. The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening arranged at the lower right of the gaming area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30. Therefore, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when the player strikes right. Further, in the production suggestion of the held consecutive chan during the round, the dialogue SM (“still not finished!”) Indicating the pending continuous chan issued from the speaker 67 is displayed as the dialogue display SMH on the display screen 7a as it is. Has become. With this serif display SMH, even if the player misses the serif SM, he / she can recognize the suggestion of the pending consecutive chan. Here, in the ordinary winning opening (general winning opening) 29, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), a pattern imitating the airplane HK is drawn on the front plate of the main body. That is, the motif of the airplane HK is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. The setting of this motif will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), a predetermined ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game (round game) is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ending effect, the numbers of reservations H1 and H2 indicate "4" and "0" which are the same as before.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), on the display screen 7a, after the end of the jackpot, a pending in-line consecutive-chan suggestion effect is executed. The hold-in-representative consecutive-chan suggestion effect after the end of the jackpot is a display effect performed by switching the ending effect screen shown in FIG. 115 (E), that is, immediately after the end of the jackpot game. In the after-hit jackpot-end hold-in-representative-chan suggestion effect, the decorative design is fluctuated based on the hold that has occurred during the jackpot game, thereby successively extinguishing the hold that has occurred during the jackpot game. In the post-jackpot-end-reserve-in-consecutive-chan suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115 (F), the number of reservations H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the number of reservations H1 decreases from “4” to “3”. . In other words, in the post-jackpot-end holding in-consecutive-chan suggestion effect, the state in which the first hold of the first special symbol is consumed from the ending effect (jackpot game end) shown in FIG. Is shown. That is, the fluctuating effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 115 (F) correspond to the first reserved symbol of the first special symbol immediately after the end of the jackpot game. Here, in the after-hit jackpot-end pending rendezvous suggestion effect, the background of the display screen 7a is configured using the same airplane HK as the motif set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. In other words, in the post-jackpot end pending rendezvous Chang suggestion effect, a specific image with the airplane HK as a motif is displayed. In other words, in the post-jackpot-end pending rendezvous suggestion effect, the ending effect screen is switched to a display effect performed immediately after the end of the jackpot game, and a background image is formed using a specific image with the motif of the airplane HK. The effect that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the upper side is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the hold-in-representative consecutive-chan suggestion effect after the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 115 (F). It shows a state where it stopped in the symbol arrangement. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed. In the reach effect shown in FIG. 115 (G), the number of hold H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the number of hold H1 decreases from “3” to “2”. That is, in this reach effect, a state in which two reserves of the first special symbol have been consumed since the end of the jackpot game is shown in the end-of-jackpot end-of-reservation consecutive-chan suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115 (F). That is, the reach effect shown in FIG. 115 (G) corresponds to the second reserved holding of the first special symbol from the end of the big hit game. In this reach effect, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), on the display screen 7a, the background image using the specific image with the airplane HK as a motif is displayed after the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 115 (F). It is displayed continuously from the rendezvous suggestion effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (H), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 115 (F) has resulted in a jackpot as a result of the reach effect of FIG. 115 (G). In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 115 (H) is not necessarily performed, and a loss may occur at a predetermined probability. However, the probability of performing the jackpot-determined effect is that when the hold-in-consecutive-representation-in-challenge effect after execution of the jackpot shown in FIG. (When a specific image with the airplane HK as a motif is not displayed, and when the normal decorative design variation effect shown in FIG. 115 (A) is executed). More specifically, the probability of performing the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 115 (H) is as follows. In other words, the highest is when the hold-in-representation-chance effect (FIG. 115 (D)) during the round and the hold-in-relief-chan suggestion effect after the jackpot is completed (FIG. 115 (F)), and the hold-in-representation champion after the jackpot is over. The next highest when only the suggestion effect was performed, the second highest when only the suggestion effect for the pending tan-chan during the round was performed, and the suggestion effect for the pending chu-ren chan during the round and the suggestion effect for the pending chu-ren after the jackpot Is the lowest when no is performed.

  In other words, in the hold-in-representative-chan suggestion effect D shown in FIG. 115, when a specific winning port (in this example, a normal winning port (general winning port) 29) is won during the jackpot game, it is related to the winning. Thus, a predetermined line is emitted from the speaker 67, and an effect indicating that there is a big hit in the hold generated during the big hit game by the words, that is, an effect of indicating a held in-line chunk is performed. In addition, in the holding-in-representative-chan suggestion effect D, the dialogue emanating from the speaker 67 is displayed as a dialogue display on the display screen 7a as it is. In addition, in the reserved-in-representative-chan suggestion effect D, a predetermined motif is set in the ordinary winning opening (general winning opening) 29 that has caused the speech SM indicating the reserved-in-representing chan to be issued, and immediately after the jackpot game ends. By displaying a specific image (background image) using this predetermined motif in the decorative design variation effect, it is further suggested that there is a big hit in the hold that occurred during the big hit game, that is, The production which suggests is performed. In other words, in the pending-in-representative-chan suggestion effect D, a plurality of types of in-reservation-in-representative-chan suggestion effects can be executed at different timings, that is, during the round, the pending-in-representative-chan suggestion effect and after the jackpot has been completed, ing.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the suggestion effect for the pending consecutive chan.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112 to FIG. 115, the first effect suggests the degree of expectation of the reserved consecutive chan in relation to winning at a specific winning opening during the jackpot game. It is configured to perform directing. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball and perform technical intervention in order to cause the game ball to enter a specific winning opening during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, particularly the interest of the monotonous jackpot game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the effect of indicating the degree of expectation of the reserved consecutive chan is performed by a sound generated in connection with winning a specific winning opening. It has become. According to this configuration, when indicating the degree of expectation of the pending consecutive chan, it is possible to easily notify the player in various forms. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the expectation degree of the pending on-line champion is suggested by voice, the player does not need to look closely at the display screen as compared with suggesting the expectation degree of the on-hold on-line champion on the display, and as a result, You can relax and enjoy playing. Further, it is possible to easily change the degree of expectation of the on-reserved consecutive chan depending on the type of the voice. Furthermore, by attracting attention to a sound suggesting the degree of expectation of the on-line consecutive chan with a distinctive tone or melody, it is possible to further appeal to the player.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 115, the voice generated in connection with the winning in the specific winning opening is a line, and the expected degree of the held consecutive chan is the line of the line. The configuration changes according to the type. According to this configuration, it is possible to generate lines of various contents and easily change the degree of expectation of the pending consecutive chan. As a result, the player is delighted with the content of the sentence, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a predetermined motif is set for a specific winning opening, and the first display sets the background of the display screen to the specific winning opening. It is possible to display a specific image of the same motif as the selected motif, and the second effect is to switch the background of the display screen to the specific image at a predetermined timing when the held consecutive chan is performed It has become. According to this configuration, when the background of the display screen is switched to the specific image, the player can face the game with great expectation. Also, since the specific image has the same motif as the motif set in the specific winning opening, it is possible to appeal the player to the specific winning opening, and when the game ball wins in the specific winning opening. We can have expectations. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the timing of switching to the specific image is configured to be during the end of the big hit game or immediately after the end of the big hit game. According to this configuration, immediately after the end of the jackpot game or immediately after the end of the jackpot game, the player looks at the display screen and is delighted with whether or not to switch to the specific image. In other words, since it is determined whether or not to play consecutively at the end of the big hit game, the big hit game is not bored to the end, and as a result, the interest of the game can be greatly improved. In addition, a sound generated in connection with winning a specific winning opening during a round indicates a pending consecutive chan, and then after a while, the ending of the jackpot game or the specific image immediately after the end of the jackpot game By switching to, it is possible to suggest the pending consecutive chan, and as a result, the player can expect the pending consecutive chan for a long time. As a result, the interest of the game can be maintained for a long time for the player.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the on-hold consecutive chan suggestion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112 to FIG. 115, the holding-in-consecutive-chan suggestion effect is performed for the holding occurring during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not limited. For example, if the gaming state is in a probable state other than the jackpot state, a time saving state, or a normal state, and a specific winning opening is won, the expected jackpot degree in the hold occurring at that time is calculated. An effect that suggests may be performed. In particular, when the game state is in the probable change state, it is preferable to perform an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the hold related to the second special symbol. In this case, it is desirable that a specific winning port and a second starting port for changing the second special symbol (a second starting winning port, an electric chew) do not win unless the player strikes right.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 115, when a winning prize is won in a specific winning opening, a predetermined line is issued in connection with the winning, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115. Although the present invention is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the holding-in-representative-chan suggestion effect, a sound effect may be generated after the dialogue, and the sound effect may be varied depending on the type of dialogue. In this way, the line is more prominent, and the player can easily grasp the type of the line. Alternatively, a sound effect may be generated after a speech is issued, and a combination of the speech and the sound effect may indicate the degree of expectation of the on-reserved consecutive chan. This makes it possible to easily and variously change the degree of expectation of the reserved internal consecutive chan. Further, the lines and sound effects emitted when the player wins the specific winning opening may be made different depending on the round to be generated.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a specific image (background image) using the same motif as the motif set in the specific winning opening is displayed during the ending of the jackpot game, or By displaying immediately after the end of the jackpot game, the effect of suggesting the pending consecutive chan is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold-in-consecutive-chan suggestion effect using a specific image using this motif may be performed during a predetermined round of the jackpot game, or during the ending of the jackpot game, immediately after the jackpot game ends, and during the jackpot game. It may be performed in two or all of the predetermined rounds.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, the motif set in the specific winning opening and the motif of the specific image immediately after the end of the jackpot game or immediately after the end of the jackpot game are determined by a predetermined character. Alternatively, although an airplane is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and any motif may be used.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the specific image using the same motif as the motif set in the specific winning opening is performed on one display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is provided with a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the rear side so as to be able to display a stereoscopic image (3D). It may be displayed as an image (3D). By doing so, a powerful specific image can be displayed by displaying the specific image in 3D, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine having a production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect performed during a jackpot game,
The first effect, in connection with winning a specific winning opening during the jackpot game, to perform an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the held consecutive Chang,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect C2-2]
The effect indicating the degree of expectation of the pending consecutive chan is performed by a sound generated in connection with winning the specific winning opening,
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1.
[Aspect C2-3]
The sound generated in connection with the winning of the specific winning opening is a line,
The degree of expectation of the pending in-consecutive chan varies depending on the type of the line,
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-2, wherein:
[Aspect C2-4]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
A predetermined motif is set in the specific winning opening,
One of the plurality of indications is a first indication;
The first display is to display a background of a display screen with a specific image of the same motif as the motif set in the specific winning opening,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
In the case where the second effect is performed, the in-consecutive consecutive chan is performed, a background of the display screen is switched to the specific image at a predetermined timing,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3, wherein
[Aspect C2-5]
The timing of switching to the specific image is during the round or ending of the jackpot game, or immediately after the jackpot game ends.
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-4, wherein:

  Hereinafter, the error display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. This error display effect can be executed when the detecting means such as a ball detecting sensor detects that the ball tray (excess ball tray (lower plate) 62) is full.

[Error indication effect A]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for describing the error display effect A.
In the error display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 116 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were varied in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 116A, so that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped in the reach symbol array. It shows the situation. In this example, “8 ↓ 8” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 116 (A) has hit after reaching the reach in FIG. 116 (B). In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement usually indicates the jackpot "888". In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (D), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, a promotion effect is performed at a predetermined timing to determine whether or not the normal jackpot is promoted to a certain-change jackpot, and the button operation instruction production shown in FIG. 116 (D) is performed during this promotion production. The button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, a character SIG “button PUSH!” Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in the left and right directions. With this button operation instruction effect, an effect of an operation instruction for causing the player to press down the effect button 63 is executed. It should be noted that a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion below the button image BOG. The meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 runs out, the meter value is displayed. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), a ball-drawing suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball-drawing suggestion display effect is an error display effect that is performed when detection means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is full. The balling suggestion display effect includes a balling operation image EG including a display indicating a position of an operation lever for balling in a gaming machine, and a balling operation message EM that prompts the player to perform balling operation by character display. Are displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. The ball-off suggestion display effect is displayed on the front side of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 116 (D), and the ball-off operation image EG and the ball-off operation message EM include the button image BOG and the “button PUSH!” It is displayed so as to completely cover the character SIG. In the ball removal operation image EG, an image describing the position of the operation lever for ball removal is displayed in a square frame, and the position of the operation lever is indicated by a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the character “Please remove the ball” is displayed immediately above the ball removal operation image EG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), a ball-off suggestion character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ball drop suggestion character effect, after the ball drop suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 116 (E) has been performed for a predetermined time, the display of the ball drop operation image EG is deleted, and only the ball drop operation message EM is displayed. It is an aspect. When the display of the ball removal operation image EG is deleted, the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a, but the character SIG of “button PUSH!” Is not displayed. This indicates that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has disappeared during the period in which the ball-drawing suggestion display effect has been performed for a predetermined time. In the display area of the button image BOG, a message NG1 of “NO!” Is displayed. The message “NG!” Of “NO!” Indicates that the effect button 63 was not operated within the effective operation period of the effect button 63 (mission failed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), a jackpot promotion failure effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion failure production, after all, indicates that the normal jackpot was not promoted to a probable jackpot in the promotion production. Therefore, on the display screen 7a, "888" of the normal jackpot symbol arrangement is shown, and above the "888" of the normal jackpot symbol array, the character "Promotion failed!" Is displayed. By the jackpot promotion failure production, the player recognizes that the normal jackpot has not been promoted to the certainty jackpot. Also, in this jackpot promotion failure production, the ball removal operation message EM is not displayed, but this is a result of the player operating the operation lever to remove the ball before the jackpot promotion failure production is performed, This is because the fullness of the ball tray (excess ball tray (lower plate) 62) has been eliminated. If the ball tray (excess ball tray (lower plate) 62) has not been fully filled before the jackpot promotion failure effect is performed, the ball extraction operation message EM is continuously displayed during the jackpot promotion failure effect. .
Note that the jackpot promotion failure effect shown in FIG. 116 (G) is always performed even if the message NG1 of “NO!” Is displayed on the button image BOG shown in FIG. 116 (F). Instead, the normal jackpot may be promoted to the probability variable jackpot with a predetermined probability.

  In other words, the error display effect A shown in FIG. 116 is a case where the storage of the game balls in the storage device (excess ball receiving tray (lower plate) 62) is excessive, and during the effect display (the button effect in the effect display). Is performed), a display for prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and a ball-off suggestion display is performed. The ball-off suggestion display includes a ball-off operation image EG indicating the position of the operation lever for ball-off and a ball-off operation message EM for prompting the ball-off operation by character display, which is related to the effect button 63 ( The button image BOG and the character “SIG” of “button PUSH!” Are displayed at the center on the left and right sides of the display screen 7 a so as to cover the entirety. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the ball removal operation image EG is deleted and the ball removal operation is performed. Only the message EM is displayed.

[Error indication effect B]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for describing the error display effect B.
In the error display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, FIG. 117A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were fluctuated and displayed in the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 117A, so that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped in the reach symbol array. It shows the situation. In this example, “8 ↓ 8” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 117 (A) is a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 117 (B). In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement usually indicates the jackpot "888". In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, a promotion effect is performed at a predetermined timing to determine whether or not the regular jackpot is promoted to a certain-variable jackpot. The button operation instruction production shown in FIG. 117 (D) is performed during this promotion production. The button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, a character SIG “button PUSH!” Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in the left and right directions. With this button operation instruction effect, an effect of an operation instruction for causing the player to press down the effect button 63 is executed. It should be noted that a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion below the button image BOG. The meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 runs out, the meter value is displayed. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (E), a ball drop suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball-drawing suggestion display effect is an error display effect that is performed when detection means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is full. The balling suggestion display effect includes a balling operation image EG including a display indicating a position of an operation lever for balling in a gaming machine, and a balling operation message EM that prompts the player to perform balling operation by character display. indicate. The ball-off suggestion display effect is displayed on the front side of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 117D, and the ball-off operation image EG covers a part of the button image BOG (upper part of the button image BOG). In addition, it is displayed at the left and right center of the display screen 7a so as to completely cover the character "SIG" of "Button PUSH!". In the ball removal operation image EG, an image describing the position of the operation lever for ball removal is displayed in a square frame, and the position of the operation lever is indicated by a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the character "Please remove the ball" is displayed at the upper left corner of the ball removal operation image EG and at the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. That is, the ball-dropping operation image EG and the ball-dropping operation message EM are displayed apart from each other at a predetermined interval.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (F), a ball-drawing suggestion character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ball drop suggestion character effect, after the ball drop suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 117 (E) has been performed for a predetermined time, the display of the ball drop operation image EG is deleted, and only the ball drop operation message EM is displayed. It is an aspect. When the display of the ball removal operation image EG is deleted, the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a, but the character SIG of “button PUSH!” Is not displayed. This indicates that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has disappeared during the period in which the ball-drawing suggestion display effect has been performed for a predetermined time. In the display area of the button image BOG, a message MG1 of "OK!" Is displayed. The message MG1 of “OK!” Indicates that the effect button 63 has been operated within the effective operation period of the effect button 63 (mission success). When the display of the ball-dropping operation image EG is deleted, the ball-dropping operation message EM changes (move) the display position to substantially the center of the display screen 7a and covers a part (upper portion) of the button image BOG. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (G), a jackpot promotion confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion confirmed production shows that the normal jackpot has been promoted to a certain variable jackpot in the promotion production. Accordingly, the display screen 7a shows “777” in the probability-change jackpot symbol array, and the character “promotion!” Is displayed above “777” in the probability-change jackpot symbol array. With this jackpot promotion confirmed effect, the player recognizes that the regular jackpot has been promoted to a certain variable jackpot. In addition, in this jackpot promotion confirmation effect, the ball removal operation message EM is not displayed, but this is a result of the player operating the operation lever to remove the ball before the jackpot promotion confirmation effect is performed, This is because the fullness of the ball tray (excess ball tray (lower plate) 62) has been eliminated. If the fullness of the ball tray (excess ball tray (lower plate) 62) has not been eliminated before the jackpot promotion confirmation effect is performed, the ball removal operation message EM is continuously displayed during the jackpot promotion confirmation effect. .
Note that the jackpot promotion confirmation effect shown in FIG. 117 (G) is always performed even when the message “OK!” MG1 is displayed on the button image BOG shown in FIG. 117 (F). In some cases, the normal jackpot may not be promoted to the probability variable jackpot with a predetermined probability.

  In other words, the error display effect B shown in FIG. 117 is a case where the storage of the game balls in the storage device (excess ball receiving tray (lower plate) 62) is excessive, and during the effect display (button effect in the effect display). Is performed), a display for prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and a ball-off suggestion display is performed. The ball-dropping suggestion display includes a ball-dropping operation image EG indicating the position of the ball-pulling operation lever in the center of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a in a manner to cover a part of the button image BOG and the entirety of the character SIG. A ball-pulling operation message EM which is displayed and prompts the ball-pulling operation by character display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a apart from the ball-pulling operation image EG. Thereafter, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the ball-dropping operation image EG is erased, and only the ball-dropping operation message EM is moved to the substantially center of the display screen 7a and displayed.

[Error indication effect C]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for describing the error display effect C.
In the error display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 118 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were varied in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 116A, so that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped in the reach symbol array. It shows the situation. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (C), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The button operation instruction effect is an effect performed at a predetermined timing during the reach effect, for example, at a timing immediately before the changing middle decorative symbol 8C stops. The button operation instruction effect is an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a and the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and is developed in the center of the display screen 7a. It is an image for prompting an operation. In other words, the image indicates that the effect button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, a character SIG “button PUSH!” Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in the left and right directions. With this button operation instruction effect, an effect of an operation instruction for causing the player to press down the effect button 63 is executed. It should be noted that a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion below the button image BOG. The meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 runs out, the meter value is displayed. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), a ball-drawing suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball-drawing suggestion display effect is an error display effect that is performed when detection means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is full. The balling suggestion display effect includes a balling operation image EG including a display indicating a position of an operation lever for balling in a gaming machine, and a balling operation message EM that prompts the player to perform balling operation by character display. indicate. The ball-off suggestion display effect is displayed on the front side of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 118 (C), and the ball-off operation image EG is displayed so as to completely cover the button image BOG. Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), while the character SIG of “Button PUSH!” Is continuously displayed immediately above the ball extraction operation image EG, a ball extraction operation message is displayed immediately below the ball extraction operation image EG. EM is displayed. In other words, in the ball-off suggestion display effect, the ball-off operation image EG and the ball-off operation message EM are displayed so as not to cover the character “SIG” of “button PUSH!” Which prompts the player to perform the button operation by character display. This allows the player to understand and execute the operation instruction of the button operation even when the ball-suggestion indication display effect is performed. In the ball removal operation image EG, an image describing the position of the operation lever for ball removal is displayed in a square frame, and the position of the operation lever is indicated by a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. In addition, the ball removal operation message EM is configured to display the characters “Please remove the ball”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (E), on the display screen 7a, a ball-off suggestion display erasing effect is executed. In this balling suggestion display erasing effect, the balling operation image EG and the balling operation message EM shown in FIG. 118D are simultaneously deleted, and the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a. The character SIG of “button PUSH!” Is not displayed. This indicates that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has disappeared during the period in which the ball-drawing suggestion display effect has been performed for a predetermined time. In the display area of the button image BOG, a message MG1 of "OK!" Is displayed. The message MG1 of “OK!” Indicates that the effect button 63 has been operated within the effective operation period of the effect button 63 (mission success). In addition, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are deleted because the player operates the operation lever to perform the ball removal, and as a result, the ball tray (excess ball tray (lower plate) 62) is removed. This is because the full tank has been eliminated. If the fullness of the ball receiver (excess ball receiver (lower plate) 62) has not been eliminated, the ball extraction operation image EG and the ball extraction operation message EM are unconditionally stored until the full state is eliminated. It is still displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (F), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 118 (A) is a big hit as a result of the effects of FIGS. 118 (B) to 118 (E). In the present example, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. The jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 118 (F) is not necessarily performed even when the message “OK!” MG1 is displayed on the button image BOG shown in FIG. 118 (E). May be lost at a predetermined probability.

  In other words, the error display effect C shown in FIG. 118 is a case where the storage of the game balls in the storage device (excess ball receiving tray (lower plate) 62) is excessive, and during the effect display (button effect in the effect display). Is performed), a display for prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and a ball-off suggestion display is performed. The ball-dropping suggestion display displays a ball-dropping operation image EG indicating the position of the ball-pulling operation lever at the center on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a so as to cover the entire button image BOG. The ball-pulling operation message EM prompted by character display is displayed immediately below the ball-pulling operation image EG. On the other hand, the character “SIG” of “Button PUSH!” Prompting the player to perform the button operation by character display is continuously displayed immediately above the ball-pulling operation image EG. The ball-pulling-out operation image EG and the ball-pulling-out operation message EM are displayed so as not to cover the character SIG of "button PUSH!"

[Error indication effect D]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for describing the error display effect D.
In the error display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 119 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the decorative symbol change effect illustrated in FIG. 119A, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array. It shows the situation. In this example, “8 ↓ 8” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 119 (A) is a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 116 (B). In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement usually indicates the jackpot "888". In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (D), a round game display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, a round game is performed, and the round game display effect is an effect including a display related to the round game. As shown in FIG. 119 (D), in the round game display effect, a round game effect is developed at the center of the display screen 7a, and a round display RS indicating the number of rounds and a number of balls to be played at the jackpot are displayed at the lower left of the screen. The displayed number-of-balls display TD is displayed. In this example, the round display RS indicates eight rounds, and the number-of-discharges display TD indicates 1250. Also, a second decorative symbol ZH indicating the current big hit symbol arrangement (“888”) is displayed at the upper right of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), on the display screen 7a, a promotion battle effect (promotion effect) is performed to determine whether or not the normal jackpot is promoted to the probability-change jackpot. This promotion battle effect is performed as a round game effect developed at the center of the display screen 7a shown in FIG. 119 (D). When the eight round games are started, an image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB on the player side battle is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), a jackpot promotion suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot promotion suggestion effect, the character “Victory!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has won as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "WIN!", It is possible to make the player think that the normal jackpot is promoted to a certain-variable jackpot (a privilege advantageous to the player is given). In this jackpot promotion suggestion effect, the round display RS indicates 12 rounds, and the number-of-yields display TD indicates 1870. That is, the promotion battle effect shown in FIG. 119 (E) is performed from round 8 to round 12. In addition, the second decorative symbol ZH indicates the probability variable jackpot symbol array “777”. In other words, the second decorative symbol ZH indicates that the normal jackpot is promoted to the probable jackpot, together with the character “WIN!”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (G), a ball-drawing suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball-drawing suggestion display effect is an error display effect that is performed when detection means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is full. The balling suggestion display effect includes a balling operation image EG including a display indicating a position of an operation lever for balling in a gaming machine, and a balling operation message EM that prompts the player to perform balling operation by character display. Are displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. The ball-drop suggestion display effect is displayed on the front side of the jackpot promotion suggestion effect shown in FIG. 119 (F), and the ball-drop operation image EG and the ball-drop operation message EM completely cover the character “victory!”. In addition, it is displayed so as to cover a part of the round display RS and the number-of-payout display TD (numerical parts of the round display RS and the number-of-payout display TD). That is, in the balling suggestion display effect, the ball-dropping operation image EG and the ball-dropping operation message EM are displayed so as to cover part or all of the predetermined character display displayed in the round game effect. In the ball removal operation image EG, an image describing the position of the operation lever for ball removal is displayed in a square frame, and the position of the operation lever is indicated by a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the characters “Please remove the ball” are displayed on the lower edge in the frame of the ball removal operation image EG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (H), a jackpot promotion confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion confirmed production indicates that the regular jackpot has been promoted to a probable jackpot in the round game production. Accordingly, the display screen 7a shows “777” in the probability-change jackpot symbol array, and the character “promotion!” Is displayed above “777” in the probability-change jackpot symbol array. With this jackpot promotion confirmed effect, the player is convinced that the normal jackpot has been promoted to a certain variable jackpot. Also, in the jackpot promotion confirmation effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are not displayed. However, this is because the player operates the operation lever and operates the ball before the jackpot promotion confirmation effect is performed. This is because the fullness of the ball tray (excess ball tray (lower plate) 62) has been eliminated as a result of the removal. If the fullness of the ball tray (excess ball tray (lower plate) 62) has not been eliminated before the jackpot promotion confirmation effect is performed, the ball removal operation message EM is continuously displayed during the jackpot promotion confirmation effect. . In addition, in this jackpot promotion confirmation effect, the round display RS indicates 13 rounds, and the number-of-yields display TD indicates 2025 pieces. That is, the ball-drop suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 119 (G) is performed from round 12 to round 13. Further, the second decorative symbol ZH indicates the same variable jackpot symbol array “777” as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.
Note that the jackpot promotion confirmation effect shown in FIG. 119 (H) is always performed even when the character “WIN!” Shown in FIG. 119 (F) is displayed (the ally character CRA has won). There is no possibility that the regular jackpot will not be promoted to the probability variable jackpot with a predetermined probability.

  That is, in the error display effect D shown in FIG. 119, it is a case where the storage of the game balls in the storage device (excess ball receiving tray (lower plate) 62) becomes excessive, and during the effect display (the big hit game in the effect display). In the case where an effect including a display relating to a middle round game is being performed), a ball-pulling suggestion display is performed in which a display prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed before the effect display. The ball-drop suggestion display is a part of a predetermined character display (round display RS and number-of-ball-out display) indicating a ball-drop operation image EG indicating a position of an operation lever for ball drop in a round game effect. TD) or the whole (the character of "victory!") Is displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a, and a ball-pulling operation message EM that prompts a ball-pulling operation by character display is displayed in the ball-pulling operation image EG display area. Is displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the error display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 118, the first effect is an effect including a display related to an effect button, and the second effect is an effect including a display related to an error. The display of the second effect is displayed on the near side rather than the display of the first effect, and a part or all of the display related to the effect button is covered with a display related to the error. According to this configuration, when an error (abnormality) occurs in the gaming machine, a part or all of the display related to the effect button, even if the button effect, which is an important effect for the game, is displayed. Is covered with a display related to the error, it is possible to promptly notify the outside that the error has occurred in a prominent manner. As a result, it is possible to quickly cope with the error and reduce the obstacle to the game as much as possible, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the first effect is an effect including a display relating to a round game during a jackpot game, and the display relating to the round game includes a predetermined character display, The display of the second effect is displayed on the front side rather than the display of the first effect, and a part or the entirety of the predetermined character display related to the round game is covered with the display related to the error. According to this configuration, even when the effect of the predetermined character display related to the round game, which is an important effect in the game, is performed, some or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game is regarded as an error. By covering with the related display, it is possible to immediately notify the outside that the error has occurred in a prominent manner. As a result, it is possible to quickly cope with the error and reduce the obstacle to the game as much as possible, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 119, the display related to the error is a display related to bouncing when a full tank is detected. According to this configuration, it is possible to immediately notify the outside of the occurrence of the full-tank error in a prominent manner. As a result, the player can quickly remove balls and avoid interruption of the game, such as interruption of the game due to jamming of balls, as much as possible, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 119, the display related to the ball-dropping is a message prompting ball-dropping and an image indicating the position of the ball-dropping operation unit (the operation lever and the operation button). Is also displayed. According to this configuration, the player can instantaneously determine the position of the ball-drawing operation unit and quickly perform the ball-drawing. As a result, the player can avoid obstacles to the game such as interruption of the game due to jamming as much as possible, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to ball dropout is configured to be displayed at the left and right center of the display screen. According to this configuration, since the display related to the ball dropout is displayed at a prominent position, it is possible to reduce as much as possible the player overlooking the display related to the ball dropout. As a result, the player can reliably remove balls, and it is possible to avoid interruptions to the game, such as interruption of the game due to clogging, as much as possible. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the error display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the image display device 7 is constituted by one display screen 7a, and the display related to the error is displayed on the one display screen 7a by the effect button. Is displayed on the front side of the display related to the round game during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is provided with a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the rear side, and the display related to the error is related to the effect button on the first display screen. The display and the display related to the round game during the jackpot game may be displayed on the second display screen. In this way, the display related to the error is displayed closer to the player, and the player can be strongly appealed in an extremely impactful manner. Note that the image display device having the first display screen and the second display screen may be configured to be able to display a stereoscopic image (3D). By doing so, it is possible to further appeal to the player by displaying a display related to the error in 3D.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 119, the display relating to the full tank error is such that a message for prompting a ball removal and an image indicating the position of the ball removal operation unit are displayed together. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to displaying a message for prompting removal of balls and an image indicating the position of the removal operation unit, a sound for prompting removal of balls may be generated. Alternatively, an image display indicating the position of the ball-drawing operation unit and a sound prompting the ball-dropping may be generated, and the message prompting the ball-dropping may be omitted.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 119, the display related to the error is displayed on the near side of the display related to the effect button or the display related to the round game during the big hit game. Is partially or entirely covered, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display related to the error may cover part or all of the display of the decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner, or may cover part or all of the display of the hold icon. .

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 119, the display related to the error is the display related to the full tank error, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, errors other than a full tank error include an abnormal winning error, a door open error, a dispensing state error, a switch error error, a magnet detection error, a discharge error, a radio wave detection error, a discharge ball confirmation error, a solenoid photo sensor error error, There are an impact detection error, an abnormal V winning error, a winning frequency abnormal error, and the like, and a display related to these errors may be performed.
[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the full tank error is a display related to the effect button or a display related to the round game during the jackpot game. Although displayed on the front side to cover a part or all of the display, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the display related to the error, the content of the error is determined, and depending on the type of the determined error, whether to cover a part of the target display or the entire display is determined and displayed. It may be. Furthermore, the display related to the error may not cover the target display at all depending on the type of the determined error.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means can execute a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is an effect including a display related to an effect button,
The second effect is an effect including a display related to an error,
The display means may display the display of the second effect on the near side rather than the display of the first effect, and may cover part or all of the display related to the effect button with a display related to the error. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect C3-2]
The first effect is an effect including a display related to a round game during a jackpot game, instead of an effect including a display related to the effect button,
The display related to the round game includes a predetermined character display,
The display means displays the display of the second effect on the near side rather than the display of the first effect, and displays a part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game with a display related to the error. May cover
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1.
[Aspect C3-3]
The display related to the error is a display related to bobbing when a full tank is detected,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2.
[Aspect C3-4]
The display related to the ball-dropping, together with a message prompting ball-dropping, and an image indicating the position of the ball-dropping operation unit,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3, wherein:
[Aspect C3-5]
The display related to the balling is displayed in the center on the left and right of the display screen,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3 or aspect C3-4.

  The predetermined information display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This predetermined information display effect can be executed during standby, during a decorative effect change effect, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the predetermined information display effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Predetermined information display effect A]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect A.
In the predetermined information display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), a standby display effect is executed. This stand-by display effect is an effect performed during a standby for waiting for a player, and is a demonstration effect (demo effect). In this standby effect, the character CRA, which is frequently used in the effect of the gaming machine 1 and is a main character (main character), in other words, a character CRA serving as a motif of the gaming machine 1 and a balloon image C41 are displayed. In the balloon image C41, "I am the main character!" Is described, which indicates that the character CRA is the main character in the gaming machine 1, in other words, that the character CRA is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), a jackpot game display effect is executed. The jackpot game display effect is an effect that is performed during the jackpot game generated by the player playing the game after the standby display effect. In the big hit game display effect, the character CRA and the balloon image C42 are displayed. A display indicating a round is made in the balloon image C42. In the example of FIG. 120B, it is suggested that the round is 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display indicating right-handing, a display indicating the current number of rounds, a display indicating acquired payouts, and the like are also performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), an alerting effect is executed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, a sinking alerting image C43 is displayed. This add-on alert image C43 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately", and is a display for suppressing the add-on to the game. In the indentation alert image C43, a statement that directly alerts the user to the indentation in the game, such as "Let's be careful in ingress into the game", may be made.

[Predetermined information display effect B]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for describing the predetermined information display effect B.
In the predetermined information display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), a standby display effect is executed. This stand-by display effect is an effect performed during a standby for waiting for a player, and is a demonstration effect (demo effect). In this standby effect, the character CRA, which is frequently used in the effect of the gaming machine 1 and is a main character (main character), in other words, a character CRA serving as a motif of the gaming machine 1 and a balloon image C41 are displayed. In the balloon image C41, "I am the main character!" Is described, which indicates that the character CRA is the main character in the gaming machine 1, in other words, that the character CRA is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), a jackpot game display effect is executed. The jackpot game display effect is an effect that is performed during the jackpot game generated by the player playing the game after the standby display effect. In the big hit game display effect, the character CRA and the balloon image C42 are displayed. A display indicating a round is made in the balloon image C42. In the example of FIG. 121 (B), it is suggested that the round is 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display indicating right-handing, a display indicating the current number of rounds, a display indicating acquired payouts, and the like are also performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), a maker logo effect is executed. This maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this maker logo display effect, a maker logo image C44 is displayed. This maker logo image C44 is a logo representing the maker of the gaming machine 1. The manufacturer logo image C44 indicates “XYZ” as the manufacturer. In addition, a predetermined catchphrase “Happiness to you!” Is displayed on the maker logo image C44. Note that the maker logo image C44 may be a logo representing a maker that has researched and developed the gaming machine 1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), an alerting effect is executed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, a sinking alerting image C43 is displayed. This add-on alert image C43 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately", and is a display for suppressing the add-on to the game. In the indentation alert image C43, a statement that directly alerts the user to the indentation in the game, such as "Let's be careful in ingress into the game", may be made. Also, in this alerting effect, a display (attention to lost items and theft!) That alerts the player to pay attention to a lost item or theft is also performed.

[Predetermined information display effect C]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for describing the predetermined information display effect C.
In the predetermined information display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), a standby display effect is executed. This stand-by display effect is an effect performed during a standby for waiting for a player, and is a demonstration effect (demo effect). In this standby effect, the character CRA, which is frequently used in the effect of the gaming machine 1 and is a main character (main character), in other words, a character CRA serving as a motif of the gaming machine 1 and a balloon image C41 are displayed. In the balloon image C41, "I am the main character!" Is described, which indicates that the character CRA is the main character in the gaming machine 1, in other words, that the character CRA is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), a jackpot game display effect is executed. The jackpot game display effect is an effect that is performed during the jackpot game generated by the player playing the game after the standby display effect. In the big hit game display effect, the character CRA and the balloon image C42 are displayed. A display indicating a round is made in the balloon image C42. In the example of FIG. 122 (B), it is suggested that the round is 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display indicating right-handing, a display indicating the current number of rounds, a display indicating acquired payouts, and the like are also performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), a copyright owner display effect is executed. In this copyright holder display effect, a character CRA and a copyright holder suggestion logo image C45 are displayed. The copyright holder suggestion logo image C45 is a logo representing the copyright holder of the character CRA, which is a character serving as a motif of the gaming machine 1 and a main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), a maker logo effect is executed. This maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this maker logo display effect, a maker logo image C44 is displayed. This maker logo image C44 is a logo representing the maker of the gaming machine 1. The manufacturer logo image C44 indicates “XYZ” as the manufacturer. In addition, a predetermined catchphrase “Happiness to you!” Is displayed on the maker logo image C44. Note that the maker logo image C44 may be a logo representing a maker that has researched and developed the gaming machine 1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), an alerting effect is executed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, a sinking alerting image C43 and a predetermined alerting image C49 are displayed. This add-on alert image C43 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately", and is a display for suppressing the add-on to the game. In the indentation alert image C43, a statement that directly alerts the user to the indentation in the game, such as "Let's be careful in ingress into the game", may be made. In addition, the predetermined warning image C49 is described as "Be careful of missing, stolen, or lost items of the prepaid card", and alerts the player to be careful of missing, stolen, or left behind prepaid cards. Display.

[Predetermined information display effect D]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for describing the predetermined information display effect D.
In the predetermined information display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), a standby display effect is executed. This stand-by display effect is an effect performed during a standby for waiting for a player, and is a demonstration effect (demo effect). In this standby effect, the character is used frequently in the effect of the gaming machine 1 and is a main character (main character). In other words, the character CRA serving as a motif of the gaming machine 1, the minor alerting image C46, and cheating suppression are performed. An alert C47, a fraud act alert C48, and a sinking alert C410 are displayed. The minor warning image C46 is described as "Don't hit if you're under 18!", And is a display that warns the player that a minor under 18 does not play. The fraudulent restraint alert C47 is described as "Illegal behavior is a crime. Stop it!", And is a display that warns the player to stop, because fraudulent behavior such as goto is a crime. The fraudulent alert C48 is a display that states "Beware of fraud!" And alerts the player not to match the fraud. The add-on alert C410 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately", and is a display that suppresses the add-on to the game. In the add-on alert image C410, a description that directly alerts the add-on to the game, such as "Let's pay attention to the add-on to the game", may be made.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), a jackpot game display effect is executed. The jackpot game display effect is an effect that is performed during the jackpot game generated by the player playing the game after the standby display effect. In the big hit game display effect, the character CRA and the balloon image C42 are displayed. A display indicating a round is made in the balloon image C42. In the example of FIG. 123 (B), it is suggested that the round is 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display indicating right-handing, a display indicating the current number of rounds, a display indicating acquired payouts, and the like are also performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), a copyright holder display effect is executed. In this copyright holder display effect, a character CRA and a copyright holder suggestion logo image C45 are displayed. The copyright holder suggestion logo image C45 is a logo representing the copyright holder of the character CRA, which is a character serving as a motif of the gaming machine 1 and a main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), a maker logo effect is executed. This maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this maker logo display effect, a maker logo image C44 is displayed. This maker logo image C44 is a logo representing the maker of the gaming machine 1. The manufacturer logo image C44 indicates “XYZ” as the manufacturer. In addition, a predetermined catchphrase “Happiness to you!” Is displayed on the maker logo image C44. Note that the maker logo image C44 may be a logo representing a maker that has researched and developed the gaming machine 1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), an alerting effect is executed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, a sinking alerting image C43 and a predetermined alerting image C49 are displayed. This add-on alert image C43 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately", and is a display for suppressing the add-on to the game. In the indentation alert image C43, a statement that directly alerts the user to the indentation in the game, such as "Let's be careful in ingress into the game", may be made. In addition, the predetermined warning image C49 is described as "Be careful of missing, stolen, or lost items of the prepaid card", and alerts the player to be careful of missing, stolen, or left behind prepaid cards. Display.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the predetermined information display effect will be described below.
[Effect 1]
In the predetermined information effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a standby display effect is performed, thereafter, a jackpot game display effect is performed, and thereafter, the display of the immersion alerting image C43 starts to change the special symbol. Done before. According to this configuration, the indentation alert image C43 is displayed at a timing at which the user can calm down after a big hit game, so that the player can accept the content of the indent alert image C43 with sincerity. It is possible to suppress excessive sinking into the game. As a result, the game can be enjoyed soundly and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the predetermined information effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a jackpot game display effect is performed, thereafter, a maker logo display effect (display of the maker logo image C44) is performed, and thereafter, a immersion warning image is displayed. This is performed before the display of C43. According to this configuration, the maker logo image C44 and the immersion alerting image C43 are performed at a timing at which the user can take a break after the jackpot game, and the player can add the immersion alerting image C43 and the gaming machine 1 Manufacturers can be firmly recognized. Thereby, the player can specify the manufacturer that has manufactured the gaming machine 1 that gently snuggles up to the player who performs the immersion alert image C43, and the evaluation of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 by the player can be improved. . As a result, the player can play with a familiarity in the gaming machine 1 created by the manufacturer corresponding to the manufacturer logo image C44, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the predetermined information effects C and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a jackpot game display effect is performed, and then a copyright owner display effect (display of a copyright holder suggestion logo image C45) is performed. This is performed before the display of the immersion warning image C43. According to this configuration, the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45 and the immersion warning image C43 are performed at a timing at which the user can take a break after the jackpot game, and the player can play the game in addition to the immersion warning image C43. The copyright holder of the character CRA, which is the motif of the machine 1, can be firmly recognized. As a result, a player who knows the copyright holder of the character CRA can play the gaming machine 1 with familiarity, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the predetermined information effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display of the immersion alerting image C410 is performed in the standby display effect. According to this configuration, when the user is relaxed while waiting, the immersion alerting image C43 is displayed, so that the player can receive the content of the immersion alerting image C43 deeply, and excessively enter the game. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game can be enjoyed soundly and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the predetermined information effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the immersion warning image C43 is displayed, a predetermined warning image C49 (a warning display for a prepaid card being forgotten, stolen, or left behind) is performed. . According to this configuration, the predetermined alerting image C49 is displayed together with the indented alerting image C43 at a timing at which the user can take a break after the big hit game, and the player can confirm that the prepaid card has been forgotten. You can pay attention to theft and check for lost items. As a result, the game can be enjoyed soundly and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the predetermined information display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the predetermined information effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the alerting effect, other images (for example, a maker logo image C44, a copyright holder suggesting logo image C45, and a minor alerting image C46) are added together with the inset alert image C43. , Fraud suppression alert C47 and fraud alert C48) may be displayed together.
Also, during the jackpot game, the sinking alert image C43, the maker logo image C44, the maker logo image C44, the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45, the minor alert image C46, the fraud suppression alert C47, the fraud alert C48. Alternatively, an image such as the predetermined alert image C49 may be displayed.
Also, in the maker logo display effect, other images (for example, an inset warning image C43, a copyright owner suggestion logo image C45, a minor warning image C46, a fraud suppression warning C47, a fraudulent act together with the maker logo image C44). The alert C48 and the predetermined alert image C49) may be displayed together.
In addition, in the copyright holder display effect, along with the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45, other images (for example, an inset warning image C43, a maker logo image C44, a minor warning image C46, a fraud suppression warning C47, a fraud) The action alert C48 and the predetermined alert image C49) may be displayed together.
Further, in the standby display effect, a copyright holder suggestion logo image C45, a maker logo image C44, and a predetermined alert image C49 may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the predetermined information effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the immersion reminder image C410 of the standby display effect and the immersion reminder image C43 of the reminder effect are described differently within the scope of the immersion reminder. You may make it. For example, "Let's be careful about the game immersion!" Is described in the standby display production immersion warning image C410, and "You are too enthusiastic about the game and the surroundings become invisible." Are you enjoying the game moderately? Be careful! "
In addition, the display position of the immersion alert image C410 of the standby display effect is different from the display position of the immersion alert image C43 of the alert effect, but they may be at the same position.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of performing a standby display,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a jackpot game display during a jackpot game,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a first indentation alert display for alerting the player to sink into the game,
A combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and after the second display effect is performed, A third display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect C4-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a manufacturer logo indicating a manufacturer of the gaming machine,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect and before the third display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect C4-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect C4-1 or Aspect C4-2,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying a logo representing a copyright holder of a predetermined character used in the gaming machine,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect and before the third display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect C4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3,
The first display effect includes a second immersion alert display that alerts the player to immerse themselves in the game,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect C4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is an effect of performing a card forgetting alert display for alerting a user to forget to take a prepaid card,
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is executed when the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The holding icon movement effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. This holding icon movement effect can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol, before and after the fluctuation effect, and the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the hold icon moving effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon move effect A]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for describing the hold icon movement effect A. Of the holding icon movement effects A, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) are executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), in a normal state, a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved downward (along the up-down direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are displayed in the first area FA of the display screen 7a along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserve icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction in which the decorative symbol fluctuates. The three reserved icons 9A are reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a in order from bottom to top. The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a reserved image display area in which the reserved icon 9A can be displayed, and here is an area having a predetermined width from the left end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured to be identifiable by an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or may be in a mode that cannot be identified from other areas. Here, the first area FA is in an aspect that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed and the surrounding area. In FIG. 124 (A), of the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1, the second reserved icon 9A from the bottom (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) is prefetched. Has changed the hold. The reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 124 (B) shows a state where one hold icon 9A has been added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a new hold icon 9A is added to the top of the three hold icons 9A arranged vertically. The newly added suspension icon 9A is the suspension image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure suspension storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 124 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the vertically displayed four holding icons 9A is displayed first. The bottom hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves rightward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A (reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) displayed after the second among the four reserved icons 9A arranged vertically are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (D), the next variable display is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). Due to the shift movement described above, of the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1, the first reserved icon 9A displayed first (reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) Has changed the hold due to prefetching.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (E), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 124 (D), among the three holding icons 9A arranged vertically. The hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displayed first moves rightward. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9A has been changed by the pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after moving to the right, and it becomes a holding digest image 9C (the holding icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 124 (D), of the three reserved icons 9A arranged vertically, the remaining reserved icons 9A displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) shifts downward. Then, the reserved digestion image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps a part of the newly first reserved icon 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a). Is displayed.

  FIG. 124 (F) to FIG. 124 (J) are executed when the gaming state is the probable change state. In FIG. 124 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed at the time of the probability change. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved downward (along the up-down direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three reserve icons 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed in the second area SA of the display screen 7a along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction in which the decorative symbol fluctuates. The three reserved icons 9B are reserved images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b in order from bottom to top. The second area SA of the display screen 7a is a reserved image display area in which the reserved icon 9B can be displayed. Here, the second area SA has a predetermined width from the right end of the display screen 7a. The second area SA may be configured to be identifiable by an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or may be in a mode in which it cannot be identified from other areas. Here, the second area SA is in a form that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the second area SA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the hold icon 9B is displayed and the surrounding area. In FIG. 124 (F), of the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2, the second reserved icon 9B from the bottom (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) is pre-read. Has changed the hold. The reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 124 (G) shows a state in which one hold icon 9B has been added. Here, in the second area SA of the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9B is newly added at the top of the three hold icons 9B arranged vertically. The newly added suspension icon 9B is the suspension image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure suspension storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 124 (H), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, of the four hold icons 9B arranged vertically, the hold symbol displayed first is displayed. The icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) moves to the left and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9B (the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) displayed after the second among the four reserved icons 9B arranged vertically are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (I), the next variable display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). Due to the shift movement described above, of the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2, the first reserved icon 9B displayed first (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) Has changed the hold due to prefetching.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (J), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 124 (I), out of the three holding icons 9B arranged vertically. The hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) displayed first moves to the left. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9B has been changed by the pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after moving to the left, and it becomes a holding digest image 9C (the holding icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 124 (I), of the three reserved icons 9B arranged vertically, the remaining reserved icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) The reserved image 9B) shifts downward. Then, the reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps a part of the newly first reserved icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b). Is displayed.

[Hold icon move effect B]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement effect B. The holding icon movement effect B differs from the holding icon movement effect A in the direction in which the decorative symbol changes and the direction in which the holding icon is arranged. Of the holding icon movement effects B, FIGS. 125 (A) to 125 (E) are executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon movement effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), in a normal state, the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are each moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are displayed in the first area FA of the display screen 7a side by side along the left and right direction of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserve icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction in which the decorative symbol fluctuates. The three reserved icons 9A are reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a in order from right to left. The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a reserved image display area in which the reserved icon 9A can be displayed. In this case, the first area FA has a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured to be identifiable by an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or may be in a mode that cannot be identified from other areas. Here, the first area FA is in an aspect that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed and the surrounding area. In FIG. 125 (A), of the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1, the second reserved icon 9A from the right (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) is pre-read. Has changed the hold. The reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 125 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A has been added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A is newly added to the leftmost of the hold icons 9A arranged side by side. The newly added suspension icon 9A is the suspension image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure suspension storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 125 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four reserved icons 9A arranged horizontally is displayed first. The rightmost holding icon 9A (the holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. Of the four holding icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining holding icons 9A displayed after the second (holding images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are on the right. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the next variable display with the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect D (FIG. 51). Due to the shift movement described above, of the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1, the first reserved icon 9A displayed first (reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) Has changed the hold due to prefetching.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (E), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 125 (D), the three holding icons 9A arranged side by side are displayed. The hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displayed first moves upward. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9A has been changed by the pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after moving upward, and it becomes the holding digest image 9C (the holding icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 125 (D), of the three reserved icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining reserved icons 9A displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) shifts rightward. Then, the reserved digestion image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps a part of the newly first reserved icon 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a). Is displayed.

  FIG. 125 (F) to FIG. 125 (J) are executed when the gaming state is the probable change state. In FIG. 125 (F), at the time of the probability change, the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are each moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed in the second area SA of the display screen 7a side by side along the left and right direction of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction in which the decorative symbol fluctuates. The three reserved icons 9B are reserved images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b in order from left to right. The second area SA of the display screen 7a is a reserved image display area in which the reserved icon 9B can be displayed. Here, the second area SA has a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The second area SA may be configured to be identifiable by an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or may be in a mode in which it cannot be identified from other areas. Here, the second area SA is in a form that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the second area SA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the hold icon 9B is displayed and the surrounding area. In FIG. 125 (F), of the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2, the second reserved icon 9B from the left (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) is prefetched. Has changed the hold. The reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 125 (G) shows a state in which one hold icon 9B has been added. Here, in the second area SA of the display screen 7a, a new hold icon 9B is added to the rightmost of the three hold icons 9B arranged horizontally. The newly added suspension icon 9B is the suspension image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure suspension storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 125 (H), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four holding icons 9B arranged horizontally is displayed first. The leftmost holding icon 9B (the holding image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) moves downward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9B (the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) displayed after the second among the four reserved icons 9B arranged horizontally are on the left. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (I), the next variable display is performed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). Due to the shift movement described above, of the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2, the first reserved icon 9B displayed first (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) Has changed the hold due to prefetching.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (J), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 125 (I), the three holding icons 9B arranged side by side are displayed. The hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) displayed first moves downward. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9B has been changed by the pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after moving down and becomes the holding digest image 9C (the holding icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 125 (I), of the three reserved icons 9B arranged horizontally, the remaining reserved icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) The reserved image 9B) shifts to the left. Then, the reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps a part of the newly first reserved icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b). Is displayed.

[Hold icon move effect C]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for describing the hold icon movement effect C. The hold icon movement effect C differs from the hold icon movement effect A in the game state and the display mode of the hold. FIG. 126 (A) to FIG. 126 (J) are executed when the gaming state is in the non-probable change time saving state. In the hold icon movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), during the working hours, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved downward (along the up-down direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed side by side in the first area FA of the display screen 7a along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. Is done. That is, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are respectively arranged side by side in the direction along the direction in which the decorative symbol fluctuates. The three reserved icons 9A are reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a in order from bottom to top. Similarly, the three reserved icons 9B are reserved images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b in order from bottom to top. The reservation icon 9B of the special figure 2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the reservation icon 9A of the special figure 1. The reservation in Toku-zu 2 is digested prior to the reservation in Toku-zu 1 (priority digestion). Therefore, the three reserved icons 9A of Toku-zu 1 and the reserved icon 9B of Toku-zu 2 are displayed with the reserved icon 9B to be prioritized being overlapped on the upper side.

  The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a reserved image display area in which the reserved icons 9A and 9B can be displayed, and here is an area having a predetermined width from the left end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured to be identifiable by an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or may be in a mode that cannot be identified from other areas. Here, the first area FA is in an aspect that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the areas where the hold icons 9A and 9B are displayed and the periphery thereof. In FIG. 126 (A), of the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2, the second reserved icon 9B from the bottom (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) is pre-read. Has changed the hold. The reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 126 (B) shows a state in which one reservation icon 9B of Toku-zu 2 is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a new hold icon 9B is added at the top of the three hold icons 9B arranged vertically. The newly added suspension icon 9B is the suspension image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure suspension storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 126 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four reserved icons 9B displayed vertically is displayed first. The bottom hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves rightward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9B (the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) displayed after the second among the four reserved icons 9B arranged vertically are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (D), the next variable display with the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). Due to the shift movement described above, of the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2, the first reserved icon 9B displayed first (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) Has changed the hold due to prefetching.

  As shown in FIG. 126 (E), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 126 (D), among the three holding icons 9B arranged vertically. The hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) displayed first moves rightward. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9B has been changed by pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after moving to the right, and it becomes a holding digest image 9C (the holding icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 126 (D), of the three reserved icons 9B arranged vertically, the remaining reserved icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) The reserved image 9B) shifts downward. Then, the reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps a part of the newly first reserved icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b). Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (F), the next variable display with the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed. At this time, a special reach effect or the like may be executed.

  The shift movement of the above-mentioned holding icon 9B is repeated, and when the last holding icon 9B is consumed as shown in FIGS. 126 (G) and (H), as shown in FIG. The reservation digestion of the reservation icon 9A is started. Here, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, of the three vertically aligned hold icons 9A, the lowest hold icon 9A (first displayed) The reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a moves rightward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. The remaining holding icons 9A (the holding images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special-figure holding storage area 85a) displayed after the second among the three holding icons 9A arranged vertically are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (J), the next variable display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

[Hold icon move effect D]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for describing the hold icon movement effect D. The holding icon movement effect D is different from the holding icon movement effect A in the gaming state, the display mode of the holding, the change direction of the decorative symbol, and the arrangement direction of the holding icon. FIG. 127 (A) to FIG. 127 (J) are executed when the gaming state is in the non-probable change time saving state. In the hold icon movement effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed during the working hours. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are each moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed side by side in the left and right direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. Is done. That is, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are respectively arranged side by side in the direction along the direction in which the decorative symbol fluctuates. The three reserved icons 9A are reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a in order from right to left. Similarly, the three reserved icons 9B are reserved images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b in order from left to right. The reservation icon 9B of the special figure 2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the reservation icon 9A of the special figure 1. The reservation in Toku-zu 2 is digested prior to the reservation in Toku-zu 1 (priority digestion). Therefore, the three reserved icons 9A of Toku-zu 1 and the reserved icon 9B of Toku-zu 2 are displayed with the reserved icon 9B to be prioritized being overlapped on the upper side.

  The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a reserved image display area in which the reserved icons 9A and 9B can be displayed. Here, the first area FA has a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured to be identifiable by an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or may be in a mode that cannot be identified from other areas. Here, the first area FA is in an aspect that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the areas where the hold icons 9A and 9B are displayed and the periphery thereof. In FIG. 127 (A), among the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2, the second reserved icon 9B from the right (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) is prefetched. Has changed the hold. The reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 127 (B) shows a state where one reserved icon 9B of Toku-zu 2 is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a new hold icon 9B is newly added to the leftmost of the hold icons 9B arranged side by side. The newly added suspension icon 9B is the suspension image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure suspension storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 127 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four reserved icons 9B arranged horizontally is displayed first. The rightmost holding icon 9B (the holding image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9B (the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) displayed after the second among the four reserved icons 9B arranged horizontally are on the right. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), the following variable display is performed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect D (FIG. 51). Due to the shift movement described above, of the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2, the first reserved icon 9B displayed first (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) Has changed the hold due to prefetching.

  As shown in FIG. 127 (E), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 127 (D), the three holding icons 9B arranged side by side are displayed. The hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) displayed first moves upward. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9B has been changed by the pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after moving upward, and it becomes the holding digest image 9C (the holding icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 127 (D), of the three reserved icons 9B arranged side by side, the remaining reserved icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b). The reserved image 9B) shifts rightward. Then, the reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps a part of the newly first reserved icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b). Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), the next variable display with the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed. At this time, a special reach effect or the like may be executed.

  The shift movement of the above-mentioned holding icon 9B is repeated, and as shown in FIGS. 127 (G) and (H), when the last holding icon 9B is digested, as shown in FIG. The reservation digestion of the reservation icon 9A is started. Here, when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, of the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side, the lowest lowest hold icon 9A displayed first ( The reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. The remaining holding icons 9A (the holding images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special-figure holding storage area 85a) displayed after the second among the three holding icons 9A arranged horizontally are on the right. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (J), the next variable display is performed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the holding icon movement effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a first effect in which a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed side by side in the up-down direction (at normal times) And performing a second effect (at the time of a probable change) in which a plurality of hold icons 9B are displayed along the vertical direction in a second area SA whose position in the left-right direction is different from the first area FA. Can be. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), in the first effect (at normal time), among the plurality of holding icons 9A, the holding icon 9A displayed first is shifted in the left-right direction. Along with (to the right), and the remaining hold icons 9A displayed after the second shift in the up and down direction (downward). According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 (H), in the second effect (at the time of probable change), among the plurality of holding icons 9B, the holding icon 9B displayed first is shifted in the left-right direction. 124 (C), (E), (H) (FIG. 124), and the remaining holding icons 9B displayed after the second are shifted along the vertical direction (downward). As shown in J), in the first effect (normal time) and the second effect (probable change), the hold icons 9A and 9B moved along the left and right directions disappear from the display screen 7a and do not disappear. There is. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a plurality of reserved icons 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 and a plurality of reserved icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 Are displayed side by side in the vertical direction, and a plurality of holding icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 are displayed so as to overlap a part of the plurality of holding icons 9A corresponding to the special figure 1. Can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, in the third effect, among the plurality of holding icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2, the holding icon 9B displayed first is set along the left-right direction. (To the right), and the remaining hold icons displayed after the second are shifted in the vertical direction (downward). According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 and FIG. 126, the first effect (at normal times), the second effect (at a probable change), and the third effect (time reduction) Each has a different game state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the holding icon movement effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
Of the above-mentioned holding icon movement effects A, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) are executed when the gaming state is the normal state, and FIGS. 124 (F) to 124 (J) show the It is assumed to be executed in the probable change state. However, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) and FIGS. 124 (F) to 124 (J) may be executed in the same game state. For example, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) and FIGS. 124 (F) to 124 (J) may be respectively executed in different effect modes in the same game state (for example, a normal state). The same applies to the hold icon movement effect B.
[Modification 2]
FIGS. 126 (A) to 126 (J) of the above-mentioned holding icon movement effect C are executed when the gaming state is in the non-probable change time saving state. However, FIG. 126 (A) to FIG. 126 (J) of the holding icon movement effect C may be executed when the gaming state is in a state other than the non-probable change in the time saving state. The same applies to the hold icon movement effect D.
[Modification 3]
The effects shown in the hold icon movement effects A to D may all be executed in the same game state. For example, the effects shown in the holding icon movement effects A to D may be executed in different effect modes in the same game state (for example, a normal state).

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
A first effect in which a plurality of the hold icons are displayed side by side in a first direction in a first area of the display means;
In a second area different in position from the first area in a second direction intersecting with the first direction, a plurality of the reserved icons are displayed side by side along the first direction. A gaming machine characterized by the ability to perform
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect D1-1,
In the first effect, among the plurality of holding icons, the first holding icon displayed moves along the second direction, and the remaining holding icons displayed after the second hold icon correspond to the second holding icon. A gaming machine characterized by shifting in one direction.
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect D1-1 or Aspect D1-2,
In the second effect, among the plurality of hold icons, the hold icon displayed first moves along the second direction, and the remaining hold icons displayed after the second hold icon correspond to the second hold icon. Shift along the direction of 1,
In the first effect and the second effect, the holding icon moved along the second direction may or may not disappear from the display means.
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3,
In the first area of the display means, a plurality of the reserved icons corresponding to the special figure 1 and a plurality of the reserved icons corresponding to the special figure 2 are displayed side by side in the first direction. A gaming machine capable of executing a third effect in which a plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special figure 2 are displayed overlapping a part of the plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special figure 1.
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-4,
In the third effect, among the plurality of holding icons corresponding to the special map 2, the holding icon displayed first moves along the second direction, and the remaining holding icons displayed after the second move. A gaming machine, wherein the hold icon shifts along the first direction.
◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect D1-4 or Aspect D1-5,
A gaming machine, wherein the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect each have a different gaming state.

  The hold icon superimposition effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This hold icon superimposition effect can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol, before and after the fluctuation effect, and the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the hold icon superimposition effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon superimposition effect A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for describing the hold icon superimposition effect A. The hold icon superimposition effect A is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 128A, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved downward (along the up-down direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserve icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction in which the decorative symbol fluctuates. The three reserved icons 9A are reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a in order from bottom to top. In FIG. 128 (A), the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 128 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A has been added. Here, a new hold icon 9A is added to the top of the three vertically arranged hold icons 9A. The newly added suspension icon 9A is the suspension image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure suspension storage area 85a. Here, the hold of the newly added anchor icon 9A has been changed by prefetching. As shown in FIG. 128 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four reserved icons 9A arranged vertically is displayed first. The reserved icon 9A in the lowermost normal state (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) moves rightward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A (reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) displayed after the second among the four reserved icons 9A arranged vertically are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), the next variable display is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The reserved digest image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) corresponding to the change is not displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (E), during the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, of the three holding icons 9A arranged vertically, the holding icon displayed first. 9A (reservation image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a) displays the preview image PM before the reservation change is performed by prefetching. In other words, before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state, the suggestion image PM indicating that the specific state is set is displayed. This suggestion image PM covers a part of the next adjacent holding icon 9A. Thereafter, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 128 (F) is executed. More specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, and the reserved icon 9A in a specific state and the first image CM are displayed adjacent to the reserved icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image wrapping the hold icon 9A in the specific state, and includes a smiley mark. The first image CM covers a part of the adjacent one of the holding icons 9A, which is one immediately behind, and a part of each of the holding icons 9A, which is further behind.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (G), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. The hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displayed first moves rightward. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9A has changed due to prefetching (it is in a specific state), the display does not disappear even after moving to the right, and as shown in FIG. This is the hold icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. Further, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 128 (F), of the three reserved icons 9A arranged vertically, the remaining reserved icons 9A displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) shifts downward as shown in FIG. 128 (G). Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), the newly stored holding icon 9A (the holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) newly becomes the first storage icon 9A. 9C (the holding icon 9C) is displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the next variable display is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (I), during the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display disappears, and the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The second image LM is a smiley mark here, and moves to the left after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM and covers a part of the first image CM.

[Hold icon superimposition effect B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for describing the hold icon superimposition effect B. The hold icon superimposition effect B differs from the hold icon superimposition effect A in the direction in which the decorative symbol changes and the direction in which the hold icon is arranged. The hold icon superimposition effect B is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon superimposition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are each moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen 7a side by side along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserve icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction in which the decorative symbol fluctuates. The three reserved icons 9A are reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a in order from right to left. In FIG. 129 (A), the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 129 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A has been added. Here, a new hold icon 9A is added to the leftmost of the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side. The newly added suspension icon 9A is the suspension image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure suspension storage area 85a. Here, the hold of the newly added anchor icon 9A has been changed by prefetching. As shown in FIG. 129 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four reserved icons 9A arranged horizontally is displayed first. The rightmost holding icon 9A in the normal state (the holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. Of the four holding icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining holding icons 9A displayed after the second (holding images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are on the right. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (D), the next variable display is performed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of the change may be in the form of the decorative symbol change effect D (FIG. 51). The reserved digest image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) corresponding to the change is not displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (E), during the variable display of the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R, of the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side, the hold icon displayed first. 9A (reservation image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a) displays the preview image PM before the reservation change is performed by prefetching. In other words, before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state, the suggestion image PM indicating that the specific state is set is displayed. This suggestion image PM covers a part of the next adjacent holding icon 9A. Thereafter, a first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 129 (F) is executed. More specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, and the reserved icon 9A in a specific state and the first image CM are displayed adjacent to the reserved icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image wrapping the hold icon 9A in the specific state, and includes a smiley mark. The first image CM covers a part of the adjacent one of the holding icons 9A, which is one immediately behind, and a part of each of the holding icons 9A, which is further behind.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (G), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 129 (F), the three holding icons 9A arranged side by side are displayed. The hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displayed first moves upward. At this time, the moved holding icon 9A has been changed by the pre-reading (it is in a specific state), so that the display does not disappear even after moving up, and as shown in FIG. 129 (H), the holding digest image 9C ( This is the hold icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. Further, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 129 (F), of the three reserved icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining reserved icons 9A displayed after the second one (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) shifts rightward as shown in FIG. 129 (G). Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (H), the reserved digest image is newly added to a part of the reserved icon 9A (reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a). 9C (the holding icon 9C) is displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the following variable display is performed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of the change may be in the form of the decorative symbol change effect D (FIG. 51).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (I), during the variable display of the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R, the variable display disappears, and the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The second image LM is a smiley mark here, and moves to the left after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM and covers a part of the first image CM.

[Hold icon superimposition effect C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon superimposition effect C. The hold icon superimposition effect C differs from the hold icon superimposition effect A in the display mode of the hold icon 9A and the display mode of the hold icon 9C. The hold icon superimposition effect C is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon superimposition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved downward (along the up-down direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the reserved digestion image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) is displayed on the left end of the display screen 7a, and the two reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged above the reserved icon 9C in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. Are displayed side by side. That is, the reserved icon 9C and the two reserved icons 9A are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction in which the decorative symbol fluctuates. The two reserved icons 9A are reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a in order from bottom to top. Here, the lowermost holding icon 9A displayed first (the holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) becomes a specific state by pre-reading (the holding changes. ing. The first reserved icon 9A is displayed by overlapping the reserved digestion image 9C thereunder (the reserved icon 9C), and a part thereof is difficult to visually recognize. The second hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special-figure hold storage area 85a) is displayed with the first hold icon 9A overlapping, and a part of the icon becomes difficult to view. I have.

  FIG. 130 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A has been added. Here, a new hold icon 9A is added to the top of two hold icons 9A arranged vertically. The newly added suspension icon 9A is a suspension image 9A corresponding to the third storage area of the first special figure suspension storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 130 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the reserved digestion image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (D), of the two hold icons 9A arranged vertically, the hold icon 9A in the specific state at the bottom displayed first (the first hold icon 9A in the first special figure hold storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) corresponding to one storage area moves downward and becomes the reserved icon 9C. Further, the remaining two reserved icons 9A (the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) also shift downward.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (E), the next variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). During the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the holding icon newly displayed first (displayed first) among the two holding icons 9A arranged vertically. 9A (reservation image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a) displays the preview image PM before the reservation change is performed by prefetching. In other words, before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state advantageous to the player, the suggestion image PM indicating that the hold change occurs is displayed. This suggestion image PM covers a part of the adjacent one-side reserved icon 9A and a part of the immediately preceding adjacent reserved icon 9C. Thereafter, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 130 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, the first holding icon 9A in a specific state, and the first image CM is displayed adjacent to the first holding icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image wrapping the hold icon 9A in the specific state, and includes a smiley mark. The first image CM covers a part of each of the adjacent one of the holding icons 9A immediately behind and the adjacent one of the holding icons 9C in the front.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (G), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears and the first (first displayed). The reserved icon 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) moves downward toward the display position of the reserved icon 9C. Further, the remaining reserved icons 9A (second reserved images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) displayed after the second are also shifted downward. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 130 (H), the first (first displayed) holding icon 9A becomes a new holding digestion image 9C (the holding icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. Further, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. FIG. 130 (H) shows a mode in which the next change display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is being performed, and the hold icon 9A is newly added. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of the change may be in the form of the decorative symbol change effect A (FIG. 48).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (I), during the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display disappears, and the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The second image LM is a smiley mark here, and moves to the left after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM and covers a part of the first image CM.

[Hold icon superimposition effect D]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for describing the hold icon superimposition effect D. The hold icon superimposition effect C differs from the hold icon superimposition effect A in the direction in which the decorative symbol changes, the display mode of the hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon 9C. The hold icon superimposition effect D is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon superimposition effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are each moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the reserved digest image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) is displayed at the lower end of the display screen 7a, and the two reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 are located on the left side of the reserved icon 9C along the left and right directions of the display screen 7a. Are displayed side by side. That is, the reserved icon 9C and the two reserved icons 9A are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction in which the decorative symbol fluctuates. The two reserved icons 9A are reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a in order from right to left. Here, the rightmost holding icon 9A displayed first (the holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) becomes a specific state by pre-reading (the holding is changed). ing. The first reserved icon 9A is displayed with the reserved digest image 9C on the right thereof (the reserved icon 9C) overlapped, and a part thereof is difficult to visually recognize. The second hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special-figure hold storage area 85a) is displayed with the first hold icon 9A overlapping, and a part of the icon becomes difficult to view. I have.

  FIG. 131 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A has been added. Here, a new hold icon 9A is added to the leftmost of the two hold icons 9A arranged side by side. The newly added suspension icon 9A is a suspension image 9A corresponding to the third storage area of the first special figure suspension storage area 85a. When the hold icon 9A is newly added, the hold icon 9A immediately before (to the right of) the hold icon 9A to be added moves once to the left, and does not overlap with the hold icon before that. Also, the newly added hold icon 9A does not overlap with the immediately preceding (right side) hold icon 9A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the reserved digestion image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) moves upward. Then, it disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, of the three holding icons 9A arranged horizontally, the rightmost holding icon 9A in the specific state displayed first (the holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a). Moves rightward and becomes the hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining two holding icons 9A (the holding images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) also shift rightward. As a result of this shift movement, as shown in FIG. 131 (D), the holding icons 9C and 9A again partially overlap the preceding and following holding icons. Then, the next variable display is performed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of the change may be in the form of the decorative symbol change effect D (FIG. 51).

  As shown in FIG. 131 (E), during the variable display of the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R, a new one is displayed first among the two holding icons 9A arranged side by side. As the holding icon 9A (first displayed) (the holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a), the preview image PM before the holding change by prefetching is performed is displayed. . In other words, before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state advantageous to the player, the suggestion image PM indicating that the hold change occurs is displayed. This suggestion image PM covers a part of the adjacent one-side reserved icon 9A and a part of the immediately preceding adjacent reserved icon 9C. After that, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 131 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, the first holding icon 9A in a specific state, and the first image CM is displayed adjacent to the first holding icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image wrapping the hold icon 9A in the specific state, and includes a smiley mark. The first image CM covers a part of each of the adjacent one of the holding icons 9A immediately behind and the adjacent one of the holding icons 9C in the front.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (G), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, and as shown in FIG. 131 (H). The first (first displayed) holding icon 9A (the holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) moves rightward toward the display position of the holding icon 9C. I do. In addition, the remaining reserved icon 9A displayed second (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) also shifts to the right. Thereby, the first (first displayed) holding icon 9A becomes a new holding digest image 9C (the holding icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. Further, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 131 (I), the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a while performing the next variable display with the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The second image LM is a smiley mark here, and moves to the left after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM and covers a part of the first image CM. At this time, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold icon superimposition effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a first effect in which a reserved digestion image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the reserved icon 9A; As shown in D), a second effect in which the reserved icon 9A is displayed and the reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) is not displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the hold icon 9A has a case where the hold icon 9A has changed to a specific mode and a case where the hold icon 9A has not changed to a specific mode. As shown in FIG. 128 (F), in the first effect, a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed, and among the plurality of hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A displayed first is in a specific state. As shown in FIG. 128 (G), when the reserved icon 9A in the specific state moves to a predetermined position and becomes the reserved digest image 9C (the reserved icon 9C), a plurality of reserved icons are displayed as shown in FIG. 128 (H). Of the icons 9C, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A displayed second. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), in the second effect, a plurality of holding icons 9A are displayed, and among the plurality of holding icons 9A, the holding icon 9A displayed first. Is in a normal state. After the hold icon 9A in the normal state moves toward a predetermined position as shown in FIG. 128 (C), as shown in FIG. Disappear. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, in the first effect, when the hold icon 9A displayed first among the plurality of hold icons 9A is in the specific state, the hold icon 9A in the specific state is displayed. , A first image CM is displayed, and a part of the first image CM covers a part of the second displayed holding icon 9A among the plurality of holding icons 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (F), in the first effect, a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed along the vertical direction, and as shown in FIG. 128 (G). Of the plurality of holding icons 9A, the holding icon 9A displayed first moves rightward to become the holding icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed second are arranged along the second direction, and are partially displayed in an overlapping manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), when changing from the normal state to the specific state, the hold icon 9A indicates that the state changes to the specific state before changing to the specific state. Is displayed, and the suggestion image PM covers a part of another holding icon 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the hold icon superimposition effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
The above-mentioned holding icon superimposition effects A to D are performed when the gaming state is normal. However, the above-mentioned holding icon superimposition effects A to D may be performed in a game state other than the normal state. For example, the above-mentioned holding icon superimposition effects A to D may be performed at the time of probable change or at the time of non-probable change.
[Modification 2]
In the above-described holding icon superimposition effects A to D, the suggestion image PM is displayed before the holding icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state. However, the suggestion image PM may be displayed before the hold icon 9A changes from the specific state to a specific state that is more advantageous for the player.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is the hold icon corresponding to the hold,
A first effect in which the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon;
And a second effect in which the hold icon is displayed and the hold icon is not displayed.
◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
The hold icon has a specific state in which it has changed to a specific mode, and a normal state in which it has not changed to a specific mode,
In the first effect, the plurality of hold icons are displayed, and among the plurality of hold icons, the hold icon displayed first is in the specific state, and the hold icon in the specific state is located at a predetermined position. Move to the hold icon, the hold icon is displayed overlapping with a part of the hold icon displayed second among the plurality of hold icons,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2,
In the second effect, the plurality of hold icons are displayed, and among the plurality of hold icons, the hold icon displayed first is in the normal state, and the hold icon in the normal state is the predetermined hold icon. A gaming machine characterized by disappearing from the display means after moving toward a position.
◇ [Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect D2-2 or Aspect D2-3,
In the first effect, when a hold icon displayed first among the plurality of hold icons enters the specific state, a specific image is displayed adjacent to the hold icon in the specific state, and the specific image is displayed. A portion of the plurality of holding icons covers a part of a second holding icon displayed among the plurality of holding icons.
◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-2 to D2-4,
In the first effect, a plurality of the reserve icons are displayed side by side along a first direction, and among the plurality of reserve icons, a reserve icon displayed first moves in a second direction and The hold icon, wherein the hold icon that is displayed second among the plurality of hold icons and the hold icon are arranged along the second direction, and are partially overlapped. A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect D2-2 to Aspect D2-5,
When the hold icon changes from the normal state to the specific state, before changing to the specific state, a suggestion image indicating that the state is changed to the specific state is displayed, and the suggestion image includes another hold image. A gaming machine characterized by covering part of an icon.

  Hereinafter, the hold special display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This hold special display effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the hold special display effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Hold special display effect]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the hold display pattern 1 and the hold display pattern 2 of the hold special display effects.
FIG. 133 is a diagram for describing the hold display pattern 3 and the hold display pattern 4 of the hold special display effects.
FIG. 134 is a view for explaining the hold display pattern 5 and the hold display pattern 6 in the hold special display effects.
FIG. 135 is a diagram for describing the hold display pattern 7 and the hold display pattern 8 of the hold special display effects.
This hold special display effect can be executed in a plurality of hold display patterns. Hereinafter, the hold display patterns 1 to 8 will be described. The hold display patterns 1 to 8 are effects performed with the same change from the start of the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) to the stop display.

[Holding display pattern 1]
In the suspended display pattern 1, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. In addition, in the fluctuation start effect, a hold icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that in the change start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (C), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as in the fluctuation start effect and the reach effect 1:00. In the reach effect 2, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect 1:00.
This hold display pattern 1 does not change the manner of hold display.

[Holding display pattern 2]
In the suspension display pattern 2, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 132 (D). In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. In addition, in the fluctuation start effect, a hold icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (E), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that in the change start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (F), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the positions of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are different from those in the reach effect 1. More specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B move from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, and are arranged obliquely with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C, the shape, the color, or the pattern is the same as in the reach effect 1:00. In the reach effect 2, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect 1:00.
The suspension display pattern 2 is a mode in which the position changes among the suspension display modes.

[Pending Display Pattern 3]
In the suspension display pattern 3, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 133 (A). In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. In addition, in the fluctuation start effect, a hold icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that in the change start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (C), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in two places. One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as in the reach effect 1:00. Another place (also referred to as a second place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is a different place (position) as compared to the reach effect 1. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B that are displayed in different places as compared to the reach effect 1 are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, and are oblique to the lower side of the display screen 7a. Placed in The shape, color, or pattern of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are the same as those in the reach effect 1:00. In the reach effect 3, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect 1:00.
The hold display pattern 3 is such that the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are simultaneously arranged in two places, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in one place have different positions in the hold display mode. It is a changing aspect.

[Holding display pattern 4]
In the suspension display pattern 4, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 133 (D). In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. In addition, in the fluctuation start effect, a hold icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (E), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that in the change start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (F), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are different in color and design from those in the reach effect 1 and are changed to a red cross hatch design. In the reach effect 4, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect 1:00.
The reserved display pattern 4 is a form in which the color and the pattern are changed among the reserved display forms.

[Holding display pattern 5]
In the suspended display pattern 5, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. In addition, in the fluctuation start effect, a hold icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that in the change start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (C), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have different shapes as compared to the time 1 of the reach effect, and have changed to a star shape. In the reach effect 5, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect 1:00.
The hold display pattern 5 is a form in which the shape changes among the hold display forms.

[Holding display pattern 6]
In the suspension display pattern 6, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. In addition, in the fluctuation start effect, a hold icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (E), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that in the change start effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (F), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at two places (positions). One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as in the reach effect 1:00. Another place (also referred to as a second place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is a different place (position) as compared to the reach effect 1. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place are different in color and design from the reach effect 1 at the time, and are changed to a red cross hatch design. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B displayed in the second place are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, are arranged obliquely with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and reach. The shape is different from that at the time of the effect 1 and has changed to a star shape. In the reach effect 6, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect 1:00.

  In the hold display pattern 6, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are simultaneously arranged in two places, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place are different in color and hold display mode. This is a mode in which the pattern changes, and the position and shape of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the second place change in the hold display mode.

[Holding display pattern 7]
In the suspension display pattern 7, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. In addition, in the fluctuation start effect, a hold icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that in the change start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (C), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are different in position, shape, color, and pattern as compared with the time 1 of the reach effect. . More specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B move from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, and are arranged obliquely with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B are different in shape and change to a star shape as compared to the reach effect 1, and are different in color and pattern and change to a red cross hatch pattern. . In the reach effect 7, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect 1:00.
The suspension display pattern 7 is a mode in which the position, the shape, the color, and the pattern are changed among the suspension display modes.

[Holding display pattern 8]
In the suspension display pattern 8, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 135 (D). In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. In addition, in the fluctuation start effect, a hold icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (E), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that in the change start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (F), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at two places (positions). One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as in the reach effect 1:00. Another place (also referred to as a second place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is a different place (position) as compared to the reach effect 1. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place are displayed in the same manner as in the reach effect 1. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B displayed in the second place are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, are arranged obliquely with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and reach. The shape is different from that at the time of the effect 1 and has changed to a star shape. In the reach effect 8, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect 1:00.
In the hold display pattern 8, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are simultaneously arranged in two places, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place are not changed in the hold display mode. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the second place are the forms in which the position and shape of the hold display form change.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold special display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed as the hold display at the time of the reach effect 1 (hereinafter, the reach effect 1 A hold display at the time of the reach effect 2 (hereinafter, also referred to as a reach effect 2 o'clock hold display) is performed. According to this configuration, since the hold display mode is different between the reach effect 1 and the reach effect 2, the player's interest in the hold display can be attracted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 3, 6, and 8, in the reach effect 2, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place and the hold icon 9C are displayed in the second place. The displayed hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the same time. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the hold display, to attract the player's interest in the hold display, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 3, 6, 7, and 8, in the reach effect 1, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in the first place, In the effect 2, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the second place. According to this configuration, the position of the hold display is different between the reach effect 1 and the reach effect 2, so that the player's interest in the hold display can be attracted and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 5 to 8, in the reach effect 1, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in a circular shape, and in the reach effect 2, the hold icon 9C is displayed. The icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in a star shape. According to this configuration, since the shape of the hold display is different between the reach effect 1 and the reach effect 2, the player's interest in the hold display can be attracted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the held special display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, a chance-up effect using the hold icon 9A and / or the hold icon 9C of the reach effect 2 may be performed. According to this configuration, since the hold display and the chance-up effect can be shared, an entertaining effect can be provided without wastefully using the display screen 7a.
For example, in the hold display pattern 2, a look-ahead effect as a chance-up effect may be performed, and the look-ahead result may be displayed by changing the shape, color, and pattern of the hold display. In this case, for example, when the result of the pre-reading (prior judgment) is a big hit, the color of the reserved icon 9A to be pre-read is changed from white to red.
Further, in the hold display pattern 2, a prefetch effect as a chance-up effect may be performed, and a predetermined display indicating the prefetch result and the hold display may be displayed in association with each other. In this case, for example, when the result of the pre-reading (prior determination) is a big hit, a timer display or a predetermined chance-up character (such as a hot letter) may be associated with the reserved icon 9A to be pre-read.

[Modification 2]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, the effect number suggestion effect indicating the number of predetermined effects using the hold icon 9A and / or the hold icon 9C of the reach effect 2. May be performed. According to this configuration, the presentation effect can be provided without wasting the display screen 7a because the display on hold and the effect suggesting the number of effects can be shared.
For example, in the reach effect 2 of the hold display pattern 2, every time a pseudo continuous effect is performed, one color of the hold icon 9A at the second location may be changed to indicate the number of pseudo continuous effects. In this case, when the pseudo consecutive effects are performed three times, three icons (for example, red) of a color different from white (for example, red) and one white icon are displayed among the hold icons 9A. Note that, in this case, when the change in which the hold display pattern 2 is performed ends, the hold display may return to the original white color.
In addition, the first modification and the second modification may be combined to perform a chance up effect and an effect number suggestion effect using the hold display.

[Modification 3]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 1 to 8, in the reach effect 1 and / or the reach effect 2, in addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon A hold display different from 9C may be additionally provided. For example, in the reach effect 1 and / or the reach effect 2, a hold display represented by a number may be additionally provided in addition to the hold icon 9A. This added hold display indicates the same hold number as the hold icon 9A. In this case, if the number of the hold icons 9A is four (the number of hold icons is four), the added hold display is represented as “4”.
For example, in the reach effect 1 and / or the reach effect 2, a hold display represented by a symbol may be additionally provided in addition to the hold icon 9A. This added hold display indicates the same hold number as the hold icon 9A. In this case, if the number of the hold icons 9A is four (the number of hold icons is four), the added hold display is represented by a symbol representing “4”.

[Modification 3]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, the hold display mode changes in the reach effect 2, but the position of the hold icon, the shape of the hold icon, the color of the hold icon, All that is required is to change at least one of the hold icon patterns. Further, the hold display mode may be changed by combining the position of the hold icon, the shape of the hold icon, the color of the hold icon, and the design of the hold icon.

[Modification 4]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2, 3, 6 to 8, the hold display moves to the upper left in the reach effect 2, but moves to the lower left, the upper right, and the center. You may. That is, when the hold display moves from the state of the reach effect 1 to the state of the reach effect 2, it may be moved to a different position.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
The first display effect is an effect of performing a first hold display form effect of displaying a hold display form in a first form,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second hold display form effect of displaying the display form of the hold display in a second form different from the first form,
The first hold display pattern may be selected as one of the plurality of display patterns for displaying the hold display,
The second hold display pattern may be selected as one of the plurality of display patterns for displaying the hold display,
In the same change, when performing the hold display, one of the plurality of display patterns is selected and displayed,
The first hold display pattern is a pattern in which a first display effect is performed,
The second hold display pattern is a pattern in which the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect D3-1,
In the case where the second display effect is performed in the second hold display pattern, the first display effect may be simultaneously performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect 3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect D3-1 or Aspect D3-2,
The first form of the hold display is located at the first position,
The hold display of the second mode is located at a second position different from the first position.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-3,
The hold display of the first mode has a first shape,
The hold display of the second mode is a second shape whose shape is different from the first shape.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-4,
In the second display effect, a chance-up effect using the hold display in the second mode is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect D3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-5,
In the second display effect, an effect number suggestion effect indicating the number of predetermined effects is performed using the hold display in the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The operation means image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. This operation means image display effect can be executed during a change effect of a decorative symbol or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation unit image display effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Operation means image display effect A]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for describing the operation unit image display effect A. The operation means image display effect A is executed in accordance with, for example, a battle effect at the time of a probability change. In the operation means image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), four button images BN1 to BN4, a meter image PL, and a sword image VI are displayed. In FIG. 136 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize. The mode that is difficult to view includes a case where the image is not displayed, a case where the image is displayed small, a case where the image is displayed faintly, and the like. Each of the four button images BN1 to BN4 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed on the display screen 7a at a position corresponding to each vertex of the rectangular shape. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining amount of points can be determined by changing the area of a specific color portion inside. Here, “1300” is described at the lower left of the meter image PL, which indicates that when the number of points reaches 1300, the portion of the specific color inside disappears. The sword image VI represents the appearance of the sword member 64, and is displayed translucent here. As shown in FIG. 136 (B), the four button images BN1 to BN4 change to another color at regular intervals, and perform an effect simulating a mode in which the effect button 63 emits light.

  When the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136 (C), the upper right button image BN4 first disappears, and the point number PN of “100” is displayed. When the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 136 (D), the point number PN of “150” is further overlapped with the previously displayed point number PN of “100”. Is done. Further, the sword image VI changes in response to the repeated depression of the effect button 63. Here, the sword image VI changes to another color so as to represent a mode in which light is emitted.

  Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), the button image BN3 at the lower right disappears, and the point number PN of “200” is displayed. . When the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), the point number PN of “250” is further overlapped with the previously displayed point number PN of “200”. Is done. Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), the lower left button image BN2 disappears, and the point number PN of “300” is displayed. When the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), the point number PN of “330” is further overlapped with the previously displayed point number PN of “300”. Is done.

  Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, the upper left button image BN1 disappears, and the point number PN is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), a sword image ASI, a timer bar TBI, and an operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64, and here, the translucent sword image VI becomes dark and becomes the sword image ASI. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65. The timer bar TBI indicates an operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TBI overlaps the sword image ASI and is displayed in front of the sword image ASI. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that urges the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed as “push in !!” here.

  When the player presses the sword member 64, a total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 136 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. 136 (C) to 136 (F) is displayed, the increment display MTP in which the numerical value is rapidly incremented from 0 of the digital value is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment stops, and the final display TPD indicating the total point “1330” is displayed. Then, an effect of reducing the remaining amount of the meter image PL by the amount corresponding to the total point is executed. Since the remaining amount of the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, here, after displaying the final display TPD of the total point “1330”, the meter image PL decreases the area of the specific color portion inside, and The effect of running out of volume is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (J), an achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the character "CLEAR!" Is displayed on the achieved image ACV.

[Operation means image display effect B]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for describing the operation unit image display effect B. The operation means image display effect B is different from the operation means image display effect A in the number of button images BN displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation means image display effect B is executed in accordance with, for example, a battle effect at the time of a probability change. In the operation means image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), three button images BN1 to BN3 and a meter image PL are displayed. In FIG. 137 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in a manner that is difficult to see. The mode that is difficult to view includes a case where the image is not displayed, a case where the image is displayed small, a case where the image is displayed faintly, and the like. Each of the three button images BN1 to BN3 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed on the display screen 7a at a position corresponding to each vertex of a triangle. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining amount of points can be determined by changing the area of a specific color portion inside. As shown in FIG. 137 (B), the three button images BN1 to BN3 change to another color at regular intervals, and perform an effect simulating a mode in which the effect button 63 emits light.

  When the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), first, the button image BN3 in the upper center disappears, and the point number PN of “100” is displayed. When the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), the point number PN of “150” is further overlapped with the previously displayed point number PN of “100”. Is done.

  Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137 (E), the button image BN2 at the lower right disappears, and the point number PN of “200” is displayed. . Further, when the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is repeated, the point number PN of “250” is further superimposed on the previously displayed point number PN of “200”. Furthermore, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137 (F), the lower left button image BN1 disappears, and the point number PN of “300” is displayed. Further, when the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is repeated, the point number PN of “330” is further superimposed on the previously displayed point number PN of “300”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (G), a sword image ASI, a timer bar TBI, and an operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI shows the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65. The timer bar TBI indicates an operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TBI overlaps the sword image ASI and is displayed in front of the sword image ASI. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that urges the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed as “push in !!” here.

  When the player presses the sword member 64, a total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 137 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. 137 (C) to 137 (F) is displayed, the increment display MTP in which the numerical value is rapidly incremented from 0 of the digital value is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment stops, and the final display TPD indicating the total point “1330” is displayed. Then, an effect of reducing the remaining amount of the meter image PL by the amount corresponding to the total point is executed. Since the remaining amount of the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, here, after displaying the final display TPD of the total point “1330”, the meter image PL decreases the area of the specific color portion inside, and The effect of running out of volume is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (J), an achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the character "CLEAR!" Is displayed on the achieved image ACV.

[Operation means image display effect C]
FIG. 138 is a diagram for describing the operation unit image display effect C. The operation means image display effect C is different from the operation means image display effect A in that an enlarged button image BBN is displayed instead of the sword image ASI in FIG. 138 (G). The operation means image display effect C is executed in accordance with, for example, a battle effect at the time of a probability change. In the operation means image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), four button images BN1 to BN4 and a meter image PL are displayed. In FIG. 138 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in a manner that is difficult to see. The mode that is difficult to view includes a case where the image is not displayed, a case where the image is displayed small, a case where the image is displayed faintly, and the like. Each of the four button images BN1 to BN4 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed on the display screen 7a at a position corresponding to each vertex of the rectangular shape. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining amount of points can be determined by changing the area of a specific color portion inside. Here, “1300” is described at the lower left of the meter image PL, which indicates that when the number of points reaches 1300, the portion of the specific color inside disappears. As shown in FIG. 138 (B), the four button images BN1 to BN4 change to another color at regular intervals, and perform an effect simulating a mode in which the effect button 63 emits light.

  When the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 138 (C), first, the upper right button image BN4 disappears, and the point number PN of “100” is displayed. When the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 138 (D), the point number PN of “150” is further overlapped with the previously displayed point number PN of “100”. Is done.

  Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), the lower right button image BN3 disappears, and the point number PN of “200” is displayed. . When the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), the point number PN of “250” is further overlapped with the display of the previously displayed point number PN of “200”. Is done. Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, the lower left button image BN2 disappears and the point number PN of "300" is displayed as shown in FIG. 138 (F). When the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), the point number PN of “330” is further overlapped and displayed with the previously displayed point number PN of “300”. Is done.

  Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, the upper left button image BN1 disappears, and the point number PN is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), an enlarged button image BBN, a timer bar TBI, and an operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The enlarged button image BBN represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is larger than the button image BN. The enlarged button image BBN and the button image BN represent the same appearance of the effect button 63, but may have the same shape or different shapes. The timer bar TBI indicates a validity period of the operation reception of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI is displayed on the front of the enlarged button image BBN so as to overlap the enlarged button image BBN. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63, and is displayed as "press !!!!" here.

  When the player presses the sword member 64, a total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 138 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. 138 (C) to 138 (F) is displayed, the increment display MTP in which the numerical value is rapidly incremented from 0 of the digital value is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment stops, and the final display TPD indicating the total point “1330” is displayed. Then, an effect of reducing the remaining amount of the meter image PL by the amount corresponding to the total point is executed. Since the remaining amount of the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, here, after displaying the final display TPD of the total point “1330”, the meter image PL decreases the area of the specific color portion inside, and The effect of running out of volume is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (J), an achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the character "CLEAR!" Is displayed on the achieved image ACV.

[Operation means image display effect D]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for describing the operation unit image display effect D. The operation means image display effect D differs from the operation means image display effect A in the order of increasing and decreasing the number of button images BN displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation means image display effect D is executed in accordance with, for example, a battle effect at the time of a probability change. In the operation means image display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), one button image BN1 and a meter image PL are displayed. In FIG. 139 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize. The mode that is difficult to view includes a case where the image is not displayed, a case where the image is displayed small, a case where the image is displayed faintly, and the like. The button image BN1 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining amount of points can be determined by changing the area of a specific color portion inside. Here, “1300” is described at the lower left of the meter image PL, which indicates that when the number of points reaches 1300, the portion of the specific color inside disappears. As shown in FIG. 139 (B), the button image BN1 changes to another color at regular intervals, and performs an effect simulating a mode in which the effect button 63 emits light. When the player presses down the effect button 63 repeatedly, a point number PN of “100” is displayed below the button image BN1 as shown in FIG. 139 (B).

  When the player further presses down the effect button 63, a new button image BN2 is displayed below the button image BN1, as shown in FIG. 139 (C). Further, the number of points PN of “100” or “150” is displayed on the right side of the button image BN2. When the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), a new button image BN3 is displayed on the right side of the button image BN2. Further, a point number PN of “200” or “250” is displayed above the button image BN3. Further, when the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is repeated, a new button image BN4 is displayed below the button image BN3 as shown in FIG. 139 (E).

  Further, when the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is repeated, the four button images BN1 to BN4 disappear from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 139 (F). Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (G), a sword image ASI, a timer bar TBI, and an operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI shows the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65. The timer bar TBI indicates an operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TBI overlaps the sword image ASI and is displayed in front of the sword image ASI. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that urges the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed as “push in !!” here.

  When the player presses the sword member 64, a total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 139 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. 136 (C) to 136 (F) is displayed, the increment display MTP in which the numerical value is rapidly incremented from 0 of the digital value is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment stops, and the final display TPD indicating the total point “1330” is displayed. Then, an effect of reducing the remaining amount of the meter image PL by the amount corresponding to the total point is executed. Since the remaining amount of the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, here, after displaying the final display TPD of the total point “1330”, the meter image PL decreases the area of the specific color portion inside, and The effect of running out of volume is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (J), an achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the character "CLEAR!" Is displayed on the achieved image ACV.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the operation means image display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 136 (A) and FIG. 138 (A), a first effect in which a plurality of button images BN1 to BN4 are displayed on the display screen 7a, and FIG. 138, a second effect in which a smaller number of button images BN1 to BN3 are displayed than the number of button images BN1 to BN4 displayed in the first effect, as shown in FIG. (F), as shown in FIG. 138 (F), a third effect in which a smaller number of button images BN1 than the number of button images BN1 to BN3 displayed in the second effect are displayed. be able to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 (E) and 138 (E), the number of button images BN1 to BN3 displayed in the second effect is smaller than that of the button images BN1 to BN3 and displayed in the third effect. A fourth effect in which a larger number of button images BN1 and BN2 are displayed than the number of button images BN1 to be performed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), after the fourth effect, an enlarged button image BBN representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and larger than the button image BN is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), after the fourth effect, a sword image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the second effect is executed after the first effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. , The third effect is executed after the second effect, the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player, and the fourth effect is executed after the third effect. Points are displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63 by the user, and after the fourth effect, the total points are the sum of the point numbers displayed in the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect. The number TPD is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the meter image PL is displayed in the first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect. After the total point number TPD is displayed, the meter image PL changes according to the total point number TPD. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the operation means image display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above-mentioned operation means image display effects A to D, the button image BN represents the appearance of the effect button 63. However, the button image BN may represent the appearance of the sword button 65.
[Modification 2]
The above-described operation means image display effects A to D are performed when the gaming state changes. However, the above-described operation means image display effects A to D may be performed in a game state other than the probability change. For example, the above-described operation means image display effects A to D may be performed during normal times or during non-probable changes in working hours.
[Modification 3]
The operation means image display effects A to D are executed when the operation of depressing the effect button 63 is repeated. However, the above-described operation means image display effects A to D may be configured to proceed without the operation of pressing the effect button 63. Moreover, even if there is no pushing operation of the sword member 64, the total point increase display effect may be performed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
First operation means operable by a player;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first operation unit image representing an appearance of the first operation unit,
A first effect in which a plurality of the first operation means images are displayed on the display means;
A second effect in which a smaller number of the first operation means images are displayed than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the first effect;
A third effect in which a smaller number of the first operation means images are displayed than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the second effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E1-1,
The number of the first operation means images is smaller than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the second effect and larger than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the third effect. A gaming machine capable of executing a displayed fourth effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images represents an appearance of the first operation unit, and is an enlarged first operation unit image larger than the first operation unit image.
The gaming machine, wherein the enlarged first operation means image is displayed after the fourth effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E1-2, further,
A second operating means operable by the player,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second operation unit image representing an appearance of the second operation unit,
The gaming machine, wherein the second operation means image is displayed after the fourth effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-2 to E1-4,
The second effect is executed after the first effect, and the number of points is displayed according to an operation of the first operation unit by a player;
The third effect is executed after the second effect, and the number of points is displayed according to an operation of the first operation means by a player;
The fourth effect is executed after the third effect, and the number of points is displayed according to an operation of the first operation means by a player;
After the fourth effect, a total number of points, which is the sum of the points displayed in the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect, is displayed. Gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a meter image,
The meter image is displayed in the first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect,
After the total point number is displayed, the meter image changes according to the total point number.

Hereinafter, the effect during the probability change will be described with reference to FIGS. This effect during probable change can be executed when the gaming state is in the probable state. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the effect during the certainty change is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.
In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the probability change state is reached, the probability change state is continued until almost the next big hit, so that the next big hit becomes easier than in the normal state.

[Direction A during probable change]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for describing the effect A during the probability change.
In the probable change effect A, a first reach effect and a second reach effect can be performed. Hereinafter, the first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same fluctuation, but are performed with different fluctuations.

[First Reach Direction]
In the first reach effect of the effect during the probable change, first, as shown in FIG. 140 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), a target hit mission effect A is performed. In the target hit mission effect A, a target image E21 is displayed. The target image E21 represents a circular target, a half area of the target is an area (probable change suggestion area) indicating a probability change jackpot (scheduled V passing planned hit), and the other half area of the target is a normal jackpot ( This is a region (usually also referred to as a suggestion region) that indicates a planned non-V passing jackpot. The target hit mission effect is an effect in which the target image E21 rotates twirl to hit the arrow as a mission.

  After the hitting mission effect A, a hit success effect A and a hit loss effect A shown below can be executed. In the case of a probability change big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: the change pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), the hit success effect A is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (FIG. 11: the case of the fluctuation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), the target loss effect A is executed.

  In the hit success effect A, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), an effect is performed in which an arrow is pierced in the probability change suggestion area of the target image E21, and an effect indicating that it is a probability change big hit is performed. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and thereafter, a probable change state (high-probability high base state).

  On the other hand, in the target loss effect A, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), an effect is performed in which an arrow stabs into the normal suggestion area of the target image E21, and an effect indicating that a normal jackpot is performed is performed. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and thereafter, a time-saving state (low-probability high base state) is set.

  Note that the arrow always hits after the hitting mission effect A, and either the hit success effect A or the target loss effect A is always performed. That is, at the time when the first reach effect is selected, one of the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot is determined.

[Second reach production]
In the second reach effect of the effect during probable change, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 140 (E). In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (F), a target hit mission effect B is performed. In this hitting mission effect B, a target image E21 is displayed. The target image E22 represents a circular target, a half area of the target is a region indicating a probability-change jackpot (probability-variation suggestion region), and the other half region of the target is a region suggesting a loss (a loss-determination region). Also called). The target hit mission effect is an effect in which the target image E21 rotates twirl to hit the arrow as a mission.

  After the hitting mission effect B, a hit success effect B and a hit loss effect B shown below can be executed. In the case of a probability change big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: the fluctuation pattern P61 (SP4 reach)), the hit success effect B is executed. In the case of a loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: in the case of the fluctuation patterns P65 to P67 and 69 to 71 (reach of SP4)), a target loss effect B is executed.

  In the hit success effect B, as shown in FIG. 140 (G), an effect is performed in which an arrow is stabbed into the probability change suggestion area of the target image E22, and the effect suggests a probability change hit. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and thereafter, a probable change state (high-probability high base state).

  On the other hand, in the target loss effect B, as shown in FIG. 140 (H), an effect is performed in which an arrow is stabbed into the loss region of the target image E22, and an effect indicating that it is not a jackpot but a loss is performed. After this effect, the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started.

  In addition, after the hitting mission effect B, the arrow always hits, and either the hit success effect B or the target loss effect BNP is performed. That is, when the second reach effect is selected, in the case of a big hit, it is definitely determined that the big change big hit will be made. In other words, when the second reach effect is selected, it is either a probable jackpot or a loss.

[Direction B during probable change]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for describing the effect B during the probability change.
In the probable changing effect B, a first reach effect and a second reach effect may be performed. Hereinafter, the first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same fluctuation, but are performed with different fluctuations.

[First Reach Direction]
In the first reach effect of the effect during the probable change, first, as shown in FIG. 141 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (B), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle (engage) is performed.

  After the battle effect, the following battle victory effect and battle defeat effect can be executed. In the case of the probability change jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: the fluctuation pattern P62 (SP5 reach)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of the normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) (FIG. 11: case of the fluctuation pattern P63 (SP5 reach)), a battle defeat effect is executed.

  In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), an effect of victory of the ally character CRA over the enemy character CRB is performed, and a victory suggestion image E23 and a probability change suggestion image E24 are displayed. The victory suggestion image E23 is an image that suggests that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that suggests a probable big hit. Further, the probability change suggestion image E24 is an image suggesting the probability change jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and thereafter, a probable change state (high-probability high base state).

  On the other hand, in the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB, and a defeat suggestion image E25 and a normal suggestion image E26 are displayed. The defeat suggestion image E25 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has lost to the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). The normal suggestion image E26 is an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and thereafter, a time-saving state (low-probability high base state) is set.

  After the battle, the battle must be settled, and either the battle victory effect or the battle defeat effect will be performed. That is, at the time when the first reach effect is selected, one of the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot is determined.

[Second reach production]
In the second reach effect of the effect during the probable change, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 141 (E). In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (F), a target hit mission effect is performed. In this target hit mission effect, a target image E21 is displayed. The target image E22 represents a circular target, a half area of the target is a region indicating a probability-change jackpot (probability-variation suggestion region), and the other half region of the target is a region suggesting a loss (a loss-determination region). Also called). The target hit mission effect is an effect in which the target image E21 rotates twirl to hit the arrow as a mission.

  After the hitting mission effect, a hit success effect and a hit loss effect described below can be executed. In the case of the probability change big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: the fluctuation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), the hit success effect is executed. In the case of a loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: in the case of the fluctuation patterns P65 to P67 and 69 to 71 (reach of SP4)), a target loss effect is executed.

  In the hit success effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (G), an effect is performed in which an arrow is pierced into the probability change suggestion area of the target image E22, and the effect indicates that it is a probability change big hit. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and thereafter, a probable change state (high-probability high base state).

  On the other hand, in the target loss effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (H), an effect is performed in which an arrow is stabbed into the target area of the target image E22, and an effect indicating that the target is not a jackpot but a loss is performed. After this effect, the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started.

  It should be noted that the arrow always hits after the hitting mission effect, and either a hit success effect or a target loss effect is performed. That is, when the second reach effect is selected, in the case of a big hit, it is definitely determined that the big change big hit will be made. In other words, when the second reach effect is selected, it is either a probable jackpot or a loss.

[Direction C during probable change]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for describing the effect C during the probability change.
In the probable change effect C, a first reach effect and a second reach effect may be performed. Hereinafter, the first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same fluctuation, but are performed with different fluctuations.

[First Reach Direction]
In the first reach effect of the effect during probable change, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 142 (A). In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), battle effect 1 is performed. In this battle effect 1, an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle (engage) is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), battle effect 2 is performed. In this battle effect 2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other, and the meter image E27 is displayed. The meter image E27 represents a hit point (life point) of the enemy character CRB, and indicates that the smaller the meter value, the more advantageous the ally character CRA. When the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the ally character CRA wins. The ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle a predetermined number of times (one or more times), and when the ally character CRA damages the enemy character CRB in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 decreases. Of course, when the damage is large, the decrease in the meter value of the meter image E27 is large. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0 at the end of the battle, the ally character CRA wins, and if the meter value remains, the ally character CRA loses.

  After the battle effect 2, a battle victory effect and a battle defeat effect described below can be executed. In the case of the probability change jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: the fluctuation pattern P62 (SP5 reach)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of the normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) (FIG. 11: case of the fluctuation pattern P63 (SP5 reach)), a battle defeat effect is executed.

  In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, and the effect that the ally character CRA wins the enemy character CRB is performed, and the victory suggestion image E23 and the probability change suggestion image E24. Is displayed. The victory suggestion image E23 is an image that suggests that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that suggests a probable big hit. Further, the probability change suggestion image E24 is an image suggesting the probability change jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and thereafter, a probable change state (high-probability high base state).

  On the other hand, in the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (D), the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, and an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB. The image E26 is displayed. The defeat suggestion image E25 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has lost to the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). The normal suggestion image E26 is an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and thereafter, a time-saving state (low-probability high base state) is set.

  After the battle, the battle must be settled, and either the battle victory effect or the battle defeat effect will be performed. That is, at the time when the first reach effect is selected, one of the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot is determined.

[Second reach production]
In the second reach effect of the effect during the probable change, first, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 142 (E). In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (F), a target hit mission effect is performed. In this target hit mission effect, a target image E21 is displayed. The target image E22 represents a circular target, a half area of the target is a region indicating a probability-change jackpot (probability-variation suggestion region), and the other half region of the target is a region suggesting a loss (a loss-determination region). Also called). The target hit mission effect is an effect in which the target image E21 rotates twirl to hit the arrow as a mission.

  After the hitting mission effect, a hit success effect and a hit loss effect described below can be executed. In the case of the probability change big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: the fluctuation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), the hit success effect is executed. In the case of a loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: in the case of the fluctuation patterns P65 to P67 and 69 to 71 (reach of SP4)), a target loss effect is executed.

  In the hit success effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (G), an effect is performed in which an arrow stabs into the probability change suggestion area of the target image E22, and the effect indicates that it is a probability change big hit. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and thereafter, a probable change state (high-probability high base state).

  On the other hand, in the target loss effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), an effect is performed in which an arrow is pierced in the target region of the target image E22, and an effect indicating that the target is not a jackpot but a loss is performed. After this effect, the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started.

  It should be noted that the arrow always hits after the hitting mission effect, and either a hit success effect or a target loss effect is performed. That is, when the second reach effect is selected, in the case of a big hit, it is definitely determined that the big change big hit will be made. In other words, when the second reach effect is selected, it is either a probable jackpot or a loss.

[Direction D during probable change]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for describing the effect D during the probability change.
In the probable changing effect D, a first reach effect and a second reach effect can be performed. Hereinafter, the first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same fluctuation, but are performed with different fluctuations.

[First Reach Direction]
In the first reach effect of the effect during the probable change, a change start effect is first executed as shown in FIG. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (B), battle effect 1 is performed. In this battle effect 1, an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle (engage) is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (C), battle effect 2 is performed. In the battle effect 2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other, and the meter image E27 and the ally participation icon E28 are displayed. The meter image E27 represents a hit point (life point) of the enemy character CRB, and indicates that the smaller the meter value, the more advantageous the ally character CRA. When the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the ally character CRA wins. The ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle a predetermined number of times (one or more times), and when the ally character CRA damages the enemy character CRB in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 decreases. Of course, when the damage is large, the decrease in the meter value of the meter image E27 is large. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0 at the end of the battle, the ally character CRA wins, and if the meter value remains, the ally character CRA loses.

  The ally participation icon E28 is an icon indicating that a predetermined ally character participates in the battle effect. A character is displayed on the ally participation icon E28, and the character participates in the battle. In addition, one of the plurality of characters is displayed on the ally participation icon E28. These characters are provided with an order of strength. If there is an ally participation icon E28 corresponding to a character with a high order of strength, it is easy to lower the meter value of the meter image E27 when the character participates in the battle. Further, as the number of the ally participation icons E28 increases, the number of characters participating in the battle increases, so that the chance of attack increases, and the meter value of the meter image E27 is easily reduced. That is, the greater the number of the friendly participation icons E28 and the higher the order of the strength of the character corresponding to the friendly participation icon E28, the easier it is to lower the meter value of the meter image E27 and the more easily the enemy character CRB is defeated. . As a result, it is easy to be a probability change jackpot.

  After the battle effect 2, a battle victory effect and a battle defeat effect described below can be executed. In the case of the probability change jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: the fluctuation pattern P62 (SP5 reach)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of the normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) (FIG. 11: case of the fluctuation pattern P63 (SP5 reach)), a battle defeat effect is executed.

  In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 143 (D), the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, and the effect that the ally character CRA wins the enemy character CRB is performed. The victory suggestion image E23 and the probability change suggestion image E24. Is displayed. The victory suggestion image E23 is an image that suggests that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that suggests a probable big hit. Further, the probability change suggestion image E24 is an image suggesting the probability change jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and thereafter, a probable change state (high-probability high base state).

  On the other hand, in the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, and the effect that the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB is performed. The image E26 is displayed. The defeat suggestion image E25 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has lost to the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). The normal suggestion image E26 is an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and thereafter, a time-saving state (low-probability high base state) is set.

  After the battle, the battle must be settled, and either the battle victory effect or the battle defeat effect will be performed. That is, at the time when the first reach effect is selected, one of the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot is determined.

[Second reach production]
In the second reach effect of the effect during the probable change, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (F), a target hit mission effect is performed. In this target hit mission effect, a target image E21 is displayed. The target image E22 represents a circular target, a half area of the target is a region indicating a probability-change jackpot (probability-variation suggestion region), and the other half region of the target is a region suggesting a loss (a loss-determination region). Also called). The target hit mission effect is an effect in which the target image E21 rotates twirl to hit the arrow as a mission.

  After the hitting mission effect, a hit success effect and a hit loss effect described below can be executed. In the case of the probability change big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: the fluctuation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), the hit success effect is executed. In the case of a loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: in the case of the fluctuation patterns P65 to P67 and 69 to 71 (reach of SP4)), a target loss effect is executed.

  In the hit success effect, as shown in FIG. 143 (G), an effect is performed in which an arrow is stabbed into the probability change suggestion area of the target image E22, and the effect indicates that it is a probability change big hit. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and thereafter, a probable change state (high-probability high base state).

  On the other hand, in the target loss effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), an effect is performed in which an arrow is pierced in the target region of the target image E22, and an effect indicating that the target is not a jackpot but a loss is performed. After this effect, the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started.

  It should be noted that the arrow always hits after the hitting mission effect, and either a hit success effect or a target loss effect is performed. That is, when the second reach effect is selected, in the case of a big hit, it is definitely determined that the big change big hit will be made. In other words, when the second reach effect is selected, it is either a probable jackpot or a loss.

  In the effects A to D during the probable change, the first reach effect corresponds to a first display effect, and the second reach effect corresponds to a second display effect. In the above-described probable-change effects B to D, the first reach effect corresponds to a battle-type reach effect, and the second reach effect corresponds to a non-battle-type reach effect.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect during the probable change.
[Effect 1]
In the effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when the first reach effect is performed, the jackpot is determined, and the hit mission effect A or the battle effect is performed, and the hit success effect A or the battle is performed. If the process shifts to the victory effect, the probability change jackpot (scheduled V passing planned hit) is determined, and after the jackpot game, the player shifts to a probability change state (high probability and high base state) which is relatively advantageous to the player. If a target hit mission effect A or a battle effect is performed, and a shift to a target loss effect or a battle defeat effect is made, a normal jackpot (scheduled non-passing jackpot) is determined, and a time-saving state (low probability) that is relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game Base state). On the other hand, when the second reach production is performed, the jackpot is not determined. However, if the hitting mission effect B or the hitting mission effect is performed and the process shifts to the hitting success effect B or the hitting success effect, the probability changes. The jackpot (scheduled V passage jackpot) is determined, and after the jackpot game, a transition is made to a probable change state (high-accuracy high base state) that is relatively advantageous to the player. If the target hitting mission effect B or the target hitting mission effect is performed, and the process is shifted to the target loss effect B or the target loss effect, the normal jackpot (scheduled non-passing jackpot) is determined and the player is relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game ( To the low-probability high base state).
That is, when the first reach effect is performed, the jackpot is determined, and either the positive jackpot or the regular jackpot is determined. When the second reach effect is performed, the jackpot is not determined, but in the case of the jackpot, the jackpot is a variable jackpot.
During the probable change (during the high-probability high base state), when performing a reach effect, one of the first reach effect and the second reach effect is selected.
According to this configuration, in the case of the first reach production, if the target hit mission production or the battle production does not shift to the hit success production or the battle victory production, the jackpot is usually determined. In the case of the first reach effect, the person takes considerable care to watch the transition of the first reach effect. On the other hand, in the case of the second reach effect, even if the target hit mission effect B or the hit target mission effect does not shift to the hit success effect B or the hit success effect, the normal jackpot can be avoided. Therefore, the player can watch the transition of the first reach effect gracefully with the feeling that the second reach effect is shifted to the hit success effect B or the hit success effect. As described above, the first reach production and the second reach production have a great difference in the mental state of the player, and when the reach production is performed during the probability change, the first reach production and the second reach production are performed. Since either one of the effects is selected, a sharp game effect can be provided during the probable change. As a result, the player can enjoy a sharp effect during the probable change, and can enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the probable changing effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the first reach effect, a battle effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA battle is performed, and the second reach effect is a battle-type reach. In the case where a different hitting mission effect is performed and the first reach effect is performed, the jackpot is determined, and if the ally character CRA wins, a probable change is a big hit, and after the big hit game, a probable change state that is relatively advantageous to the player is made. When the game shifts and the teammate character CRA loses, the game usually becomes a jackpot and shifts to a time-saving state relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game. According to this configuration, if the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect, the probability is a jackpot, and if the ally character CRA loses, it is a normal jackpot. Therefore, the support target can be narrowed down to the ally character CRA, and the battle effect can be enjoyed in an easy-to-understand manner. Can be. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the effects C to D of the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the meter image E27 is displayed in the battle effect 2 of the first reach effect, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB perform a predetermined number of battles. When the character CRA damages the enemy character CRB, the meter value of the meter image E27 is reduced, and when the meter value becomes 0, the ally character CRA wins, a battle victory effect is performed, and a probability change occurs. After the jackpot, it shifts to the probable change state. According to this configuration, by using the meter image E27, the transition of the win / loss in the battle effect can be easily transmitted to the player, and the player can feel delighted with the battle effect. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the probable effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second reach production, a target application mission effect indicating whether or not the target mission is successful is executed, and the target application mission succeeds. In, the jackpot is determined, and after the jackpot game, the state shifts to the probable change state. According to this configuration, if the target mission is successful, the probability change jackpot is determined, and even if the target mission is not successful, it does not usually become a jackpot, so the superb production while immersing the target mission in superiority You can see it elegantly. In addition, by providing a mission-based effect, it is possible to easily communicate to the player whether the hit is a jackpot or a loss. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the effect D during the probable change of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the battle effect, the display of the participation of a predetermined character in the battle is performed, and the greater the number of participation, the higher the probability that the ally character will win. According to this configuration, the more the predetermined character participates in the battle, the more enthusiasm the player gets, and the interest in the battle effect can be improved. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the probable effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the probable effects are performed in the game state in the probable change state. According to this configuration, it is possible to excite the effect during the probable change in which the effect is likely to be monotonous because the next big hit is easy. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following describes a modification of the effect during probable change.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the probable change state, only the effect during the probable change (the first reach effect and the second reach effect) may be performed.

[Modification 2]
The effects during the probable change (the first reach performance and the second reach performance) of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment are not only in the probable change state (during the probable change), but also in the normal state (low-probability low-base state) and the time reduction state (low This may be performed in the high-accuracy low-base state (latency-probable-change state). Further, the first reach effect or the second reach effect of the effect during the probable change of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment may be performed in a predetermined mode. The predetermined mode may be provided, for example, after the big hit game and before the predetermined number of changes. In addition, the predetermined mode may be provided from a change after a change in which the super reach effect is deviated to a predetermined number of changes. Further, the predetermined mode may be provided as a prefetch effect.

[Modification 3]
In the effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA battle in the battle effect.

[Modification 4]
In the probable changing effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the ally participation icon E28 is displayed, and when the ally character corresponding to the ally participation icon E28 participates in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 is likely to decrease. However, if the enemy participation icon is displayed and the enemy character corresponding to the enemy participation icon is weak, the battle opportunity may be increased for the ally character and the meter value of the meter image E27 may be easily reduced.

[Modification 5]
In the effects C and D of the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the meter image E27 corresponds to the HP of the enemy character, but may correspond to the HP of the ally character. In this case, if the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, the ally character wins, and if the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the ally character loses. Although the meter image E27 suggests that a decrease in the meter value is advantageous for a battle, the meter image E27 may be made to correspond to an attack energy that increases each time a friendly character attacks. In this case, as the meter value of the meter image E27 increases, the victory probability of the ally character increases.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
When the first display effect is performed, the jackpot is determined, and if the first condition is satisfied, the game proceeds to a first gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, If a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the game shifts to a second gaming state relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot,
If the second display effect is performed, the jackpot is not determined, but in the case of a jackpot, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the state shifts to the first game state,
When a reach effect is performed in a predetermined game mode, one of the first display effect and the second display effect is selected.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E2-1,
The first display effect is a battle-reach effect in which a first character and a second character battle.
The second display effect is a non-battle reach effect different from the battle reach,
When the first display effect is performed, a jackpot is determined, and if the first character wins, the game shifts to a first gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, and If the first character loses, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the game shifts to a second gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous for the player.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E2-2,
In the battle-reach effect, a meter is displayed, the meter value represented by the meter is reduced by the predetermined number of battles, and if the meter value decreases to a predetermined value, the first character wins and the first game state Migrate to,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E2-2 or Aspect E2-3,
In the non-battle reach effect, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined mission is successful is executed. If the predetermined mission is successful, a jackpot is determined, and after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the Shift to the first game state,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-2 to E2-4,
In the battle-type reach effect, a display of participation of a predetermined character in the battle is performed, and the greater the number of battles, the higher the probability that the first character will win.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-2 to E2-5,
The predetermined game mode is a mode indicating that the game state is a probable change state,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The battle effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147. This battle effect is during the display of the variation of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”). It can be executed during a state, during a power support, or the like.

[Battle production A]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect A.
In the battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 144 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 144 (A), above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters “probably changing” are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and the display pattern evolves from the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 144A, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character on the player side are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. An image in which the CRB battles is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), a battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol arrangement scheduled to be stopped becomes a probable jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the probability change state continues. As shown in FIG. 144 (C), a friendly character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a letter “V” indicating that the friendly character CRA has won is displayed near the friendly character CRA. Have been. On the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" is displayed as the probability-variable jackpot symbol array AOZ at which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are to be stopped. Note that this “777” is displayed so as to be different in size. The left “7” on the side of the ally character CRA is the largest, the next “7” is the largest, and the opposite side of the ally character CRA. A certain right “7” is displayed smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ in this way, the player can be impressed with the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (D), on the display screen 7a, a battle loss big hit symbol arrangement announcement effect is executed. This battle loss jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRA loses as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA loses, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA loses, it falls from the probable state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 144 (D), an enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a letter “V” indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed near the enemy character CRB. Have been. On the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" is displayed as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ, which is to be stopped in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that this “888” is displayed so as to be different in size. The right “8” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the next “8” is the largest, and the opposite side of the enemy character CRB. A certain left "8" is displayed smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ in this way, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. In addition, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ and the enemy character CRB and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Can be.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (E), a probable change big hit suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the probable jackpot suggestion effect, as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the character “WIN!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has won is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character of "WIN!", It is possible to make the player think that the probability of winning is "777" in the probability winning symbol arrangement AOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (F), a certain-variable big-hit decision effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the probability change jackpot confirmation effect, the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 144 (A) is the result of the battle effect shown in FIGS. 144 (B) to 144 (E) as a probability change jackpot symbol array AOZ. At "777" in FIG. In addition, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "Surely change big hit!" Are displayed. The player is convinced of the certainty jackpot by the certainty jackpot determination effect.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 144 (E), a normal jackpot suggestion effect may be executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 144 (G). In this normal jackpot suggestion effect, the character “Defeat!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has lost as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character ""! ", It is possible to make the player think that the normal jackpot is" 888 "in the normal jackpot symbol arrangement BOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (H), a normal jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot determination effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 144 (A) is the result of the battle effects of FIGS. 144 (B) to 144 (E), as a normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. At "888", indicating that a normal jackpot was hit. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "usually big hits!" Are displayed. With this normal jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the normal jackpot.

  That is, in the battle effect A shown in FIG. 144, during the battle effect, the symbol arrangement when winning and the symbol arrangement when losing are displayed in advance. The game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high-probability state (probable change), and the symbol arrangement at the time of victory is a noticeable display of the probability variable jackpot arrangement, and the symbol arrangement at the time of defeat is usually the jackpot arrangement. Notice is displayed. That is, when the process shifts to the battle effect, the jackpot is determined, and whether the determined jackpot is the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot is displayed in advance during the battle effect. In other words, a notice is displayed as to whether the probable state will continue during the battle effect or whether the state will fall from the probable state to the normal state.

[Battle production B]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect B.
In the battle effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 145 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 145 (A), above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters “probably changing” are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and the decorative effect fluctuates from the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 145 (A). An image in which the CRB battles is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (C), a battle victory jackpot symbol array announcement effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol arrangement scheduled to be stopped becomes a probable jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the probability change state continues. As shown in FIG. 145 (C), a friendly character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a character “V” indicating that the friendly character CRA has won is displayed near the friendly character CRA. Have been. On the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" is displayed as the probable variable jackpot symbol array AOZ1 at which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are to be stopped. Note that this “777” is displayed so as to be different in size. The left “7” on the side of the ally character CRA is the largest, the next “7” is the largest, and the opposite side of the ally character CRA. A certain right “7” is displayed smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ1 in this way, the player can be impressed with the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), on the display screen 7a, a battle loss jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect is executed. This battle loss jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRA loses as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA loses, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA loses, it falls from the probable state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 145 (D), an enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a letter “V” indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed near the enemy character CRB. Have been. On the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" is displayed as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ, which is to be stopped in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that this “888” is displayed so as to be different in size. The right “8” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the next “8” is the largest, and the opposite side of the enemy character CRB. A certain left "8" is displayed smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ in this way, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Furthermore, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probability jackpot symbol array AOZ1 and the enemy character CRB and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probability jackpot symbol array AOZ1 and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Can be.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E), a probable change big hit suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the probable jackpot suggestion effect, as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the character “WIN!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has won is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character of "WIN!", It is possible to make the player think that the probability change jackpot is "777" in the probability change jackpot symbol array AOZ1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (F), a probable change 16R (round) big hit determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the probability changing 16R jackpot determination effect, the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 145 (A) is the result of the battle effect of FIGS. 145 (B) to 145 (E), and the probability changing jackpot symbol array AOZ1. Stops at "777" as shown in FIG. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as “Surely change 16R jackpot!” Are displayed. The player is convinced of the 16-round probability change jackpot by the certainty-change 16R jackpot determination effect.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 145 (C), as shown in FIG. 145 (G), a battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRC wins as a result of the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRC wins, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped becomes a probable jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the probability change state continues. As shown in FIG. 145 (G), a friendly character CRC is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a character “V” indicating that the friendly character CRC has won is displayed near the friendly character CRC. Have been. On the right side of the display screen 7a, "555" is displayed as the probable variable jackpot symbol array AOZ2, at which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are to be stopped. Note that this “555” is displayed so as to be different in size. The left “5” on the side of the ally character CRC is the largest, the next “5” is the largest, and the “555” is on the opposite side to the ally character CRC. A certain right “5” is displayed smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ2 in this manner, the player can be impressed with the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ2.
That is, the difference between the battle victory jackpot symbol array announcement effect shown in FIG. 145 (G) and the battle victory jackpot symbol array announcement effect shown in FIG. 145 (C) is that the ally character CRA becomes the ally character CRC. This means that “777” as the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ1 is “555” as the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E) described above, a probable change jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRB battle, indicating that the ally character CRC has won. The character “WIN!” Is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character of “WIN!”, It is possible to make the player think that the probability change jackpot is “555” in the probability change jackpot symbol array AOZ2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (H), a certainty-changing 15R (round) big hit determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability-changing 15R jackpot determination effect, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 145 (A) is the result of the battle effect shown in FIGS. 145 (B) to 145 (E). Stop at "555" as shown in FIG. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "Surely change 15R jackpot!" Are displayed. The player is convinced of the fifteenth round certainty hit jackpot by the certainty-change 15R jackpot determination effect.

That is, in the battle effect B shown in FIG. 145, during the battle effect, the symbol arrangement when winning and the symbol arrangement when losing are displayed in advance. The game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high-probability state (probable change), and the symbol arrangement at the time of victory is a noticeable display of the probability variable jackpot arrangement, and the symbol arrangement at the time of defeat is usually the jackpot arrangement. Notice is displayed. That is, when the process shifts to the battle effect, the jackpot is determined, and whether the determined jackpot is the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot is displayed in advance during the battle effect. In other words, a notice is displayed as to whether the probable state will continue during the battle effect or whether the state will fall from the probable state to the normal state.
Further, in the battle effect B, there are a plurality of types of probable jackpot symbol arrangements, and the plurality of types of probable jackpot symbol arrays are set with different numbers of probable jackpots. Further, there are a plurality of types of ally characters, and each of the plurality of types of ally characters is linked to any one of a plurality of types of probable jackpot symbol arrangements to be displayed when a battle effect is won. That is, the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1 displayed in advance when the ally character CRA shown in FIG. 145 (C) wins is a 16-round probability variation jackpot symbol array “777”, and the ally character CRC shown in FIG. 145 (G). Is a jackpot symbol array AOZ2 to be displayed in advance when the player wins, which is a symbol array “555” of jackpot symbols of 15 rounds.
That is, in the battle effect B shown in FIG. 145, there are a plurality of types of ally characters on the player side that battle in the battle effect, and the player determines when the ally character appears in the battle effect when the battle is won. The number of rounds of the jackpot is known. In other words, depending on which ally character appears in the battle effect, the player can estimate the number of balls to be played out in the jackpot game when winning the battle.

[Battle production C]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect C.
In battle effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 146 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 146 (A), the characters “probably changing” are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and the display pattern 7D is developed from the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 146 (A). An image in which the CRB battles is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), on the display screen 7a, a battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect is executed. This battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol arrangement scheduled to be stopped becomes a probable jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the probability change state continues. As shown in FIG. 146 (C), a friendly character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a character “V” indicating that the friendly character CRA has won is displayed near the friendly character CRA. Have been. On the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" is displayed as the probability-variable jackpot symbol array AOZ at which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are to be stopped. Note that this “777” is displayed so as to be different in size. The left “7” on the side of the ally character CRA is the largest, the next “7” is the largest, and the opposite side of the ally character CRA. A certain right “7” is displayed smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ in this way, the player can be impressed with the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (D), on the display screen 7a, a battle loss big hit symbol arrangement announcement effect is executed. This battle loss jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRA loses as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA loses, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA loses, it falls from the probable state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 146 (D), an enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a character “V” indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed near the enemy character CRB. Have been. On the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" is displayed as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that this “888” is displayed so as to be different in size. The right “8” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the next “8” is the largest, and the opposite side of the enemy character CRB. A certain left "8" is displayed smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 in this way, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Further, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probable jackpot symbol array AOZ and the enemy character CRB and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probable jackpot symbol array AOZ1 and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1. be able to.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (E), a normal jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot suggestion effect, the character “Defeat!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has lost as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character of “defeat!”, It is possible to make the player think that the normal jackpot is “888” in the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (F), a promotion failure normal jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the promotion failure normal jackpot confirmation effect, the screen of the character "Defeat!" Shown in FIG. 146 (E) is switched, and "888" as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. In the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, a promotion effect SKG is displayed. In the promotion effect SKG, a plurality of types of jackpot symbol arrays including a normal jackpot symbol array (for example, even number of zoro eyes) and a probable variable jackpot symbol array (eg, odd number of zoro eyes) are displayed in a display area surrounded by a square frame. In the state of scrolling up and down, a button effect of causing the player to repeatedly hit a button is performed. In this button effect, the button image BOG is displayed in a manner protruding from the display area (square frame) of the promotion effect SKG, and characters "button continuous hit!" Are displayed below the button image BOG. ing. Thereby, the promotion effect SKG can be impressed to the player, and the operation of the effect button 63 can be appealed. Then, as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the buttons (or after a predetermined period of time when the player does not hit the buttons continuously), the plurality of types of jackpot symbol arrangements being scrolled are stopped, and the normal jackpot symbol array or the probable jackpot symbol arrangement is stopped. One of the symbol arrays is displayed. In the promotion failure normal jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 146 (F), it is shown that “888” (normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1) has been stopped as the normal jackpot symbol arrangement, whereby the promotion from the normal jackpot to the probable change jackpot is performed. Suggests that it failed. As a result, "888" as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is continuously displayed as it is without being changed to the probability variable jackpot symbol array, and the normal jackpot symbol array "888" is displayed. At the top, the words "Promotion failure usually big hit!" This allows the player to recognize that the promotion from the normal jackpot to the probable jackpot has failed.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 146 (D), as shown in FIG. 146 (G), a battle loss big hit symbol arrangement announcement effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. This battle loss jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRC loses as a result of the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRD. It is a production. When the ally character CRC loses, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA loses, it falls from the probable state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 146 (G), an enemy character CRD is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a letter “V” indicating that the enemy character CRD has won is displayed near the enemy character CRD. Have been. On the left side of the display screen 7a, "666" is displayed as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Note that this “666” is displayed so as to be different in size. The right “6”, which is the enemy character CRB side, is the largest, the next “6” is the largest, and the other side is opposite to the enemy character CRB. A certain left “6” is displayed smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 in this manner, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2. Further, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probability jackpot symbol array AOZ and the enemy character CRD and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probability jackpot symbol array AOZ and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2. Can be.
That is, the difference between the battle loss jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect shown in FIG. 146 (G) and the battle loss jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect shown in FIG. 146 (C) is that the enemy character CRB becomes the enemy character CRD. This means that “888” as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 is “666” as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (H), on the display screen 7a, a promotion success probability changing big hit determination effect is executed. In the promotion success probability changing jackpot determination effect, the screen of the character of "Defeat!" Shown in FIG. 146 (E) is switched, and "666" as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a ( In addition, a promotion effect SKG is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. In the promotion effect SKG, a plurality of types of jackpot symbol arrays including a normal jackpot symbol array (for example, even number of zoro eyes) and a probable variable jackpot symbol array (eg, odd number of zoro eyes) are displayed in a display area surrounded by a square frame. In the state of scrolling up and down, a button effect of causing the player to repeatedly hit a button is performed. In this button effect, the button image BOG is displayed in a manner protruding from the display area (square frame) of the promotion effect SKG, and characters "button continuous hit!" Are displayed below the button image BOG. ing. Thereby, the promotion effect SKG can be impressed to the player, and the operation of the effect button 63 can be appealed. Then, as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the buttons (or after a predetermined period of time when the player does not hit the buttons continuously), the plurality of types of jackpot symbol arrangements being scrolled are stopped, and the normal jackpot symbol array or the probable jackpot symbol arrangement is stopped. One of the symbol arrays is displayed. In the promotion success probability variable jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 146 (H), it is shown that “777” is stopped as the probability variation jackpot symbol array, which suggests that the promotion from the normal jackpot to the probability variation jackpot has been successful. You. As a result, “666” as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a changes to the probability variable jackpot symbol array “777”, and “promotion” is displayed above the probability variable jackpot symbol array “777”. "Successful change big hit!" Is newly displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the promotion from the normal jackpot to the probable jackpot has been made.

That is, in the battle effect C shown in FIG. 146, during the battle effect, the symbol arrangement when winning and the symbol arrangement when losing are displayed in advance. The game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high-probability state (probable change), and the symbol arrangement at the time of victory is a noticeable display of the probability variable jackpot arrangement, and the symbol arrangement at the time of defeat is usually the jackpot arrangement. Notice is displayed. That is, when the process shifts to the battle effect, the jackpot is determined, and whether the determined jackpot is the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot is displayed in advance during the battle effect. In other words, a notice is displayed as to whether the probable state will continue during the battle effect or whether the state will fall from the probable state to the normal state.
Further, in the battle effect C, there are a plurality of types of normal jackpot symbol arrangements, and the plurality of types of ordinary jackpot symbol arrangements each have different promotion rates (promotion rates from the regular jackpot to the probable jackpot). . Furthermore, there are a plurality of types of enemy characters, and each of the plurality of types of enemy characters is associated with one of a plurality of types of normal jackpot symbol arrangements to be displayed when a battle effect is won. That is, the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 displayed in advance when the enemy character CRB shown in FIG. 146 (D) wins is the normal jackpot symbol array “888”, and the enemy character CRD shown in FIG. 146 (G) has won. The normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 that is sometimes displayed in advance is the normal jackpot symbol array “666”. Then, the promotion rate from the normal jackpot to the probable jackpot is set higher for "666" than for "888".
That is, in the battle effect C shown in FIG. 146, there are a plurality of types of enemy characters that battle in the battle effect, and depending on which enemy character appears in the battle effect, the player determines whether the enemy character has won the battle. The promotion rate from the normal jackpot to the probable jackpot can be estimated. In other words, depending on which enemy character appears in the battle effect, even if the ally character loses the battle, the player is able to estimate the degree of expectation to be a certainty big hit.

[Battle production D]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect D.
In the battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 147 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 147 (A), characters “probably changing” are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and the display pattern evolves from the decorative symbol change effect illustrated in FIG. 147 (A). An image in which the CRB battles is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), a battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol arrangement scheduled to be stopped becomes a probable jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the probability change state continues. As shown in FIG. 147 (C), a friendly character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a character “V” indicating that the friendly character CRA has won is displayed near the friendly character CRA. Have been. On the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" is displayed as the probability-variable jackpot symbol array AOZ at which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are to be stopped. Note that this “777” is displayed so as to be different in size. The left “7” on the side of the ally character CRA is the largest, the next “7” is the largest, and the opposite side of the ally character CRA. A certain right “7” is displayed smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ in this way, the player can be impressed with the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), on the display screen 7a, a battle loss big hit symbol arrangement announcement effect is executed. This battle loss jackpot symbol arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRA loses as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA loses, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA loses, it falls from the probable state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 147 (D), an enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a letter “V” indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed near the enemy character CRB. Have been. On the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" is displayed as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ, which is to be stopped in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that this “888” is displayed so as to be different in size. The right “8” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the next “8” is the largest, and the opposite side of the enemy character CRB. A certain left "8" is displayed smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ in this way, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. In addition, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ and the enemy character CRB and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Can be.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), a normal jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot suggestion effect, the character “Defeat!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has lost as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character ""! ", It is possible to make the player think that the normal jackpot is" 888 "in the normal jackpot symbol arrangement BOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), a normal jackpot confirmation fake effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the normal jackpot confirmation fake effect, the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 147 (A) is the result of the battle effect of FIGS. 147 (B) to 147 (E), and the display screen 7a is usually displayed. This is an effect that makes the player think that “888” as the jackpot symbol arrangement BOZ has stopped, and makes the player feel as if he or she normally hit a jackpot. However, in the normal jackpot confirmation fake effect shown in FIG. 147 (F), “888” as the normal jackpot symbol arrangement BOZ is not completely stopped, and slightly swings up and down (two or three frames). It has become. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "usually big hits!" Are displayed. That is, the normal jackpot confirmation fake effect gives the player the illusion that the regular jackpot has been confirmed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), a battle resurrection probability big hit suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the battle resurrection probability change jackpot suggestion effect is a normal jackpot confirmation fake effect shown in FIG. 147 (F), and the screen of “888” of the displayed normal jackpot symbol array BOZ is switched. The battle effect shown in FIG. 147 (B) is executed in which the ally character CRA that has once been defeated is revived and battles again with the enemy character CRB. Then, in the battle effect performed again, the friend character CRA has won this time, and as a result, the center of the display screen 7a indicates that the friend character CRA has won as shown in FIG. 147 (G). The words "Resurrection victory!" By displaying the character “Resurrection victory!”, It is possible to make the player think that the probability of winning is “777” in the probability winning jackpot symbol array AOZ1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (H), a certain-variable big-hit determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the probability change jackpot confirmation effect, the screen of “Resurrection Victory!” Displayed in the battle resurrection probability change jackpot suggestion shown in FIG. 147 (G) is switched to “777” as the probability change jackpot symbol array AOZ. 7a, which indicates that the probability of a large hit has been reached. In addition, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "Surely change big hit!" Are displayed. The player is convinced of the certainty jackpot by the certainty jackpot determination effect.

That is, in the battle effect D shown in FIG. 147, during the battle effect, the symbol arrangement when winning and the symbol arrangement when losing are displayed in advance. The game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high-probability state (probable change), and the symbol arrangement at the time of victory is a noticeable display of the probability variable jackpot arrangement, and the symbol arrangement at the time of defeat is usually the jackpot arrangement. Notice is displayed. That is, when the process shifts to the battle effect, the jackpot is determined, and whether the determined jackpot is the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot is displayed in advance during the battle effect. In other words, a notice is displayed as to whether the probable state will continue during the battle effect or whether the state will fall from the probable state to the normal state.
Further, in the battle effect D, the ally character on the player side once defeats in the battle effect, causing the player to assume a normal jackpot and fall from the probable state to the normal state, and then the ally character is revived and again A battle performance is performed, and a resurrection performance in which the ally character wins is performed this time. As a result, a player who has assumed a normal jackpot to fall from the probable state to the normal state can be made to think that the probable state continues as a probable jackpot. In other words, in the battle effect D shown in FIG. 147, after the facsimile display of the normal jackpot symbol arrangement once displayed in advance, an effect of finalizing the probable variable jackpot symbol arrangement displayed in advance is performed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the battle effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 144 to FIG. 147, a battle effect in which a player's ally character and an enemy character compete against each other can be performed, and the battle effect is performed in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbol. During the battle effect, a stop symbol array in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbol when the ally character wins and a stop symbol array in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbol when the ally character loses are displayed in advance. ing. According to this configuration, the player can guess a privilege that is given to the player when the teammate character wins and a penalty that is disadvantageous to the player when the teammate character loses. Become. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, in the battle effect, the stop symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol when the ally character wins is a probable variable jackpot symbol array. According to this configuration, when the ally character wins, the player knows that a big hit occurs, and after the big hit, the gaming state shifts to the high probability state or the high probability state continues. You will understand Thereby, the player can start the game with great expectation, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, the probability-variable jackpot symbol arrangement has a configuration in which the number of jackpot rounds differs depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player can know the number of rounds of the probability change jackpot when the ally character wins the battle. In other words, the player can estimate the number of payouts in the jackpot game when the ally character wins the battle. This allows the player to play the game with great expectation when the probable jackpot symbol arrangement with a large number of rounds (a large number of balls) in the battle effect is displayed in advance, and as a result, Can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, in the battle effect, the stop symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol when the ally character is defeated is usually a big hit symbol array. According to this configuration, when the ally character loses, the player knows that it will be a big hit, and after the big hit, the game state is maintained in the normal state or the time saving state, or the probability change state is changed to the normal state. And shift to a time saving state. Thus, the player can accurately grasp the development of the game ahead, and can play a game appropriate for the development of the game ahead. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, the normal jackpot symbol arrangement has a configuration in which the promotion rate to the probability variable jackpot varies depending on its type. According to this configuration, the player can understand the promotion rate from the normal jackpot to the probable jackpot when the ally character loses the battle. In other words, even when the ally character loses the battle, the player can estimate the degree of expectation to be promoted from the normal jackpot and become a certain-change jackpot. With this, even when the ally character loses in the battle, the player can take on the game with great expectation when the normal jackpot symbol arrangement with a high promotion rate to the probability change jackpot is displayed in advance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the battle effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the image display device 7 is configured with one display screen 7a, and the symbol when the ally character wins on this one display screen 7a. The arrangement and the symbol arrangement at the time of defeat are displayed in advance on a plane, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is provided with a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the rear side, and the symbol arrangement to be displayed in advance is displayed on the first display screen. It may be. By doing so, the symbol arrangement to be displayed in advance is displayed closer to the player, and it is possible to strongly appeal to the player in an extremely powerful manner. Note that the image display device having the first display screen and the second display screen may be configured to be able to display a stereoscopic image (3D). By doing so, the display of the symbol arrangement to be announced in 3D can further appeal to the player.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, during the battle effect, the probable variable jackpot symbol arrangement when the ally character wins and the normal jackpot symbol array when the ally character loses are displayed in advance. As described above, the display timing of the symbol arrangement to be notified is not particularly limited. For example, after displaying the probability variable jackpot symbol array (normal jackpot symbol array), the normal jackpot symbol array (probably variable jackpot symbol array) may be displayed continuously, or may be displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed. Good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 144 to FIG. 147, a battle effect is performed in a high-probability state (during a probable change), and a symbol arrangement when a teammate character wins and when a teammate character loses. Is displayed in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a battle effect may be performed in a time reduction state or a normal state in which the gaming state is a low probability state, and a symbol arrangement when the ally character wins and a symbol arrangement when the ally character loses may be displayed in advance. In this case, the symbol arrangement when the ally character wins may be a jackpot symbol array (including a probability variable jackpot symbol array and a normal jackpot symbol array), and the symbol arrangement when the teammate character loses may be a lost symbol array. Alternatively, the symbol arrangement when the ally character wins is a probable variable jackpot symbol array, and the symbol arrangement when the ally character loses is a regular jackpot symbol array with no time reduction, with a small number of balls (for example, two rounds jackpot), Alternatively, the winning number may be eliminated (for example, two rounds, the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short, and a winning is substantially impossible).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, there are a plurality of types of probable jackpot symbol arrangements when the ally character wins, and the plurality of types of probable jackpot arrangements have different numbers of rounds. However, similarly, there is a plurality of types of normal jackpot symbol arrangement when the ally character is defeated, and the plurality of types of ordinary jackpot symbol arrays have different numbers of normal jackpots respectively. It may be set. In this way, the player can know the number of rounds of the normal jackpot when the player loses the battle, and can estimate the number of payouts in the jackpot game when the player loses the battle.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, in the battle effect, a V attacker having a V region in a predetermined round of a jackpot game, commonly called a V-ST machine, is opened, and this opening is performed. As a result, the game state after the jackpot is changed to a high-probability state (probable change state) until a predetermined number of symbol changes are performed by causing the V attacker to win the game ball and pass through the V region. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the battle effect may be performed by a gaming machine called a loop machine, in which a gaming state becomes a high-probability state (probable-variable state) after the jackpot and reaches the next jackpot. In this way, if the ally character wins in the battle effect and the probability of winning is changed in the probability variation jackpot symbol arrangement that has been announced, the high-probability state (probability variation state) continues until the next jackpot, and as a result, Further, the interest of the game can be improved. Alternatively, the battle effect is a so-called one-type two-type blender, a pattern-matching by pattern fluctuation, a time-saving big hit, a time-saving big hit, and a time-saving big hit. The time-saving state (electric support state) continues until the symbol change occurs, and in this time-saving state, when the variable starting opening (special 2) hits, the two types of attackers having the V region are opened, and the two types of attackers that have been opened are removed. The game may be performed by a gaming machine having two types of jackpots, which have a short time and have a large jackpot by passing a game ball and passing through the V region. In this case, in the battle effect, it is performed in connection with the symbol change in which one kind of jackpot is drawn, and when the ally character wins, the jackpot symbol arrangement with time saving is displayed in advance, and when the ally character loses, the jackpot symbol array without time saving is announced. What is necessary is just to display it.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E3-1]
Display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
A decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means,
A gaming machine with
The display means can execute a battle effect in which an ally character on the player side and an enemy character compete as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
The display means performs the battle effect in a predetermined change of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display means, during the battle effect, a stop symbol array in the predetermined change of the decorative symbol when the ally character wins, Displaying a stop symbol array in a predetermined change of the decorative symbol when the ally character is eliminated, in advance,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect E3-2]
In the battle effect, the stop symbol array of the decorative symbol when the ally character wins is a probability variable jackpot symbol array,
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1, wherein:
[Aspect E3-3]
The probability variable jackpot symbol array, the number of jackpot rounds differs depending on the type,
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-2, wherein:
[Aspect E3-4]
In the battle effect, the stop symbol array of the decorative symbol when the ally character is defeated is usually a jackpot symbol array,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-3, wherein
[Aspect E3-5]
The normal jackpot symbol arrangement, the promotion rate to the probability variable jackpot differs depending on the type,
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-4, wherein:

[Other Modifications]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than those described above may be included.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a spinning type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine, instead of a pachinko gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a display effect may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is produced using an image representing the sword member 64. The display effect may be executed, or a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

  In addition, among the plurality of effect examples and / or modified examples described above, two or more effect examples and / or modified examples may be combined. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the above-described display effect may be executed by the sub-display device.

  Although the present embodiment has been described based on the embodiment and the modified examples, the embodiment of the above-described embodiment is for facilitating understanding of the present embodiment, and does not limit the present embodiment. This embodiment can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and its equivalents are included in this embodiment.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (Hold icon)
9C: the reserved image (the reserved icon)
14. First movable role 15 ... Second movable role 20 ... First starting port 21 ... Second starting port 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Effect control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
When the first display effect is performed, the jackpot is determined, and if the first condition is satisfied, the game proceeds to a first gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, If a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the game shifts to a second gaming state relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot,
If the second display effect is performed, the jackpot is not determined, but in the case of a jackpot, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the state shifts to the first game state,
In the case of a jackpot in the predetermined game mode, as the effect based on the jackpot, one of the first display effect and the second display effect is selected and displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

Images